MAPware

Programming Manual

Your Industrial Control Solutions Source

_____________________
www.maplesystems.com

For use with the following:

HMC7000 Series
HMC3000 Series
HMC2000 Series
HMC4000 Series

Maple Systems, Inc. | 808 134th St. SW, Suite 120, Everett, WA 98204 | 425.745.3229 1
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
This manual is a publication of Maple Systems, Inc., and is provided for use by its customers only. The
contents of the manual are copyrighted by Maple Systems, Inc.; reproduction in whole or in part, for use
other than in support of Maple Systems equipment, is prohibited without the specific written
permission of Maple Systems.

WARRANTY
Warranty Statements are included with each unit at the time of purchase and are available at
www.maplesystems.com

TECHNICAL SUPPORT
This manual is designed to provide the necessary information for trouble-free installation and operation
of Maple Systems products. However, if you need assistance, please contact Maple Systems:
• Phone: 425-745-3229
• Email: [email protected]
• Web: www.maplesystems.com

ii
Intended Audience
A Qualified Person is one that has the skills and knowledge relating to the construction, installation,
operation, and maintenance of the electrical equipment and has received safety training on the hazards
involved. Qualified Personnel shall:
• Have carefully read the entire operation manual.
• Be trained and authorized to safely energize, de-energize, ground, lockout and tag circuits and
equipment, and clear faults in accordance with established safety practices.
• Be trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as safety shoes, rubber
gloves, hard hats, safety glasses, face shields, flash clothing, etc., in accordance with established
safety practices.
• Be trained in rendering first aid.

Purpose and Scope of this Manual

Thank you for purchasing from Maple Systems. This manual provides information on how to safely
install, operate, and maintain your product.
Read the manual completely before installing, operating, or performing maintenance on this equipment.
This manual and the accompanying drawings should be considered a permanent part of the equipment
and should be readily available for reference and review.
Maple Systems reserves the right, without prior notice, to update information, make product changes,
or to discontinue any product or service identified in this publication.

iii
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the
operational manual.
• The HMI + PLC / MLC units are general-purpose products. It is a system component and is used
in conjunction with other items of industrial equipment such as; sensors, actuators, Adjustable
Speed Drives, etc.
• A detailed system analysis and job safety analysis should be performed by the systems designer
or systems integrator before including the unit in any new or existing system. Contact Maple
Systems for options availability and for application-specific system integration information if
required.
• The product may be used to control an adjustable speed drive connected to high voltage
sources and rotating machinery that is inherently dangerous if not operated safely. Interlock all
energy sources, hazardous locations, and guards in order to restrict the exposure of personnel
to hazards. The adjustable speed drive may start the motor without warning.
• Signs at the equipment installation must be posted to this effect. A familiarity with Auto restart
settings is a requirement when controlling adjustable speed drives. Failure of external or
ancillary components may cause intermittent system operation, i.e., the system may start the
motor without warning or may not stop on command. Improperly designed or improperly
installed system interlocks and permissives may render a motor unable to start or stop on
command.
• Control through serial communications can fail or can also override local controls, which can
create an unsafe condition. System safety features should be employed and designed into the
integrated system in a manner such that system operation, even in the event of system failure,
will not cause harm or result in personnel injury or system damage. Use of the built-in system
protective features and interlocks of the equipment being controlled is highly recommended
(i.e., emergency-off, overload protection, etc.).
• Never use the HMC units to perform emergency stops. Separate switches outside the product,
the PLC, and the ASD should be used for emergency stops.
• Changes or modifications to the MAPware program should not be made without the approval of
the system designer or systems integrator. Minor changes or modifications could cause the
defeat of safety interlocks and permissives. Any changes or modifications should be noted and
included with the system documentation.

WARNING It is extremely important that the unit and other peripherals be used for the
specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can
directly or indirectly affect human beings.

WARNING Do not use input functions as PT touch switches for applications where
danger to human life or serious damage is possible, or for emergency switch
applications.

iv
Safety Precautions
Please observe the following precautions when installing the unit. Failure to comply with these
restrictions could result in loss of life, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
WARNING Do not operate the unit in areas subject to explosion due to flammable
gases, vapors, or dusts.

WARNING Do not connect the unit to an AC power source. You will cause permanent
damage to the unit.

WARNING Do not attempt to use a DC power supply that does not meet unit power
requirements. You may cause malfunction or permanent damage to unit.

WARNING Do not power the unit with a DC power supply used for inductive loads or for
input circuitry to the programmable logic controller. Severe voltage spikes caused by
these devices may damage the unit.

CAUTION

Upon receipt of the equipment inspect the packaging and equipment for shipping
damage.
Carefully unpack the equipment and check for parts that were damaged from
shipping, missing parts, or concealed damage. If any discrepancies are discovered, it
should be noted with the carrier prior to accepting the shipment, if possible. File a
claim with the carrier if necessary and immediately notify your Maple Systems
representative.
DO NOT install or energize equipment that has been damaged. Damaged equipment
may fail during operation resulting in further equipment damage or personal injury.
Check to see that the model number specified on the nameplate conforms to the
order specifications.
Modification of this equipment is dangerous and must not be performed except by
factory trained representatives. When modifications are required contact your
Maple Systems representative.
Inspections may be required before and after moving installed equipment.
Keep the equipment in an upright position as indicated on the shipping carton.
Contact your Maple Systems representative for assistance if required.

Handling and Storage

• Use proper lifting techniques when moving the product; including properly sizing up the load,
and getting assistance if required.
• Store in a well-ventilated covered location and preferably in the original carton if the equipment
will not be used upon receipt.

v
 Safety Precautions for Storage
• Store in a cool, clean, and dry location. Avoid storage locations with extreme temperatures,
rapid temperature changes, high humidity, moisture, dust, corrosive gases, or metal particles.
• Do not store the unit in places that are exposed to outside weather conditions (i.e., wind, rain,
snow, etc.).

Installation Precautions
1 Location and Ambient Requirements
Adequate personnel working space and adequate illumination must be provided for
adjustment, inspection, and maintenance of the equipment.
Avoid installation in areas where vibration, heat, humidity, dust, fibers, steel particles,
explosive/corrosive mists or gases, or sources of electrical noise are present.
The installation location shall not be exposed to direct sunlight.
Allow proper clearance spaces for installation. Do not obstruct the ventilation openings.
Refer to the recommended minimum installation dimensions as shown on the enclosure
outline drawings.
The ambient operating temperature shall be between 0° and 50° C (32° and 122° F).
2 Mounting Requirements
Only Qualified Personnel should install this equipment.
Install the unit in a secure upright position in a well-ventilated area.
A noncombustible insulating floor or mat should be provided in the area immediately
surrounding the electrical system at the place where maintenance operations are to be
performed.
3 Conductor Routing and Grounding
Use separate metal conduits for routing the input power, and control circuits.
A separate ground cable should be run inside the conduit with the input power, and control
circuits.
DO NOT connect control terminal strip return marked CC to earth ground.
Always ground the unit to prevent electrical shock and to help reduce electrical noise.
The Metal Of Conduit Is Not An Acceptable Ground.

Disposal
Never dispose of electrical components via incineration. Contact your state environmental agency for
details on disposal of electrical components and packaging in your area.

vi
 Table of Contents
COPYRIGHT NOTICE .................................................ii Properties Grid...................................................43
WARRANTY ..............................................................ii Downloading/Uploading Projects ..........................43
TECHNICAL SUPPORT ...............................................ii Uploading a project............................................43
Intended Audience..................................................iii Downloading a project.......................................45
Purpose and Scope of this Manual..........................iii Printing a hardcopy of projects..........................47
General Precautions................................................iv Ethernet Settings ...................................................49
Safety Precautions ...................................................v PC Ethernet Settings ..........................................51
Table of Contents ...................................................vii DHCP ..................................................................51
Chapter 1 – Introductions.......................................11 Download Port ...................................................51
Welcome................................................................11 Monitoring Port .................................................51
Supported Devices .............................................11 Download Ethernet Settings to an HMC ............52
Logic Editor Environment...................................12 Tips and Tricks when using MAPware....................52
External 3rd Party PLCs Supported .....................13 Placing and Editing Screen Objects ....................52
About Your Documentation...................................14 Moving and Resizing Screen Objects .................53
List of Documents ..............................................14 Overlaying Objects .............................................54
Conventions .......................................................15 Aligning objects..................................................55
Reading This Manual..........................................15 Making objects the same size ............................57
What You Need ..................................................16 Centering Objects ..............................................58
HMC Basics.............................................................16 Troubleshooting the USB Download Driver .......59
Projects ..............................................................17 Chapter 3 – Creating a Sample Project....................60
Backing Up Projects ...........................................17 Introduction ...........................................................60
Operation Flowchart ..........................................17 Beginning a New Project........................................61
Chapter 2 – Software Tour......................................19 Configuring an I/O module.................................62
System Requirements ............................................19 Adding Tags to the Project.....................................64
Installing MAPware................................................19 Initializing Tags with Power On Tasks ................66
Starting MAPware ..............................................20 Ladder Logic Blocks................................................68
New Project Configuration ....................................21 Scaling Analog Inputs .........................................68
Saving the Project ..............................................23 Setting Limit Outputs .........................................72
Project Configuration Window ..........................24 Mapping Inputs to Outputs................................76
Main Editor Window..............................................27 Screen Objects .......................................................80
Project Information Window .............................30 Labels .................................................................81
Menu Bar Options..............................................30 Bit Lamps............................................................83
Toolbars .............................................................39 Toggle Bit Objects ..............................................85

vii
 Duplicating a Screen ..........................................88 What is a Task? ....................................................128
Numeric Displays ...............................................91 Task List................................................................128
Numeric Entry ....................................................92 Execution Table................................................131
Testing the Project.................................................96 Task Descriptions .............................................132
Test Hardware Setup .........................................96 Assigning Tasks ....................................................139
Downloading the Project ...................................97 Chapter 7 – Data & Display Objects ......................144
Running the Application.....................................98 What is an Object?...............................................144
Online Monitoring..............................................99 Object List ............................................................144
Review .................................................................100 General Object Properties ...................................146
Chapter 4 – Tags ...................................................101 Property List.....................................................146
What are tags?.....................................................101 Simple Drawing Tools and Static Objects.............155
Tag Types and Addresses .................................101 Line Object .......................................................156
Predefined System Tags...................................101 Rectangle Object..............................................157
Creating and Modifying a Tag ..............................102 Ellipse Object ...................................................158
Adding a New Tag ............................................103 Round Rectangle Object ..................................159
Deleting a Tag ..................................................105 Pictures Object.................................................160
Editing a Tag.....................................................107 Simple Text Object ...........................................161
Finding Tags .........................................................107 Multilingual Text Object...................................162
Tag Usage.........................................................108 Time Object......................................................163
Importing and Exporting Tags..............................108 Date Object ......................................................164
Chapter 5 – Screens ..............................................111 Screen Buttons.....................................................165
What is a Screen? ................................................111 Go to Screen Object .........................................165
Screen Types and Templates ...............................111 Go to Next Screen Object.................................166
Base Screens ....................................................111 Go to Previous Screen Object ..........................167
Popup Screens .................................................114 Open Popup Screen Object..............................168
Template Screens.............................................117 Bit-based Objects.................................................169
Web Screens ....................................................119 Bit Lamp ...........................................................169
Modifying screens................................................124 Bit Display ........................................................170
Navigating Screens...........................................124 Set Bit...............................................................171
Viewing multiple screens .................................125 Reset Bit ...........................................................172
Deleting a screen .............................................126 Momentary Bit.................................................173
Duplicating a screen.........................................126 Toggle Bit .........................................................175
Renaming a screen...........................................126 Bit Entry ...........................................................176
Importing a screen ...........................................126 Register-based Objects ........................................177
Chapter 6 – Task Management .............................128 Word Lamp ......................................................177

viii
 Numeric Display ...............................................179 Creating Users..................................................225
Message Display...............................................181 Logging In.........................................................226
Write Value to Tag ...........................................183 Logging Out ......................................................228
Add Value to Tag..............................................184 Updating a Password .......................................229
Subtract Value from Tag ..................................185 Basic Screen Level Security ..................................230
Add Tag B to Tag A ...........................................186 Backlight/Screen Saver Password Security ..........230
Subtract Tag B from Tag A ...............................187 Intellectual Property Protection ..........................232
Numeric Entry ..................................................188 Chapter 9 – Alarms ...............................................233
Advanced Objects ................................................191 What are Alarms? ................................................233
Multi-Task Single-State Button ........................191 Constructing an Alarm Database .........................233
Multi-Task Multi-State Button .........................193 HMC4000 Series Alarm Database Parameters.....235
Bar Graph .........................................................195 Configuring Alarm Messages ...............................237
Multiple Bar Graphs .........................................197 Alarm List Display Objects....................................240
Analog Meter ...................................................200 Real-Time Alarm Display ..................................242
Keypads................................................................204 Historical Alarm Display ...................................245
Popup Keypads ................................................204 Uploading Historical Alarms.................................248
On Screen Keypads ..........................................205 Other Alarm Controls...........................................249
Predefined Numeric Keypads...........................207 Predefined Alarm Tags.....................................249
Predefined ASCII Keypads ................................210 Touchscreen Tasks ...........................................249
Creating a Custom Keypad...............................211 Key Specific Tasks.............................................250
Recipes.................................................................212 Chapter 10 – Data Logger and Trending ................252
Transfer Recipe ................................................213 Factors to Consider ..............................................252
Upload Recipe ..................................................214 Internal Data Logger ............................................253
Recipe Database ..............................................215 Internal Memory Logging Configuration..........254
Configuring the Recipe Database.....................215 Printing Internal Memory Data Logs................256
Multi-Language Feature.......................................219 View Logged Data from the Internal Memory .262
How to Configure Languages ...........................217 External Data Logger............................................268
Displaying Multiple Languages in Unit .............220 External Data Logging Configuration ...............268
List of Text Objects which use Multiple Reading Data from the SD Card .......................270
Languages ........................................................222 Configuring the FTP Client ...............................270
Using the Import/Export Text Objects Feature....222 Using the FTP Client feature ............................273
Exporting Text Objects .....................................222 FTP Host ...............................................................275
Importing Text Objects ....................................224 Configuring the FTP Host .................................275
Chapter 8 – Security .............................................225 Accessing the FTP Host ....................................276
Users and Access Levels.......................................225 View Data on the FTP Host ..............................277

ix
 Other Data Logger tools.......................................279 For HMC7000, HMC3000, and HMC2000: .......318
Trending Objects..................................................281 For HMC4000: ..................................................319
Real Time Trend ...............................................281 Barcode Scanner ..................................................319
Historical Trend................................................284 Barcode Properties ..........................................319
XY Plot (single and multi-point) .......................287 Appendix A – Internal Memory.............................321
Native Ladder Memory Addresses.......................321
Chapter 11 – Miscellaneous Features ...................290 Index Registers (I, J, K) .....................................322
Membrane Function Keys ....................................290 Counter and Timer Registers/Coils (C, C., T, T.)
Data Monitor .......................................................294 .........................................................................323

Application Memory Status .................................299 Input Registers/Coils (X, XW) ...........................323

Keep Memory Area and Retentive Tags ..............300 Output Registers/Coils (Y, YW) ........................323

Real Time Clock....................................................301 Configuration Registers/Coils (M, MW) ...........324

MQTT ...................................................................304 System Registers/Coils (S, SW).........................325

MQTT Broker....................................................304 Internal Registers/Coils (B, BW).......................325

Publish..............................................................306 Data Registers (D) ............................................325

Subscribe..........................................................307 Retentive Registers (R).....................................325

Tags ..................................................................307 IEC 61131-3 Tags..................................................325

MQTT Default Tags ..........................................308 Appendix B – System Tag Memory .......................327

Email ....................................................................309 S memory (System bits) .......................................327

Configure..........................................................309 SW memory (System registers)............................331

Gmail Server (smtp.gmail.com)........................310 M memory (I/O configuration Coils)....................340

Sending Email...................................................312 MW memory (I/O configuration registers) ..........341

System Settings Menu .........................................314 Appendix C – Maintenance Modes .......................342

About ...............................................................314 Entering Maintenance Modes .............................342

Network Settings..............................................314 Firmware Erase Mode......................................342

VNC Server .......................................................315 Application Erase Mode ...................................342

Access ..............................................................315 Firmware Information Mode ...........................343

Other Settings ..................................................316 Touchscreen Calibration Screen ......................343

Recipe Import/Export ......................................317 HMC HALT mode screen ......................................344

VNC Server ...........................................................318 HMC HOLD mode screen .....................................345

Authentication and Connection.......................318

Boot Up Screen ....................................................318

x
Chapter 1 – Introductions
Welcome
Welcome to the Maple Systems’ MAPware programming software. MAPware is used to program a powerful
range of automation and display hardware.

Supported Devices
The configuration software, MAPware, is used to program the series of products listed below.
• HMC7000 Series of HMI + PLC combo units. This series of display + PLC + I/O units includes base units
with display sizes ranging from 3 to 7 inches. Each unit supports internal Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC) functionality. HMC7000 base units can be combined with between 3 and 5 I/O expansion modules
of the HMC7 family.
• HMC3000, HMC2000, and HMC4000 Series of HMI + PLC combo units. This series of display + PLC + I/O
module units includes base units with displays ranging from 4.3 to 10.2 inches. Each unit supports
internal Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) functionality. HMC3000, HMC2000 and HMC4000 base
units can be combined with between 1 and 5 I/O expansion modules of the HMC3 family. The HMC4000
Series have a Linux-based operating system.
• MLC Series of Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs). This line of PLCs includes fixed I/O and expandable
PLCs.
 Note: For information on using MAPware to program an MLC series product, refer to the MLC Series
programming manual.
New models are already planned for the future. For the latest list of models supported by the MAPware
software, please visit our website at: www.maplesystems.com

HMC Series Products

The HMC Series are Human Machine Controllers (HMCs). An HMC is a combination operator-based HMI (human
machine interface) with built-in PLC (programmable logic controller) operation.

11
This is accomplished using optional expansion I/O modules a configuration software that supports logic
programming. Now you can have an HMI and a PLC in one unit. There are several advantages:
• Lower cost
• Easier to use and maintain
• Easier to program (only one software package to learn)
• Faster response time since HMI and PLC are in one unit
HMCs offer flexibility. Rather than using fixed I/O, the HMC employs expansion slots so that you can customize
your I/O configuration. Maple Systems offers a wide assortment of expansion modules including combination
digital input/output modules, digital input only, digital output only, analog modules, and high-speed counter
modules. The HMC also has communication ports, so if you want to incorporate an MLC (see below) or other
PLC to further expand the I/O count and processing power of the system, you can.
MAPware contains protocol drivers for the most popular brands of third party PLCs. If you have an existing PLC
or want to combine an HMC with a favorite PLC, you can.

MLC Series products

The MLC series of products are more traditional PLC type devices. They include processor models with a fixed
set of I/O, and models that can be combined with add on I/O modules to expand functionality. A complete suite
of digital and analog input and output devices are available to interface with wide range of automation devices.
MAPware is used to program both HMC and MLC series products. This simplifies the programming process,
reduces software cost, and improves project maintainability. The present manual will focus on programming
HMC series products.
 Note: For information on using MAPware to program an MLC series product, refer to the MLC Series
programming manual.
The HMC and MLC Series products are industrial grade equipment. They are certified to meet the European CE
noise immunity/emission standards and they are UL listed for use in Class I Division 2 environments.
Please read this operation manual and visit www.maplesystems.com for the latest information on these
products.

Logic Editor Environment

MAPware includes a full featured set of logic editors. There are two options for configuring PLC logic in a
MAPware project. This selection is made in the Programming Language drop down list when a project is first
created. The options are:

Native Ladder1
The Native Ladder Logic editor is a Ladder Diagram editor. The programmer can define complex logic operations
by building discreet logic blocks. A large library of built in ladder logic instructions is available to perform
common automation tasks such as; math operations, timers and counters, data manipulation, feedback loops,
input scaling and much more. The user can define Power Up Blocks evaluated once at power on, Main Blocks
evaluated once per scan or subroutines and interrupt routines with execution controlled by other logic.
 For complete documentation on using the Native Ladder editor refer to the MAPware Ladder Logic Guide.

1 Native Ladder is only available on the HMC7000 and HMC3000 Series.

12
IEC 61131-3 Logic Editors
Projects created using this option have access to the five logic editors defined by the IEC 61131-3 standard:
• Ladder Diagram (LD)
• Function Block Diagram (FBD)
• Structured Text (ST)
• Instruction List (IL)
• Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
MAPware projects created using the IEC 61131-3 logic editors have access to an extensive library of built in
function blocks that can be used to create robust automation solutions. In addition, the programmer can create
their own User Defined Function Blocks (UDFBs) to make their own logic modular and re-usable.
 For complete documentation on using the IEC 61131-3 logic editors, refer to the MAPware IEC 61131-3
Programming Guide.

External 3rd Party PLCs Supported

MAPware includes various protocol drivers that allow you to connect an external third party PLC (such as Allen
Bradley MicroLogix, GE Fanuc VersaMax, Schneider Electric Modicon, etc.) to the unit. For the latest list of PLCs
and controllers supported please visit our website.

13
About Your Documentation
Maple Systems provides many resources to allow you to get the most out of your HMI + PLC Combo unit or MLC
Series controller. There are several different manuals that cover different model series and different modes of
operation. The table below lists the different manuals / resources available and describes the information they
cover.

List of Documents 
Title Document # Description Notes
MAPware HMC AW- Documents general use of MAPware This Manual. Installed with
Programming 10101040 programming software to configure HMC MAPware.
Manual series devices. Does not cover use of logic
editors (See IEC and Ladder Logic Guide
below).
MLC Series AW- Documents general use of MAPware Installed with MAPware.
Programming 10101054 programing an MLC series programmable logic
Manual controller. Does not cover use of logic editors
(See IEC and Ladder Logic Guide below).
MAPware 7000 N/A Documents general use of MAPware Accessed via help menu in
Help File programming software. Also contains MAPware.
documentation of IEC 61131-3 and Native
Ladder instructions.
IEC 61131-3 AW- Documents how to configure a MAPware Installed with MAPware.
Programming Guide 10101045 project using the IEC 61131-3 logic editors.
For MAPware 7000
Ladder Logic Guide AW- Documents how to configure a MAPware Installed with MAPware.
For MAPware 10101041 project using the Native Ladder Logic editor.
HMC7000 I/O AW- Documents available expansion modules for Installed with MAPware.
Module Guide 10101043 the HMC7000 series of HMI + PLC combo
units.
HMC3000 I/O AW- Documents available expansion modules for Installed with MAPware.
Module Guide 10101056 the HMC3000, HMC2000 and HMC4000 series
of HMI + PLC combo units
MLC I/O Module AW- Documents built in I/O and available Installed with MAPware
Guide 10101055 expansion I/O for the MLC series of PLCs
Quick Start Guides Multiple Describes hardware installation, wiring and Shipped with each product.
configuration for a particular HMI + PLC, MLC Available on the Maple Systems
or expansion module. website.
Controller Multiple Important information specific to each Available on the Maple Systems
Information Sheets supported protocol when connecting to an website.
external third party PLC.

For more information, please visit the Support Center section on our website at:
http://www.maplesystems.com/support.htm
The Support Center provides links to manuals, FAQs, technical notes, training videos, sample projects, controller
information sheets, and controller cable diagrams.

14
Conventions
When using MAPware, there are usually several ways to perform a task. For example, if you want to copy a
graphics object, you can:
• click the Copy command on the Edit menu
• click the Copy button on the Standard toolbar
• press the CTRL+C keys on your computer
In most cases, we will describe each method when the task is introduced. The menu method is then used
whenever the task is used in later procedures. Other conventions used in this manual are listed in the following
table.
Convention Meaning
Bold Characters that you must type exactly as they appear. For example, if you are directed to type a:\setup,
you should type all the bold characters exactly as they are printed.
Italic Placeholders for information you must provide. For example, if you are directed to type filename, you
should type the actual name for a file instead of the word shown in italic type. Italics are also used to
indicate a glossary term.
ALL CAPS Directory names, files names, key names, and acronyms.
KEY1+KEY2 A plus sign (+) between key names means to press and hold down the first key while you press the
second key.
Click Refers to clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) once.
Double-click Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) twice.
Right-click Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button (usually the right mouse button) once. Right-clicking
usually opens shortcut menus.
The following table identifies symbols and margin icons.
Icon Meaning
► Identifies a procedure.
 Indicates a reference to additional information.
 Indicates an important note.

Reading This Manual

This manual is designed as a training manual as well as a reference guide. In this effort, the manual tries to
minimize the amount of time required to become familiar with the HMC product lines and how to configure
these products using the MAPware programming software. Therefore, we strongly recommend that you read
each chapter of this manual in the order that it is presented. To minimize redundancy, concepts explained in a
chapter are not repeated in later chapters.
Through experience and many years of customer feedback, we have found that the quickest path to finish your
project is to skim through the entire manual. By doing this, you will become familiar with the layout of the
manual as well as learn basic concepts and operation of the product.
Next, install the MAPware software onto your computer and try creating a simple project. Chapter 3 – Creating
a Sample Project provides you with a step-by-step example of creating a project for an HMC3043A-M. Even if
you do not intend to use that particular model, we recommend you spend the time to go through this chapter,
as it will be time well spent.
Do not forget to take full advantage of the Help files in MAPware. These are a good source of information when
you quickly want to research some particular feature.
Finally, our technical support staff is available by phone or by email to assist you if you run into any problems
not covered by this manual. Visit our website at www.maplesystems.com for contact information.

15
What You Need
The following items are needed to configure and operate your HMC.
Configuration Software MAPware
I/O Expansion Modules All modules for the HMC7000 begin with a Maple P/N of HMC7. All HMC3000 expansion
modules begin with a Maple P/N of HMC3. Visit our website for a complete listing of all
available modules.
Configuration Cable1 7431-0104 (Ethernet Crossover cable for Ethernet-equipped models)
7431-0116 (USB download cable with Type B USB connector for the HMC7000 Series)
7431-0119 (USB download cable with micro USB connector for the HMC3000 Series)
Personal Computer2 User Provided
Power Cable 6030-0009 2-conductor 18 AWG, shielded, no connectors
24VDC Power Supply User Provided (or available from Maple Systems)
3rd Party PLC (optional) User Provided
Controller Information Maple Systems provides Controller Information Sheets specific to communicating to third
Sheets party PLCs. Please locate the sheet that corresponds to your PLC on our website.
Communication Cable Refer to our website (www.maplesystems.com) for a list of available cables.
1Allows you to connect the HMC directly to a PC’s Ethernet port or USB port to download/upload or go online
with the project in the HMC.
2 Computer requirements include a Pentium 800 MHz or higher processor, 256 MB RAM, 800 MB available Hard

Disk Space, 1024x768 resolution color monitor, Keyboard and Mouse, USB 2.0 port for downloading project, one
RS232 port for online monitoring, Vista, Windows 7 or Windows 8 operating system.

HMC Basics
The Maple Systems HMI + PLC Series are economical graphics-based touchscreen controllers. We use the term
“HMC” (human machine controller) to signify this operator interface can perform the functions of an HMI
(human machine interface) as well as a PLC (programmable logic controller). The HMC units are an ideal option
for control systems that require a visual display interface for the plant floor operator and the functionality of a
programmable logic controller for direct connection to digital/analog inputs and outputs (using optional I/O
expansion modules).
Human Machine Controllers (HMCs) provide much more versatility than traditional mechanical control panels.
An HMC allows a plant floor operator to monitor current conditions of a control system and, if necessary, to
initiate a change in the operation of the system.
For applications that require a larger I/O count than possible with the expansion modules attached directly to
the HMC, the HMC can be paired with a Maple Systems PLC (MLC) or another third party controller. Both HMC
lines and the MLC line are programmed using MAPware. Having one software package for the whole project
simplifies the programming task, and improves system maintainability.
The HMC Series is designed for industrial environments and carries a NEMA4/IP66 rating as well as CE
compliance for noise immunity and emissions. It is also UL listed and certified for Class I Division 2 installations.

16
Projects
The HMC has two basic segments of internal memory.
• The firmware contains the information required for the HMC to control how it operates at a low level
and how it communicates with peripheral hardware devices. The HMC programmer does not have the
ability to change this code memory.
• Project memory pertains to all the window screens, logic, and any other features that the HMC
programmer can create using the MAPware configuration software. Therefore, the term project
designates the file sent to the HMC from the MAPware software.

Backing Up Projects
The MAPware configuration software does not perform automatic saves of the open project. We recommend
that you frequently save your project as you are working on it to make sure that no work is needlessly lost in the
event of a power failure or computer error. When you have completed a project, we strongly urge that you
archive it to another folder, an external network drive, or storage media for safekeeping. To archive your
project, you must backup both the .mpl file and the associated folder with the same file name located in the
same directory. Although Maple Systems does provide repair support on all of our products, we cannot
guarantee that we will be able to restore a project on a damaged unit.

Operation Flowchart
The HMC series HMI + PLC units follow a specific sequence of power on and user defined tasks. The sequence is
as shown on the next page.

17
 Power On

Initialize Screens/
Hardware Peripherals Restart

Application Wait for Application

Present? Download

Initialize Watchdog/Timers

Start PLC Communication/

Display Status

Power On Task

RTC second If data logging

change? defined, lock data

Global Task

New
Screen?

Screen After Hiding Task

Screen Before Showing Task

Display Screen

Display If Popup Screen

While Showing Screen Task

While Showing Popup Screen Task

Key Press?

Serve Key Tasks

18
Chapter 2 – Software Tour
The MAPware software is easy to use and requires a minimal amount of time to become familiar with operation.
With the MAPware software, you can quickly create projects using the various features and tools that come with
the software.

System Requirements
The following basic computer hardware is required to install and use the MAPware software
• 800 MHz Pentium-based processor or equivalent
• 256 MB of RAM (more memory improves performance)
• 800 MB (including 200 MB for the .NET Framework Redistributable) available hard disk space
• Monitor set for 16-bit color 1024x768 pixel mode
• Microsoft mouse or compatible pointing device and keyboard
• USB 2.0 port (to upload/download projects)
• Serial port (to upload/download projects – optional)
• Microsoft , Vista, 7, 8 or 10

Installing MAPware
Use the following procedure to install the MAPware software from the CD-ROM:
2. Turn on power to your development computer.
3. Make sure no other application programs are currently running.
4. Insert the MAPware software CD into the computer’s CD-ROM drive.
 Note: if ‘Auto Play’ mode is not set for your CD-ROM drive, click setup.exe on the root directory of
the CD drive using Windows Explorer.
5. The Welcome to MAPware software screen appears.

6. Click Next to continue.

19
 7. Select the preferred directory location on your computer to install the MAPware software (default is
C:\Maple Systems\MAPware\):

8. Then click Next.

9. Confirm Installation.

10. Click Next to begin.

11. Once installation is complete, click Close.

Starting MAPware
Once installed, MAPware can be started by clicking the icon in the windows start menu, or by clicking the
MAPware desktop icon. When MAPware starts, the startup screen is displayed as shown below. This window
provides a list of recent projects, the option to upload a project from a device, and the option to open an
existing project or create a new project.

20
Opening Screen
The initial screen displayed when you start MAPware displays the overall workspace environment that you will
be creating your projects in:

 The software requires that you set your monitor resolution to 1024x768 pixels or higher.
If you have prior experience programming HMIs, you will notice that the MAPware software is intentionally
designed with the same look and feel as most HMI configuration software in the marketplace today. This is done
to make your transition to using the HMC / MLC products as trouble-free as possible. If you are new to using the
MAPware configuration software, this chapter will give you a brief rundown of how to take maximum advantage
of the ease-of-use this software provides.

New Project Configuration

To create a new project click the New option under project, or select: Project > New from the menu bar. The
Select Product window will appear, allowing the target platform and editor mode to be selected.

21
 Note: Not all selectable models are available at this time.

Product Series
The first option in the Select Product popup window is Product Series. This allows a project to be created for
either an HMC (An HMI + PLC combo unit) or an MLC (A Programmable Logic Controller with no display).
 This manual documents configuring the HMC series of products. For information on configuring MLC series
products, refer to the MLC Programming Manual.

Product and Model Selection

The next two dropdown menus in the Select Product window allow you to pick a specific target model. For units
with fixed I/O, make sure that the correct model is selected.

Programming Language
The Programming Language drop down list provides two options:
• Native Ladder – A ladder diagram logic editor
• IEC 61131-3 – A suite of five logic editors defined by the IEC 61131-3 standard
Once a project is created in one of these programming modes, it cannot be changed to use the alternative
programming language.
If you’re not familiar with these two options you may want to create test projects for each of them to see how
each works and which mode is better suited to the application and programmer skill set.
 Native Ladder is documented in the MAPware Ladder Logic Guide
 IEC 61131-3 is documented in the MAPware IEC 61131-3 Programming Guide.
The screen shots that follow are from a project using Native Ladder as the programming language.

22
Saving the Project
Once you have selected your model and programming language and clicked OK, MAPware will give your project
a default name based on the model number and open the project summary screen.

It is strongly advised that you save your project at this point with a unique name and then save frequently
throughout development, as MAPware does not auto save any of your work. To save your project, from the
Project menu, click Save, and give your project a name.

23
Project Configuration Window
Once the project is saved, we can edit the project’s configuration and give it a password. From the Project
menu, click Properties to open the Project Configuration dialog box.

Here you can add a description of the project and note the author. All fields are optional, and if a password is
added to the project, it cannot be recovered if lost.
 Note: If the project has not already been saved with a unique name, changes made in the Project
Configuration window will be lost when the project is saved.

Project Information Tab

• Project Title: The saved name of your project, up to 45 characters in length, ends in .mpl. Not editable
from this window. New projects are given a default name of HMC[Model Number]App#.mpl.
• Save in Directory: The Windows directory your project has been saved to. Field will be blank before the
project has been saved. Not editable from this window. From the Project menu, click Save to select
where the project will be saved.
• Description: Optional area to give a description of the Project.
• Author: Optional area to note the project’s Author/Programmer. Up to 45 characters available.
• Password: Optional way to protect the project with a password. Up to 8 characters in length. The
password is not recoverable. If a password is entered, the programmer will be required to enter a
password whenever project is opened or uploaded from the HMC.
 Note: See Chapter 8 – Security for more information on password protecting your project.

Ethernet Tab
 See the Ethernet Settings section later in this chapter for more information on this tab.

24
Alarm Tab
 See Chapter 9 – Alarms for more information on the alarm settings available on this tab.

Settings Tab

• Backlight saver Enable: Checkbox to enable the backlight saver. If enabled, a blank screen is displayed
on the HMC after the specified time-out. The operator can reactivate the screen by touching it.
Time (sec): Enter the amount of time in seconds (of touchscreen inactivity) that must elapse before
the backlight saver is engaged.
Username: Optional. If used, a screen is displayed that requires the operator to enter a username
and password to reactivate the screen. Maximum of 14 alphanumeric characters allowed.
Password: Optional. If used, maximum of 4 alphanumeric characters allowed.

25
 Re-enter Password: Re-enter the desired password to set it.

• Font Settings: This is the default font used when creating new objects. Options are Arial, Times New
Roman, and Tahoma.
• Others
Erase Data Logger Memory: If checked, this will erase the memory reserved for the Data Logger
whenever the memory becomes full.
 See Chapter 10 – Data Logger and Trending for more information on setting up the Data Logger.
Download Tag names: If checked, all tag names assigned to the internal HMC and external PLC
memory addresses are downloaded into the HMC/MLC Series unit. This allows the tag names to be
regenerated when the project is uploaded from the HMC/MLC series hardware. If not checked, all
tag names are uploaded from the hardware as Tag1, Tag2, etc.
Accelerate Scan Time: If checked, higher priority is given to processing the ladder logic.
 Note: You may notice a slight delay in screen update times, if enabled.
• Access Level Settings
 See Chapter 8 – Security for more information on Access Level security.
Home Screen: If a protected screen is displayed when a user is logged out, the display will
automatically switch to the Home Screen selected here. Any screen with an Access Level of 0 can be
used as a home screen.
Logoff after: If enabled, this feature automatically logs out the current user after the specified time
period.

26
Main Editor Window
After the project is created, the following project summary screen is shown:

Double-click Project Item – Screens. This displays a listing of all current screens:

27
Double-click Screen1. This displays a blank screen 1, along with appropriate toolbars:

This is the primary window used to configure and edit HMC screens in MAPware project. Let us describe each
section of the software in detail (on the next page).

28
This is the primary window used to configure and edit HMC screens in MAPware project. Let us describe each
section of the software in detail:
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Project Toolbar
Layout Toolbar

Draw Toolbar

Screen Work Area

Properties Grid

Common Objects
Toolbar
Project Information
Window

Status Bar Properties Help Guide

Font Toolbar
Global Toolbar

Section Description
Title Bar Indicates the current open project and directory location
Project Information Folder-style depiction of the current project. This also shows a listing of past
Window projects created.
Menu Bar These are the standard menu options for the MAPware software
Toolbars Shortcuts of features and commands that you may use with regularity
Project Toolbar Commands used on a project level (i.e. Save, Open, Cut, etc.)
Layout Toolbar Commands used on screens and objects (i.e. New screen, Align, etc.)
Draw Toolbar Access to all objects placed onto a screen
Common Objects Access to most commonly used objects
Toolbar
Font Toolbar Controls for text objects
Global Toolbar Controls to view the various states of a highlighted object
Status Bar Provides information about current project (i.e. offline, X Y coordinates)
Screen Work Area Shows all objects and attributes of current open screen
Properties Grid This is the area where attributes of the highlighted object are adjusted
Properties Help Guide Quick help on each attribute highlighted for an object

29
Project Information Window
Before a project is opened or created, this window displays a list of recent projects. Double Click one of the
projects to open it for editing. Once a project is open, the Project Information Window will display a list of
features that can be configured using MAPware.

Double click any of these folders to bring an editor page for that feature into the Main Workspace.
This manual will cover configuring each of the features listed here, with the exception of the Logic Blocks folder.
Configuring logic blocks is covered in separate manuals:
 The MAPware Ladder Logic Guide explains configuring Logic Blocks using the Native Ladder editor
 The MAPware IEC 61131-3 Programming Guide explains configuring Logic Blocks using the IEC 61131-3 suite
of logic editors.

Menu Bar Options

As with most applications many tools and configuration tasks are accessed from a bar of dropdown menus. The
sections that follow list the options available in the menu bars and provide a brief description of each option.

Project menu
Settings/controls used on the entire project
• New – creates a new project
• Open – opens an existing project
• Close – closes the project that is currently open
• Save – saves the currently opened project
• Save As – to save the currently opened project under a new file name
• Properties – this displays the Project Configuration dialog box
• Import Text Objects – import a CSV file that contains text for all labels and text objects in the project
• Export Text Objects – exports a CSV formatted file containing the text used in all labels and text objects
of the project
• Transfer
Download – Sends the currently opened project to a HMC
Upload – Receives a project from a HMC
• Print – prints a hardcopy of the opened project
• Compile – compiles the opened project and checks for errors

30
 • Run – runs the opened project in a simulation mode
• Exit – exits the MAPware application

Edit menu
Used to make modifications to objects on screens
• Undo – clears the last action performed
• Redo – if the Undo action is taken, pressing Redo will recapture and implement the last action
performed
• Cut – deletes the selected object
• Copy – copies the selected object
• Paste – pastes the object selected using the copy function onto the screen
• Select All – selects all objects on a screen
• Group Objects – combines all objects that are currently highlighted into one object that can be moved,
deleted, or copied as one object whenever selected
• Ungroup Objects – breaks a combined group of objects back into separate objects
• Bookmarks – bookmarks are a way of identifying ‘important’ screens, to make it easier to locate them
when working on a project. Bookmarks are used only by the MAPware software and are not
downloaded into the HMC.
Add Bookmark – this function attaches a bookmark ( ) to a screen in the Project Information Window.
Clear Bookmark – clears a bookmark assigned to a screen.
Previous Bookmark – use this function to open and display a bookmarked screen prior to the
currently displayed screen, (ex. if screen #3 is displayed and screen #2 is bookmarked, this function
will display screen #2 when selected)
Next Bookmark – similar to above except displays next bookmarked screen that is in numerical
sequence
Clear All Bookmarks – use this to clear all existing bookmarks in a project

View menu
Provides options for viewing screens and other sections of the opened project
• Data Monitor window – opens the data monitor window (used to monitor the current values in tags
during simulation)
• Device Information – provides information about the HMC that is currently connected to your computer
• Icons – displays all screens (including base, popup, keypad, and template screens) as a series of small
icons in the work area of the MAPware software. To implement this, you must first highlight the Screens
folder in the Project Information Window.
• Lists – provides a brief list of all screens (according to screen number). As with icons, you must highlight
the Screens folder in the Project Information Window to implement this view.
• Details – provides a detailed list of all screens. Details include screen number, name, type of screen, if it
has an assigned task, etc. This is the default setting when you open a project.
• Arrange By – determines how the data displayed in the Details list above is ordered (i.e. according to
screen number, name, etc.)
• Zoom to – enlarge or reduce the size of screen currently displayed in the workspace
• Screen Information – opens a window at the bottom of the workspace that shows detailed information
about the currently displayed screen

31
 • Errors and Warnings – opens a window at the bottom of the workspace that shows detailed information
about any errors or warnings that may occur when the project compiles. This window helps you to
locate potential problems with your project.
• Refresh – repaints the workspace area
• Screen/Object Properties – displays or closes the screen/object properties box that is displayed on the
right hand side of the workspace area
• Projects Information – displays or closes the Project Information Window located on the left hand side
of the workspace area

Layout menu
These are tools used to edit simple shapes or to quickly adjust the size of objects on screen
• Pattern – displays the Pattern Dialog box for any simple shape that has the ability to set a pattern
• Line Color – displays the Color Palette dialog box so that you can select a color for the line
• Fill Color – displays the Color Palette dialog box so that you can change color of the area inside one of
the simple shapes (i.e. rectangle, ellipse, etc.).
• Text Color – allows you to quickly change the color of the text in a text or multilingual text object
• Pattern Color – use this to change the color of the pattern selected
• Bring to Front – if two or more objects are overlaid, this causes the selected object to be on top
• Send to Back – If two or more objects are overlaid, this will place the selected object on the bottom of
the stack
• Align to – when two or more objects are highlighted, this will align the objects according to the left,
right, top, or bottom sides of the objects
• Center Along – when two or more objects are highlighted, this feature moves the objects to the same
location on the screen
Screen’s Horizontal – aligns along the horizontal center of the screen
Screen’s Vertical – aligns along the vertical center of the screen
Object’s Horizontal – aligns with respect to the horizontal center of the two objects
Object’s Vertical – aligns with respect to the vertical center of the two objects
• Place Equidistant – takes three or more highlighted objects and places them equidistant from each other
along…
Along Horizontal – the horizontal plane
Along Vertical – the vertical plane
• Make Equal – takes two or more highlighted objects and makes them all the same size.
 Note: the height/width of the last selected object is used for the adjustment.
Height – affects only the height of each highlighted object
Width – affects only the width of each highlighted object
Size – both width and height are adjusted

Screen menu
Options on creating/deleting screens in the project.
 Note: this menu only appears if a current screen, keypad, or template is shown.
• New Base Screen – creates a new base (full-sized) screen
• New Popup Screen – creates a new popup (partially sized) screen
• New Template Screen – create a new template screen

32
 • Open Screen – displays the Open Screen dialog box from which you can select which screen you would
like displayed
• Open Template Screen – displays the Open Template Screen dialog box from which you can select which
template screen you would like displayed
• Import Screen – Import a screen from an existing project with the same screen size
• Apply Template Screens – displays the Template Screen Setting dialog box which is used to assign any of
the template screens to each base screen
• Close – closes the displayed screen
• Delete – deletes the displayed screen
• Duplicate – duplicates the currently displayed base screen or template
• First – displays the first screen (Screen 1) or first template (Template 1)
• Next – displays the next screen in sequence
• Previous – displays the prior screen in sequence
• Last – displays the last (highest numbered) screen

Define menu
Use this menu to configure many of the background tasks of the HMC
• Data Logger – displays the Data Logger screen. The Data Logger captures values from predefined tags.
Capturing is based upon a time interval or a triggered event. Capture values are represented on the
HMC screen using the Historical Trend Object or values are uploaded to a computer.
 Note: same as clicking the Data Logger folder in the Project Information Window.
• Global Keys – displays the Global Keys configuration screen. Global Keys determine how the function
keys on the right side of the display function when pressed. These keys can also be configured locally per
screen using the Keys folder under each Screen folder in the Project Information Window.
 Note: same as clicking the Keys folder in the Project Information Window.
• Nodes – use to assign a network node address to each serial com port on the HMC. You can also modify
the settings for each serial port (i.e. baud rate, communications driver, etc.) as well.
 Note: same as clicking the Network Configuration folder in the Project Information Window.
• Tag Database – displays the Tag database. Use this to configure and assign tags to each internal memory
address or PLC memory address you wish to access.
 Note: same as clicking the Tags folder in the Project Information Window.
• Alarm Database – displays the Alarm Configuration screen. Use this screen to assign and create alarm
messages.
 Note: same as clicking Alarms folder in the Project Information Window.
• Languages – displays the Languages Configuration screen. Use this screen to select additional languages
(up to 9) in text and labels for objects.
 Note: same as clicking Languages in the Project Information Window.
• System Parameters – displays the Systems Parameters dialog box to configure the Timer Interrupt and
Keep Memory Area.
• Ethernet Settings – displays the Download Ethernet Settings dialog box for the HMC.
 Note: only available for models that have an Ethernet port.

Mode menu
Determines the operating mode of the MAPware software
• Edit – when selected, allows editing of the opened project (default mode)
• Online/Offline – when selected, the MAPware software connects to the HMC to read/write to internal
memory addresses of the HMC. Data is edited and monitored using the Data Monitor window.

33
 With upload – current project residing in HMC uploads into the MAPware before going online.
Without upload – MAPware simply connects to HMC without uploading the existing project that is in
the HMC.
• PLC Control – controls how the ladder logic blocks in the HMC operate while in Online mode.
Run – starts execution of ladder logic in PLC7000 {future product}
Halt – temporarily stops execution of ladder logic
Run Force – very similar to Run mode except in this mode, the ladder logic continues to run even if
the physical expansion I/O modules are not connected to the HMC. The registers assigned to the I/O
modules are updated. This mode is useful to check operation of the program.
Hold – stops execution of the ladder logic but continues to update all inputs and outputs. This mode
is primarily useful to troubleshoot external I/O signals connected to the expansion modules.
Hold Cancel – cancels the Hold mode and returns to normal (Run) operation.
Error Reset – the HMC has a self-diagnostics routine that continuously runs in the background
during normal operation. If a problem is detected during normal operation, the HMC may go into
shutdown mode. In this mode, execution of the ladder logic stops and all outputs are assigned to the
Error State Output Condition. Once the cause of the error is corrected, normal operation resumes if
this command is sent to the HMC.
• Debug – only available when Native Ladder is selected as the programming language. Allows breakpoints
to be added to ladder logic for easier debugging of code while in Online mode.
 For more information, see the MAPware Ladder Logic Guide.
Start Debug Mode – starts debug mode. The other options below become active once debug mode
is started.
Set Breakpoint – set a breakpoint with a logic block. To set a breakpoint, you must first highlight an
instruction. A red dot appears where the breakpoint is set. Up to eight breakpoints can be created.
When enabled, a breakpoint is a location where ladder logic execution is temporarily suspended
until a command is given to continue.
 Note that setting a breakpoint does not cause a halt in the execution of the ladder logic. To do
that, you must use the Go to Breakpoint command.
Go to Breakpoint – after a breakpoint is created, this function causes the ladder logic to execute
until the next breakpoint is reached. At that point, execution is temporarily suspended and the
breakpoint will be highlighted in yellow. To get the ladder logic to run again after a breakpoint has
tripped, you must either press the Go to Breakpoint command again, or you must press the Single
Step command.
Single Step – executes ladder logic one instruction at a time. After an instruction is executed, the
debugger will move on to the next instruction. The instruction that was last executed will be
highlighted in yellow.
Single Scan – forces the ladder logic to perform a single scan, then stops at the current active
(highlighted) step instruction.
 Note: the Single Scan command cannot be used when breakpoints are set.
Show/hide watch window – this option displays a watch window. Similar to the Data Monitor
Window, a watch window is only available in Debug mode and is used to watch specified address
tags.
Remove Breakpoint – displays a list of all breakpoints. Select the breakpoint that you wish to
remove.
Stop Debug Mode – to exit debug mode. A dialog window will ask if you want to leave the HMC/MLC
in run mode or halt mode.

34
Tools menu
These miscellaneous settings and tools are available with the MAPware software.
• Application Memory Status – display the Memory Status dialog box. This provides detailed information
on memory required by the HMC for the currently opened project.
• Display Logged Data – displays logged data (in CSV format) that has been uploaded from the HMC.
Logged data can be captured by the HMC using the Data Logger feature.
• Display Historical Alarm Data – displays data collected by the HMC on alarms
• Convert Application – allow programmer to convert a project using one HMC to a different model of the
HMC
• Preferences – miscellaneous settings when using MAPware
Ladder Editor Colors – displays the Color Settings dialog box. These are color options when using the
Logic Block feature
On line communication – determines which port on the HMC is used during an online connection –
USB, serial, or Ethernet
Project Global Settings – displays the Project global settings dialog box where you can set the
following
Show default tag name definition window when defining new tag – if enabled, a popup dialog
box will appear when entering new tag names in a logic block It gives programmer ability to
easily define new tags on the fly.
Show tag selection window when adding new instruction – if enabled, a popup dialog box will
appear when entering instructions in a logic block It gives programmer ability to change the
name of the tag easily.
Ladder instruction tag length – determines maximum number of characters shown for each tag
address in the ladder logic
• Web Server Configuration – enable the web server feature and set the username and password required
for login.
• Generate USB Stick Application – create a downloadable project application file to be placed on a USB
stick for remote download.
• Import Tasks – import tasks from another project.
• Remove Unused Picture Files – removes any unused picture files that have been added to the project to
reduce the project’s file size.

Data Window menu

This menu is for the Data Monitor Window (View  Data Monitor Window) feature.
• New block – displays the Define Block dialog box. Use to define a block of data viewed in the Data
Monitor.
• Delete block – displays the Delete Block dialog box. Select which block of data you wish to remove from
the Data Monitor.
• Edit block – displays the Edit Block dialog box. Use to modify an existing block (i.e. change address, size,
color, etc.).
• Import Data – import a Data Monitor file (in *.CSV format) that was created in a different project. Useful
if you wish to monitor the same addresses
• Export Data – export a Data Monitor file (in *.CSV format) so that you do not have to recreate the Data
Monitor list in another project

35
Window menu
MAPware provides many options for displaying open screens
• Cascade – cascades (overlapping windows) all open screens
• Tile Horizontally – displays all open screens horizontally (top to bottom of monitor)
• Tile Vertically – displays all open screens vertically (left to right of monitor)
• Close All – closes all open screens
• List of Open Screens – displays a popup dialog box of all open screens

Help menu
MAPware includes extensive help files that cover the operation of each feature.
• Contents – displays the Help files, Contents tab
• Index – displays the Help files, Index tab
• Search – display the Help files, Search tab
• About – provides information on Software revision

Draw menu
Use to place objects onto each screen. Also configures the grid function for screens.
• Graphical Objects – objects used to create simple shapes and text
Line – draws a line on screen
Ellipse – draws an ellipse or circle
Rectangle – draws a rectangle or square
Rounded Rectangle – draws a rectangle or square with beveled edges
Multilingual Text – use to create a static text box. This object differs from the simple text box in that
this object allows use of Windows TrueType fonts.
• Buttons – objects that require input from the HMC touchscreen
Navigation Buttons – buttons used to change or navigate through screens
Go to Screen – creates a button that, when pressed, displays a base screen
Go to Next Screen – when pressed, goes to next screen in numerical sequence
Go to Previous Screen – when pressed, goes to prior screen in numerical sequence
Open Popup Screen – creates a button that, when pressed, displays a popup (partially sized)
screen which overlays on top of the base screen already showing
Bit Action Buttons – buttons used to control a coil or bit
Set Bit – creates a button that, when pressed sets (turns On) a bit
Reset Bit – when pressed, clears (turns Off) a bit
Toggle Bit – alternates setting/clearing a bit each time button is pressed
Momentary Bit – button that sets a bit only while pressed and resets the bit when released
Word Action Buttons – buttons that write values to registers. Data can be 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit
formats depending upon how the registers are defined in the Tag database.
Write Value to Tag – writes a predefined constant value to the register
Add Value to Tag – adds a predefined constant value (addend) to the number already existing in
the target register and places the resulting value (sum) in that register
Subtract Value from Tag – subtracts a predefined constant value (subtrahend) from the existing
number (minuend) in the target register and places the resulting value (difference) in that
register
Add Tag B to Tag A – when pressed, this button will

36
 read the current value in Tag B
read the current value in Tag A
add the Tag B value to the Tag A value
write the resulting sum to Tag A
Subtract Tag B from Tag A – when pressed, this button will
read the current value in Tag B
read the current value in Tag A
subtract the Tag B value from the Tag A value
write the resulting difference to Tag A
Alarm Action Buttons – buttons used to control active alarms
Alarm Acknowledge – creates a button that, when pressed ‘acknowledges’ or indicates that an
active alarm has been recognized by the plant floor operator
Acknowledge All – when pressed, this button will acknowledge all active alarms
Next Alarm – when pressed, displays the next active alarm (according to chronological order) in
sequence
Previous Alarm – displays the prior active alarm (according to chronological order)
Recipe – these are buttons that control recipes
Transfer Recipe – when pressed, this button copies a block of internal memory registers in the
HMC to a set of PLC registers or internal memory registers
Upload Recipe – when pressed, this button copies a predefined block of registers in the PLC to a
set of internal memory registers in the HMC
Multi-task Single-state Button – this button is very similar to the Bit Action Buttons described above
except that instead of controlling a single bit/coil, the Multi-task Single-state button performs one or
more tasks. This button performs the same set of tasks every time the button is pressed and/or
released.
Multi-task Multi-state Button – this button is similar to the Word Action buttons above, except that
instead of writing to a single register, the Multi-task Multi-state button performs one or more tasks.
In addition, unlike the Multi-task Single-state Button, this button can be configured for several
‘states’, meaning that every time the button is pressed, a different set of tasks can be initiated.
• Input Objects – keypads and data entry objects
Data Entry – objects that display a keypad to change the value of a bit or register
Bit Entry – this object is very similar to a Toggle Bit object but instead of writing immediately to
the targeted bit whenever the button is pressed, this object displays a popup keypad. The popup
keypad allows you to select a ‘1’ or ‘0’, then press the Enter key to write the new value to the
bit.
Numeric Entry – this object displays the current value in a register. When pressed, a popup
keypad appears that allows the operator to write a new value to the register.
Keypad – displays a ten-key keypad on the screen
ASCII Keypad – displays an alphanumeric keypad on the screen
Custom Keypad – displays a keypad on the screen but without any defined keys. Programmer
defines each key as to operation.
• Display Objects – these are objects that display data stored in a bit or register as a number or as some
graphic representation (i.e. lamp, bar graph, etc.).
Text – This simple text object displays static text using one of four predefined font sizes.

37
 Date – displays the date using the internal clock
Time – display time
Data Display – these objects display the data in bits or registers as numbers or characters.
Numeric Display – displays the current value in the register
Message Display – displays predefined text strings based upon the value in the register. Each
text string represents a predefined range of values.
Bit Display – displays two predefined text strings according to the state (On or Off) of the bit.
Bit Lamp – represents the state of a targeted bit using a predefined shape or picture (BMP, JPG or
GIF)
Word Lamp – same as Bit Lamp except a Word Lamp represents registers.
Bar Graph – displays a single bar graph that represents the current value in a register.
Multiple Bar Graphs – displays up to four separate bar graphs
Real Time Trend – displays a trend graph that represents up to four registers. The graph polls the
registers on a timed basis and displays the values as plots on a time graph.
Historical Trend – same as above except instead of real-time, the values are read from the Data
Logger.
XY Plot – represents data as an XY scatter plot.
Analog Meter – represents a data register as an analog meter.
Alarm List – displays a list of alarm messages
• Grid – Turn on or off a grid displayed on the screens. Use the grid to help align objects.
• Snap to Grid – if enabled, objects will align on screen according to the location of the grid points.
• Configure Grid – displays the Configure Grid dialog box, which allows the programmer to set the size (in
pixels) of the grid boxes

Block menu
This menu is for configuring the ladder logic in a Logic Block.
 Note: this menu is hidden unless you click a Block in one of the Logic Block subfolders in the Project
Information Window.
• New – creates a new ladder logic block in one of the six types of logic block menus:
Power Up – this is a logic block that executes once when power is initially applied to the HMC
Main – logic blocks created under the Main menu are executed continuously during normal
operation
Subroutine – these logic blocks are only executed when called from another logic block
Timer Interrupt – logic blocks created under the timer interrupt folder are given the highest priority
of all logic blocks. They are executed continuously according to the time interval programmed.
I/O Interrupt 1 – this logic block is executed immediately when called (unless a timer interrupt is in
process) and is called by the high speed counter function, when the count value reaches the preset
value set.
I/O Interrupt 2 – similar to I/O Interrupt 1 except that, when called, it takes lower priority than the
timer interrupt and I/O Interrupt 1
• Duplicate – copies the highlighted logic block and creates a new one identical to it.
• Open – displays the Open Block dialog box with a list of all logic blocks. Highlight a logic block to open
and display it.
• Import – bring a logic block from another project into the existing project. Click this option to display the
Open Project dialog box. Select the project that has the logic block you wish to import. An Import Block
dialog box displays. Highlight all logic blocks for import, and then click OK.

38
 In Native Ladder programming mode the blocks are imported directly from an existing project. In IEC 61131-3
programming mode, logic blocks are exported (see below) to .xml files which can then be imported using this
menu option.
• Export – (IEC 61131-3 programming mode only) Export a logic block as an .xml file for use in another
project.
• Delete – removes the currently viewed logic block from the project
• Close – removes the currently viewed logic block from the workspace

Toolbars
There are several toolbars available in MAPware to make it easier to access objects and features that you need.
Below is a list of the toolbars and a brief description of each shortcut icon in the toolbar (for a more detailed
description of the feature represented by the icon, check the Standard menu above or elsewhere in this
manual).

Project Toolbar
Provides shortcuts to common project tasks

Icon Name Description

New Project Create a new project
Open Project Opens an existing project
Save Project Saves the current project to the hard drive
Close Project Closes current project without exiting MAPware software
Upload Project Uploads a project from a HMC
Download Project Downloads a project to a HMC
Screen/Object Opens/closes the Screen/Objects Properties box
Properties
Zoom In Screen Magnifies size of screens shown in the workspace
Zoom Out Screen Reduces size of screens shown in the workspace
Zoom Factor Adjust the magnification size of the zoom
Go Online This button causes MAPware to go online with the HMC without
uploading the application.
Run Simulate the project on your computer monitor
Data Window Displays the data window; used to monitor values
Compile Compiles the project into a format that can be interpreted by the HMC
and checks for errors
Help Displays the Help files
Cut Use to delete objects from displayed screen
Copy Copies the selected object(s) for pasting
Paste Pastes a copied object(s) onto the screen
Select All Highlights all objects currently on displayed screen
Previous Object Moves focus cursor (highlight) to prior object on screen

39
 Next Object Moves focus cursor to next object on screen
Undo Undoes last executed action in MAPware
Redo If the Undo action was performed by mistake, Redo will bring back the
recorded action last performed in MAPware
Large Icons Shows open screens in workspace as large icons
Small Icons Shows open screens in workspace as small icons
List Shows open screens in workspace as a brief list
Details Shows open screens in workspace as detailed list
Hide System Tags Toggles display of the system tags listed in the Tag Database

Layout Toolbar
Provides shortcuts for screen-related tasks

Icon Name Description

New Base Screen Creates a new base screen
New Template Screen Creates a new template screen
New Popup Screen Creates a new popup screen
Delete Screen Deletes the current screen shown in the workspace
Open Screen A popup dialog box lists all screens, click one to open
Show Screen Similar to Open Screen but you can only use this action if the highlight cursor
is on Screens in the Project Information Window
Nodes Displays a list of all connections (serial, Ethernet) assigned.
 Note: same as clicking Network Configuration folder in the Project
Information Window
Tag Database Displays the tag list (including predefined tags).
 Note: same as clicking Tags folder in the Project Information Window
Alarm Database Displays the alarm database.
 Note: same as clicking Alarms folder in the Project Information Window
Add Bookmark Places a bookmark on the screen in the workspace
Clear Bookmark Removes a bookmark assigned to the screen in the workspace
Clear All Bookmarks Removes all bookmarks from screens
Next Bookmark Displays the next bookmarked screen (in numerical order)
Previous Bookmark Displays the prior bookmarked screen (in numerical order)
Previous Displays the prior screen on the screen list (in numerical order)
Next Displays the next screen on the screen list (in numerical order)
First Displays Screen 1
Last Displays the last configured screen (typically Screen 65004 ASCII Keypad)
Bring to Front If two or more objects are overlaid on screen, the selected object is brought
to the forefront

40
 Send to Back If two or more objects are overlaid on screen, the selected object is sent to
the background
Align Left If two or more objects are highlighted, this action aligns the objects along the
left side of the leftmost highlighted object on screen
Align Right If two or more objects are highlighted, this action aligns the objects along the
right side of the rightmost highlighted object on screen
Align Top If two or more objects are highlighted, this action aligns the objects along the
top side of the topmost highlighted object on screen
Align Bottom If two or more objects are highlighted, this action aligns the objects along the
bottom side of the lowest highlighted object on screen
Center Along Screen’s If one or more objects are highlighted, this action aligns the object(s) along
Horizontal the horizontal center of the screen.
Center Along Screen’s If one or more objects are highlighted, this action aligns the object(s) along
Vertical the vertical center of the screen.
Center Along Object’s If two or more objects are highlighted, this action aligns the objects along the
Horizontal calculated midpoint of the total vertical distance between the objects.
Center Along Object’s If two or more objects are highlighted, this action aligns the objects along the
Vertical calculated midpoint of the total horizontal distance between the objects.
Place Equidistant If three or more objects are highlighted, this action places the objects
Along Horizontal equidistant from each other along the horizontal axis.
Place Equidistant If three or more objects are highlighted, this action places the objects
Along Vertical equidistant from each other along the vertical axis.
Make Equal Width If two or more objects are highlighted, this action resizes the width of each
object to the same width of the last selected object.
Make Equal Height If two or more objects are highlighted, this action resizes the height of each
object to the same height of the last selected object.
Make Equal Size If two or more objects are highlighted, this action resizes each object to the
same size of the last selected object.
Group Objects If two or more objects are highlighted, this action combines the objects into a
‘group’. Once this is done, you can then move or resize the grouped object
rather than perform these actions separately on each member of the group.
Ungroup Objects If a grouped object is highlighted, this action separates each object into the
group so that you can now resize or move each object separately.
Search Instruction Used only in the Logic Blocks, this allows you to quickly locate a specific
instruction of tag address that is configured in one of the logic blocks.

Draw Toolbar
Provides shortcuts to all objects that can be placed on screens

Refer to Chapter 7 – Data & Display Objects for a list of objects available from this toolbar, and for detailed
instructions on using each object.

Common Objects Toolbar

This vertical toolbar is directly to the left of the screen workspace. It contains commonly used objects that are
placed onto screens.

41
Refer to Chapter 7 – Data & Display Objects, for a list of objects on this toolbar and detailed instructions on
using each of the objects.

Font Toolbar
This toolbar is located along the bottom of the MAPware software to adjust or modify text object boxes and
simple drawn objects such as lines, rectangles and circles.

Icon Name Description

Font Change the font used in a text object. On other objects, this box
Name changes to a font size box for simple fonts.
Font Size Change the size of the font used

Bold Use to bold characters

Italics Use to italicize characters

Underline Use to place an underline on characters

Line Color Change the color of the perimeter line of a simple object (i.e. line,
rectangle, ellipse) or the border of the Multilingual Text object
Fill Color Change the color of the interior of a simple object (i.e. line,
rectangle, ellipse) or the interior of data objects (i.e. Multilingual
Text, Simple Text, Bit Entry, Message Display, Numeric Display, etc.)
Font Color Change the color of the text characters of data objects (i.e.
Multilingual Text, Simple Text, Bit Entry, Message Display, Numeric
Display, etc.)
Pattern Use to create a pattern of two colors for the fill area of a rectangle

Pattern Use to select the secondary color for the pattern (primary color
Color based on Fill Color)

Global Toolbar
This toolbar is located along the bottom of the MAPware software and is used to view the different states of a
highlight object.

Icon Name Description

On State Displays the ‘on’ state of all two state buttons shown on screen.

Off State Displays the ‘off’ state of all two state buttons shown on screen.

Previous Displays the ‘previous’ state on multi-state objects shown on

State screen.
Next State Displays the ‘next’ state on multi-state objects shown on screen.

42
 State Use the pull-down list box to jump directly to a particular state on
a multi-state object.
Language When using the Multi-Language feature, this allows you to see all
of the text in each language state.

Status Toolbar
This toolbar is located along the bottom of MAPware and provides general information about the project
currently loaded.

Icon Name Description

Mode Shows what operational mode the project is currently in:
Offline, Online, Run, Halt, etc.
Scratchpad This simply indicates that the area of the workspace that is
area not the screen is light blue
Screen Area This indicates the background color of the screen that is
currently being modified
Object Indicates which object on screen currently has the focus.
selected
Object Indicates the top left corner coordinates of the object
Position selected.
Object Size Indicates the size of the object selected in pixels.

Properties Grid
The Properties Grid is a dialog box that shows the attributes for the screen/object currently highlighted. To
make any changes to an attribute, simply click the attribute and edit the setting. More information about
objects and the attributes available for each object are found in Chapter 7 – Data & Display Objects. On the
bottom of the Properties Grid is a local help guide. This is a brief description of the attribute highlighted.

Downloading/Uploading Projects
Chapter 3 – Creating a Sample Project gives you a step-by-step introduction into creating and downloading a
new project. This section guides you through the specific steps and options of uploading/downloading a project
into your HMC.
There are two methods to transfer projects:
• Using MAPware provides the option of uploading/downloading a project – the method that we discuss
in this section.
• If a computer with MAPware is not readily available, you can also transfer a file using the USB Host port
with a Flash drive connected to the HMC.
 For more information on how to do this, see The HMC Series Installation Guide.

Uploading a project
4 To upload a project:

43
1. Start the MAPware configuration software. It is not necessary to open a project.
2. Connect to the HMC using either a USB or RS232 serial download cable. Or, an Ethernet cable, if using a
model with an Ethernet port.
3. Apply power to the unit.
4. In MAPware, go to Tools > PC Communication Mode. Select the method of communication between the
HMC and your PC.

5. Click Project > Transfer > Upload from the standard menu.

6. Under Upload Options (click the Options button if you do not see this section), select what
data you wish to upload:
Application – uploads application only (this is the project that you would create using MAPware)
Application + Ladder – uploads the application and the ladder logic. The ladder logic is any ladder
instructions created using the Logic Blocks.

44
 Logged Data – uploads any data collected using the Data Logger feature (see Chapter 10 – Data
Logger and Trending “Upload to the MAPware software” section for more details). This option is not
available using Ethernet.
Historical Alarm Data – uploads any alarm messages collected when using the Historical Alarm
feature (see the Chapter 9 – Alarms section Uploading Historical A for more details). This option is
not available using Ethernet.

7. Click the Upload button:

Click OK.
8. When the upload is finished, click Close.

Downloading a project
5 To download a project:
1. Start the MAPware configuration software and open the project you wish to download to the unit.
2. Connect to the HMC using either a USB or Ethernet cable, if using a model with an Ethernet port.
3. Apply power to the unit.
4. In MAPware, go to Tools > PC Communication Mode. Select the method of communication between the
HMC and your PC.

45
 5. Click Project > Transfer > Download from the standard menu.

6. Under Download Options (click the Options button if you do not see this section), select
what data you wish to download:
Firmware – the internal program inside the HMC that makes it run. If you are downloading:
to a new unit
upgrading the firmware of the unit to a newer version
a project that was created in an older version of MAPware
a project in which you have made any changes to the PLC communications drivers assigned to
the Com ports on the HMC check this option. For subsequent downloads of the same project to
a unit, it is not necessary to continue to download the firmware.
Application – downloads application only (this is the project that you create using MAPware)
Ladder – downloads the ladder logic. The ladder logic is any ladder instructions created using the
Logic Blocks.
Data – this option allows you to download preset values into the internal memory of the HMC. This is created
using the Data Monitor feature in offline
Fonts – check this box if the default fonts used in the software have been modified.
Logged Data – only available when uploading a project from the HMC.
Ethernet Settings – Downloads Ethernet settings configured in the Project Configuration window.
Only available on models with an Ethernet port.
7. Device Settings:
Automatically put unit in halt mode before download – check this option to stop operation of the
project in the HMC while downloading a new project.
Automatically put unit in run mode after download – checking this option enables MAPware to
command the HMC to begin running the project after the download is finished.
Initialize keep memory area before download – If you are using the Keep Memory
checking this option will initialize all keep memory to 0.

46
 Initialize all device registers except keep memory after download – this option will initialize all internal memory
of the HMC (except for the keep memory area as outlined in
Chapter 11 – Miscellaneous Features) to zero.
8. Click the Download button:

 Note: If you check the ‘Do not show’ option then the next time you download, this dialog box will not
be shown.
Click OK.
9. The following might appear:

This means you have used the Data Logger feature in your project, so MAPware is asking if you want to
clear the memory in the HMC that is used to store data log information.
10. When the download is finished, click Close.
 Note: clicking Abort during a download may require that you perform a download of the original
project since the existing project in the unit may have already been erased.

Printing a hardcopy of projects

6 The MAPware software allows printing a hardcopy of the project to a printer. Open the project you wish to print
in MAPware, then:
1. Click Project > Print to display the Print Option box:

47
2. Select HMC data to print screen data. Click OK to display:

All – prints all screen data

Project Information – this is general information about the project such as title, author, date and
time last edited
Unit Settings – serial printer port settings
Nodes – assigned PLC drivers to the COM ports
Tags – the tag database
Application Task List – displays all global tasks
Global Keys – displays settings for all global function keys
Screen Task List – displays all tasks created at the screen level
Screen Keys – displays configuration of all screen-based function keys
Alarm – displays the alarm database
Screens – shows the screens created, two per page

48
 3. Select the Ladder Data to display:

4. Highlight (click) the blocks that you wish to print, and then click Preview or Print.

Ethernet Settings
The Ethernet port on the HMC can be used to upload / download projects, monitor PLC logic execution in Online
Mode, communicate with an external PLC, or to act as a server to display Web pages. To configure Ethernet
settings for the HMC2000, 3000 and 7000 open the Project Configuration window by clicking Project >
Properties > Ethernet:

Default values for the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Download Port, Default Gateway and Monitoring Port are:
Parameter Default Setting

49
 HMC IP address 192.168.0.254
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Download Port 5000
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
Monitoring Port 1100

The HMC4000 series doesn’t have an Ethernet tab in the Project Configuration window. The only
way to configure the IP address in the settings window on the HMC itself.
Once the application loads on the HMC device, hold your finger on the top left corner of the screen for 5-10
seconds. (this will not work on startup, application has to load) The blue system settings screen will pop up.

Click the “Network Button” on the top left.

Configure the IP address on this screen. (see next page)

50
PC Ethernet Settings
In order to communicate with the HMC the PC running MAPware must be configured with an IP address that is
on the same Subnet as the HMC. This means that the portion of the IP address masked by the Subnet Mask must
be the same on the PC and the HMC and the portion that is not masked must be unique for each device. For
example, with the settings above, the PC would have to be configured with an IP address of 192.168.0.XXX
where XXX is any number from 0 to 253.
If the PC is connected directly to the HMC Ethernet port a crossover cable should be used, if the HMC is
connected through an Ethernet switch, a straight through Ethernet cable should be used.

DHCP
If a DHCP server is present on the network the DHCP checkbox can be checked to allow the HMC to receive an IP
address from the server. The IP address assigned displays on the power up screen, and is also available in system
registers beginning at SW-28 (see Appendix B – System Tag Memory for details).

Download Port
The download port is the TCP port the HMC uses to upload and download projects. This must match the port
number selected in the Upload / Download window.

Monitoring Port
The Monitoring Port is the TCP port that MAPware uses to monitor logic executing in an HMC in Online Mode.
This port must match the port selected in the On Line Communication Settings window, when Ethernet is

51
 selected as the Mode (Tools > Preferences > Online Communication).

Download Ethernet Settings to an HMC

The settings configured in the Project Configuration window above need to be loaded into the HMC in order to
take effect. The settings can be downloaded using USB or serial or, if Ethernet communication is already
established, through the Ethernet port.
 If Ethernet is used, communication with the HMC will be lost until PC settings are updated to reflect the
changes.
To download the settings, open the download window by clicking Project > Transfer > Download, or click the

download icon . In the Download to device window, check the Ethernet Settings checkbox in the Project
section and then click the Download button.

Tips and Tricks when using MAPware

Here are some ‘tools of the trade’ in regards to using the MAPware software. These are miscellaneous
suggestions that should make it easier to get around the software.

Placing and Editing Screen Objects

7 Only three steps are required to place any object onto a screen:
1. Click the object you wish to place onto a screen. Most of the screen objects can be accessed via several
locations in the MAPware software. For example, to place a GoTo Screen button on a screen, you can
click one of the following:
On the Menu Bar, click Draw > Buttons > Navigation Buttons > Go to Screen.
From the Draw toolbar, click Quick Buttons > Go to Screen.
From the Draw toolbar, click Advanced Objects > Buttons > Navigation Buttons > Go to Screen.
On the Common Objects toolbar, click the Go to Screen icon.

52
 2. Move the mouse cursor to the location in the Screen Work Area where you wish to have the object
placed (the mouse cursor changes to the crosshair symbol ).
 Note that the point at which you click is where the top left corner of the object is placed.
3. Click the left mouse cursor to place the object on screen. If you need to move the object after it is placed
on screen, simply click and drag the object to the proper location.
Once the object is in position, you can easily edit the attributes for that object using the Properties Grid dialog
box located on the far-right hand side of the MAPware software. To modify an attribute of an object, simply click
the attribute in the Properties Grid box. Then edit the attribute. The options for changing an attribute depends
upon which attribute is highlighted. Some attributes (i.e. On Text, Off Text, Label, etc.) require that you type in
the text or number. Color attributes (i.e. On Text Color) require that you display a Color Palette dialog box and
simply select the color of interest. Some attributes (i.e. Button Style) use a pull-down list box from which you
make a selection. Other attributes require displaying a popup dialog box for further edits. See Chapter 7 – Data
& Display Objects for a complete listing of attributes available for each object.

Moving and Resizing Screen Objects

After an object is placed onto a screen, you can easily move the object by clicking and dragging the object.
 Note that the mouse cursor changes to the crosshair symbol . You can also move an object by highlighting
the object (click it), then use your keyboard arrow keys. This method will move the object one pixel at a time.
8 To move more than one object at the same time:
1. Highlight one object.
2. Hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard, and then click another object(s).
3. Click and drag to move the selected objects or use your keyboard as described above.
Two or more objects can be highlighted by clicking the left mouse button and dragging the mouse so that the
dotted box that appears completely encloses the objects that you wish to highlight.
 Note: after performing this operation, if there is a highlighted object that you do not wish to be part of the
selected group, simply hold down the CTRL key and click that item to deselect it.
9 Most objects can be resized. The easiest method for resizing an object on a screen is to:
1. Click the object to highlight it.
2. A series of small white boxes (called boundary delimiters) appear on the perimeter of the object. Move
the mouse cursor over any of these white boxes until you see the cursor change to .
3. Click and drag the boundary delimiter to a new position – the object will resize.

53
Overlaying Objects
MAPware does not permit most objects to be overlaid (placed on top of each other). You will see an error
message displayed similar to the one below when you attempt to compile or save the project:

If you wish to perform multiple tasks with one object, try using the Task feature (see Error! Reference source
not found.). However, some objects can be overlaid. The general rule of thumb is if two objects are active
objects (meaning the object is used to display data from a register or is used to perform some action when
pressed), then you cannot overlay them. If one of the objects is active and the other is static (i.e. text box,
drawing tool, etc.) then overlaying is permitted as long as the active object is on top. If both objects are static,
overlay them in any manner.
When two objects are overlaid, you can select which object is shown on top and which object is shown on
bottom by using the Bring to Front and Send to Back controls located in the Layout menu and toolbar.

54
Aligning objects
As you create projects in MAPware, you will often wish to have two or more objects leveled either horizontally
or vertically. The easiest method is to highlight the objects (see Moving and Resizing Objects) and then use the
four alignment tools located in the Layout > Align menu or Layout toolbar.
For example, the programmer wants the following objects to be horizontally level:

First, he highlights all objects to be leveled:

Then he clicks on the Align Bottom icon:

55
He also wants to align the picture of the motor with the text label, so both of these objects are highlighted:

Then he clicks on the Align Left icon:

Finally, he wants all of the text and numeric objects to be spaced evenly across the screen.
He highlights these objects:

Then clicks the Place Equidistant along Horizontal icon:

56
Making objects the same size
MAPware includes some tools that make it very easy to adjust two or more objects so that they are the same
size. The three buttons: Make Equal Width, Make Equal Height, and Make Equal Size on the Layout toolbar are
for this purpose.
In this example, we wish to make the green rectangle and the blue rectangle the same width:

We start by highlighting (see Moving and Resizing Objects) both objects. Before you begin, make sure that the
object you wish to use as the template for the new width is selected last. In this example, we wish to make the
green rectangle have the width of the current blue rectangle. Therefore, we highlight the blue rectangle last:

Then we click the Make Equal Width icon:

57
Centering Objects
There may be an occasion in which you wish to center two or more objects. MAPware has four control icons that
can make this job a snap. Let us see how the shapes in the screen below change position using each of these
controls:

• Center along Screen’s Horizontal – this control will center the selected objects along the horizontal (X)
axis of the screen. What does this mean? If the entire screen size is 320 (width) by 240 (height) pixels,
then the horizontal center of the screen is 160 pixels along the X-axis. MAPware will thus move each
object along the X-axis (horizontally) until the center of that object is located at 160 pixels:

Center of screen along the vertical axis

• Center along Screen’s Vertical – this control will center the selected objects along the vertical (Y) axis of
the screen. What does this mean? If the entire screen size is 320 (width) by 240 (height) pixels, then the
vertical center of the screen is 120 pixels along the Y-axis. MAPware will thus move each object along
the Y-axis (vertically) until the center of that object is located at 120 pixels:

Center of screen along the horizontal axis

• Center along Object’s Horizontal – this control centers the selected objects along the computed
horizontal center of the selected objects. What does this mean? The MAPware computes the horizontal
center of the topmost object and bottommost object then places the selected objects at the midpoint
location between the objects.

Midpoint location of selected objects

along the horizontal axis

• Center along Object’s Vertical – this control centers the selected objects along the computed vertical
center of the selected objects. What does this mean? The MAPware computes the vertical center of the
leftmost object and rightmost object then places the selected objects at the midpoint location between

58
 the objects.

Troubleshooting the USB Download Driver

Projects created in MAPware are downloaded into the HMC via the RS232 Com port on your computer, by
connecting to a USB port or through Ethernet on models with an Ethernet port. If you intend to use the USB
connection, a USB device driver is installed with MAPware so that, when you connect the HMC to your PC the
correct device driver is automatically selected. If something goes wrong in the installation process you can
manually install the correct driver by directing the windows device manager to the USB Drivers folder in the
MAPware install directory. The default path to this folder is:
C:\Maple Systems\MAPware7000\USB Drivers\

59
Chapter 3 – Creating a Sample Project
Introduction
This chapter provides step by step instructions for creating a simple test project. When finished, instructions are
given to download the project and run it on a unit.
For this example, we will use the following items:
• HMC3043A-M
• HMC3-M0808Y0401T expansion module
• MAPware software running on a PC
• Micro USB configuration cable (PN 7431-0119)
• Simple test circuit attached to the I/O module to test the inputs and outputs configured in the project.
The instructions presented here should be general enough that they can be adapted for equipment on hand.
The project will demonstrate:
• Configuration of Input and Output channels
• Writing a simple Native Ladder logic block that controls I/O points
• Scaling an Analog Input
• Configuring a screen with objects that display HMC data
• Navigating between screens
This chapter assumes that you have already installed MAPware and have some familiarity with the HMC
hardware.
 If you have not done so, please read Chapter 2 – Software Tour, and The HMC Installation Guide before you
begin.

Choosing a Programming Language: Native Ladder vs. IEC 61131-3

The HMC2000 and HMC4000 only have IEC 61131-3
MAPware projects use one of two programming language modes to create PLC Logic; Native Ladder mode, or
IEC 61131-3 mode (HMC7030A-M and HMC7030A-L models only support Native Ladder). Native Ladder projects
contain a Ladder Logic editor. IEC 61131-3 mode projects contain five different logic editors.
• Ladder Diagram (LD)
• Function Block Diagram (FBD)
• Structured Text (ST)
• Instruction List (IL)
• Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
These are defined according to the IEC 61131-3 standard.
 Detailed information on the Native Ladder editor is in the HMC Ladder Logic Guide (1010041), and
information on the IEC 61131-3 editors can be found in the MAPware IEC 61131-3 Programming Guide
(1010045). Both modes are covered in the help file.
Once a mode is selected, the project cannot be converted to the other mode.
The Native Ladder mode editor will be used in this chapter.

60
 Beginning a New Project
Starting a new project in MAPware is straightforward. After MAPware has started, it will display the opening
screen. This screen displays a list of recent projects and the ability to open an existing, or create a new project.
10 ► To create a new project:
1. Click the New option under the Project category, or Click Project > New in the menu bar.
2. When the Select Product dialog box appears, make the following selections:

Product Series: HMC

Product: HMC3043
Model: HMC3043A-M
Programming Language: Native Ladder
Display Orientation: Horizontal
3. Click OK.
4. From the menu bar select Project > Save. Select the directory where you want to store to project and
enter a name for the project. Click Save to save the new project.
5. After the project is created and saved, a description and password for the project file can be entered in
the Project Configuration window. Click Project > Properties.

 Note: A password is not required. If one is configured make sure it is remembered. It is not possible
to recover a project if the password has been forgotten or lost.
 Note: On models that support Ethernet, an Ethernet tab will also be available to configure the IP
settings of the HMC. Refer to the Ethernet Settings section in Chapter 2 – Software Tour for more
information.
6. Click OK to save these settings.

61
 7. The main screen area of MAPware appears:

8. Notice the project name lists on the title bar as well as in the Project List of the Project Information
Window.

Configuring an I/O module

The first thing to set up in this new project is an I/O expansion module. This is done in the IO Allocation window.
11 ► To add an I/O module:
1. Expand the IO Allocation node in the Project Information Window then click the Expansion folder:

2. The HMC3043A-M only has one expansion slot. This will be listed in the Main Workspace window, as
shown above. Double click Slot1 in the list to open the IO Allocation window for this module. In the IO

62
 Allocation window select HMC3-M0808Y0401T for the Model:

3. Click the Configure button at the bottom of this window to configure the channels we are going to use:

4. In this quick start we are not going to use any of the special features of the digital I/O channels such as
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) or High Speed Counter (HSC) functionality, so leave the defaults on the
Digital tab of this window. Click the Analog tab:

5. This example project will use Input Channel 0 with a 0 to 5 V input range. Make sure Input Channel0 is
selected in the Channel dropdown list and select Voltage(0-5V) in the Type dropdown list.

63
  Note: Scroll down in the Type dropdown list to find the Voltage(0-5V) option).

6. Click Confirm to save this selection.

 Note that the selection now appears in the Settings Preview section:

7. This completes the necessary I/O configuration for this project. Click Close in the Configuration window.
In the IO Allocation window check the Download Configuration Settings checkbox.

8. Click OK in the IO Allocation window. Doing this adds the selected module to the project, allocates a set
of I/O module tags in the tag database, and sets the default values of those tags according to the
selected configuration.
For example, the settings above will create a tag called Slot01-CH0_Analog_IP_Type at address
MW0160 and set the initial value of this tag to 6, which is the configuration register setting for the 0 to
5V input range. The raw input value can then be read from the tag named Slot01-CH0_AnalogIPReg at
address XW0111.
 For more information on I/O modules and associated tags, see the appropriate I/O Module Guide for
your series of product.

Adding Tags to the Project

Tags map data registers to a descriptive name. Once defined, the tag name can be used throughout the project
to refer to a particular register, without needing to remember its memory address.

64
12 In addition to the tags automatically generated for the I/O card, we will create custom tags to display values on
the HMC screen or do calculations in a Ladder Logic block.
1. Click the Tag folder in the Project List to open the tag database window.

2. To add a tag, right click in the list of tags and select Add from the context menu, or click the Add Tag
button.

3. The Add Tag window is displayed.

4. This window is used to configure the parameters for the new tag. The main options here are:
Node Name – Specifies the device where the tag is located. In this sample project there is only one
Node which is the HMC3043A-M itself. If we had configured an external device in the Network
Configuration window, such as an MLC, it would be available to select in this dropdown list.
Tag – Name – Enter a descriptive name for the tag.
5. Use this window to add the following tags to the project:
Name Register / Register Byte(s) Description
Coil Type (address)
RawInputInt Data D00000 4-Bytes Integer register to contain raw input from analog
Registers input
RawInputFloat Data D00002 4-Bytes Floating point format tag to contain raw input from
Registers analog input

65
 RawLow Data D00004 4-Bytes Smallest possible value input register can have. Used
Registers for scaling.
RawHigh Data D00006 4-Bytes Largest possible value input register can contain.
Registers Used for scaling.
EngLow Data D00008 4-Bytes Smallest possible value of scaled input.
Registers
EngHigh Data D00010 4-Bytes Largest possible value of scaled input.
Registers
ScaledInput Data D00012 4-Bytes Scaled input value.
Registers
HighLimit Data D00014 4-Bytes When ScaledInput is above this value set the high
Registers limit output
LowLimit Data D00016 4-Bytes When ScaledInput is below this value set the low
Registers limit output
DisableScaling Internal Coils B00000 Coil Disable (ON) / Enable(OFF) Scaling Logic
EnableLimits Internal Coils B00001 Coil Enable (ON) / Disable (OFF) limit logic
EnableIOFollow Internal Coils B00002 Coil Enables (ON) logic to set outputs based on input
state.

Initializing Tags with Power On Tasks

To perform the scaling operation in this sample project we need to initialize the tags used to define the input
and output scales. There are two primary places available to perform initializations in MAPware:
• With a Power On Task
• With a Power Up Logic Block
In this sample we will configure a set of Power On Tasks.
Click the Tasks folder in the Project Information Window to open the task editor.

There are two Tasks sections in this window. Power On Tasks are executed one time when the HMC first powers
up. Global Tasks are executed continuously while the HMC is running.
Notice there is a default Power On task that tells the HMC which screen to display first.

66
13 ► Add tasks to the Power On section to initialize the scaling tags:
1. Make sure the Power-On Tasks radio button is selected.

2. From the Select Task dropdown list, select the Write Value to Tag task

3. In the Tag selector choose RawLow as the tag to write to

4. In the Number field enter: 0

5. Select Float from the Type dropdown list.

6. Click the Add button

7. The task now appears in the Power-On Tasks list:

8. Repeat this process to add Power On tasks that initialize the tags in the table below with the values
shown Make sure to set the Type to float in each task.
Tag Value Type Notes
RawLow 0 Float Already completed above
RawHigh 65535 Float
EngLow 0 Float
EngHigh 5.0 Float
HighLimit 4.5 Float
LowLimit 0.5 Float

67
 9. When complete the list of Power-On Tasks should look like this:

Ladder Logic Blocks

With the tags defined and initialized, it is time to put them to use in a Ladder Logic program.

Scaling Analog Inputs

14 ► The first thing the logic block will do is scale the raw input from analog input channel 0 of the I/O card to an
engineering value:
1. Expand the Logic Blocks folder in the Project Information Window, then expand the Main folder:

2. MAPware creates a default block in the Main folder called Block 1. Click the folder for this block to open
the Ladder Logic editor.
3. Click the Normally Closed Contact option on the Common Objects Toolbar:

4. Then click directly to the left of the connection point for rung 1:

5. This will place the Normally Closed Contact, and open the tag selection window. In the popup window
select DisableScaling as the tag to use in this first contact, then click OK.

68
  To get the entire tag name to display select Tools > Preferences > Project Global Settings and
increase the Number of tag name characters to be displayed in Instruction setting to the maximum 20
characters setting.
 In the tag selection popup window, the ellipsis button can be used to open a tag browser
window where all available tags are visible. A search field is available, and new tags can be created using
this window. Keep this in mind for the steps that follow.

► The engineering values will be floating point numbers. Before scaling, the raw input needs to be moved to a
Data Register and then converted to floating point format. To move the input value into a data register, use the
Move DWord instruction:
6. Select Data Transfer > Move DW from the instruction menu then click directly to the right of the
Normally Open Contact to place the instruction. Select Slot01-CH0_AnalogIPReg as Operand A (Source),
and RawInputInt as Operand B (Destination).

7. Before placing the next instruction we need a vertical link, or branch, after the contact and before the

move instruction. Click the vertical link icon in the Common Objects Toolbar, then click the

69
 workspace between the Normally Closed contact and the move instruction to place the vertical link:

8. To the right of this link, place an Integer to Float instruction (Conversion > Integer to float from the
instruction menu).
9. Configure Operand A with the RawInputInt tag and Operand B with the RawInputFloat tag.

10. Another vertical link is required to add another instruction below the Integer to float instruction. Again,
click the vertical link icon and then click immediately to the left of the Integer to float instruction.

70
 11. To the right of this vertical link, place a Scale instruction (Functions > Scale).

► The Scale instruction has three operands. These are used to perform a linear mapping of the input (Operand
A), to the output (Operand C). The figure below shows this operation graphically:

A graphic representation of the Scale instruction with n=2: The input value x (Operand A) is mapped to an
output value y(x) (Operand C) using the relationship shown. m and b, the slope and offset of y(x), are
determined by four tags starting at the address specified in Operand B. These correspond, in consecutive order
according to tag address, to the parameters: x1, x2, y1, y2, as shown in the figure.
12. Operand A is the input, or x in the figure. For this operand use the output of the Integer to Float
instruction (RawInputFloat).
Select RawInputFloat for Operand A.

71
13. Operand B is the starting address of a block of four registers. The first of these registers defines the start
of the input scale (the x coordinate of P1 in the figure), the second register defines the end of the input
scale (the x coordinate of P2 in the figure), the third register defines the start of the output scale (the y
coordinate of P1 in the figure), and the fourth register defines the end of the output scale (the y
coordinate of P2 in the figure).
Conveniently, we’ve already defined a block of four consecutive tags for this purpose, starting with the
tag: RawLow at address D00004.
Tag Name Register Coordinate
RawLow D00004 x1
RawHigh D00006 x2
EngLow D00008 y1
EngHigh D00010 y2
Select RawLow as Operand B.

14. Operand C is the output, or y(x) in the figure.

Use the tag ScaledInput for Operand C.

15. After the instruction is placed the Type property will need to be changed to Float. and the Data size
property to 2. The Data size specifies the number of points to use in the linear mapping. This appears as
n in the instruction. Do this in the Instruction Properties window.

72
 That completes the setup of the scaling operation. The rung should now consist of three instructions as shown
here:

Setting Limit Outputs

► Next we will add the high and low limit logic to control two digital outputs that will indicate when the analog
input is either too high or too low. This logic will be enabled or disabled using an enable bit (EnableLimits).
15 First place a Normally Open Contact that can be used to enable / disable the logic rung we are about to create.
1. Click the NO Contact icon in the Common Objects Toolbar.

2. Click the input to the second rung of the Ladder Diagram to place the contact.

3. Select EnableLimits (B00001) to use as the tag for this contact and click OK in the tag selection window.
This will allow this rung of logic to be turn on and off during runtime.

4. This rung will have two lines. One to check the high limit and one to check the low limit. This will require
a vertical link to connect both lines to the output of the EnableLimits contact. Click the Vertical Link
icon.

5. Click the output of the EnableLimits contact to place the link.

6. The first line will be used to check if the scaled input value is above the high limit. Select the greater
than instruction from the Instruction menu (Compare > Greater Than)

73
7. Click directly to the right of the top of the vertical link to place the instruction

8. Click OK in the Default operand selection popup window to accept the default operands
9. After the instruction is placed the Type property will need to be changed to Float. Do this in the
Instruction Properties window.

10. Use the Instruction Properties grid to select ScaledInput as the Name for Operand A, and HighLimit as
the Name for Operand B.

 You must change the instruction type to float before assigning operands because the instruction’s
default type is unsigned int. Attempting to select our previously created float type tags before changing
the instruction’s type to float will result in duplicate tags being created of the type unsigned int.
11. If the input is above the high limit, the logic will set an output on the I/O card. A standard output coil
instruction is used for this purpose. Click the output icon in the Common Objects Toolbar:

12. Click the output of the Greater Than instruction to place the output.

74
13. Select Slot01-OP_Coil_00002 (Y01002) as the tag controlled by this output coil and click OK.

This is the coil controlling the first relay output on the I/O card (terminal Y2).
14. To complete this rung, we will add the logic to test the lower limit on the second line of the rung. Add a
Less Than instruction (Compare > Less Than) to the right of the bottom end of the vertical link.

15. Accept the default tags and set the Type property to Float for this instruction.

16. Set Operand A to ScaledInput and Operand B to LowLimit.

17. Add an output instruction to the right of this Less Than instruction that sets coil Slot01-
OP_Coil_00003 (Y01003).

75
 This completes the rung to test the input limit conditions. The completed run should look like this:

Mapping Inputs to Outputs

The last bit of logic will bind the state of two outputs to the state of two inputs (I/O Following).
This logic will be enabled or disabled using an enable bit (EnableIOFollow) in an input contact. If the output coil
instructions were placed on the same rung as this enable contact, the outputs would be forced OFF whenever
the enable bit is OFF. We would instead like the outputs to be free to toggle states even if I/O Following is
disabled. To accomplish this, the logic will be placed in a separate subroutine logic block, and the enable contact
will be used to control whether or not the block is called (evaluated).
16 ►Create a new Subroutine logic block:
1. Right-click the Subroutine folder and select New Logic Block from the context menu.

2. Block 2 is created and a new editor window is opened.

3. Click the Normally Open Contact icon in the common objects toolbar, then click the input to rung 1
in the logic editor to place the contact.

4. Select Slot01-IN_Coil_00000 (X01000) as the tag to use in this contact.

76
 5. Click the Output Coil icon , then click the output of the NO Contact to place an Output Coil.

6. Select Slot01-OP_Coil_00004 as the tag controlled by this output.

This completes the first rung of this logic block:

The next rung will be essentially the same, only it will use Slot01-IN_Coil_00001 for the input contact and
Slot01-OP_Coil_00005 for the output coil.
7. Start rung 2 by making a copy of rung 1. Right click to the left of the input on rung 1. From the context
menu select Copy All Instructions > Rung.

77
8. Right click rung 2. From the context menu, select Paste. This will put a copy of the instructions from rung
1 on rung 2.

9. Click the Normally Open Contact in rung 2 to open the property grid for this instruction. Change the
Name property from Slot01-IN_Coil_00000 to Slot01-IN_Coil_00001.

10. Click the Output instruction in rung 2 to open the property grid for this instruction. Change the Name
property from Slot01-OP_Coil_00004 to Slot01-OP_Coil_00005.

11. Because this logic block is a subroutine, it must end with a Subroutine Return instruction. From the
instruction menu, select Program Control > Subroutine return.

12. Click anywhere on rung 3 to place the instruction.

This completes the logic for the subroutine logic block. The completed block should look something like

78
 this:

13. Finally, we must add a rung to Block 1 that will call the subroutine. Click the folder for Block 1 in the
Project Information Window to reopen the Main Block 1 editor.

14. Click the Normally Open Contact icon in the common objects toolbar, then click the input to rung 3
to place the contact.

15. Select EnableIOFollow (B00002) as the tag controlling this contact.

16. Place a Subroutine call instruction (Program Control > Subroutine call) on the output of this contact.

79
 17. Make sure that the Block Name property for the subroutine call instruction is set to Block 2.

This completes the logic needed for this sample project. The completed logic block (Block 1) should now look
something like this:

This is a good time to compile the project to make sure there are no errors. To do this, either click the compile
icon: , select Project > Compile, or hit F9. A successful compile will show a Compilation Successful message:

If there are compile errors, they will be listed in the output window:

Fix any errors before moving on.

Screen Objects
17 ► To see what the logic is doing in real time, the project needs a couple of HMI screens. This first screen will be
used to display the digital I/O points. It will show the current state of input channels X0 and X1 and control the
outputs Y4 and Y5. It will also be used to enable and disable the output following logic created in the ladder logic
block.

80
 1. In the Project Information Window, click to expand the Base Screens folder. By default, Screen1 is
already present.
2. Click the Screen1 subfolder to display the work area for Screen1.

Labels
18 ► Before adding data display objects to the screen, we will add labels so that it is clear what data the screen is
displaying:
1. Select Drawing Tools > Multilingual Text from the Draw menu then click in the window work area to
place the Multilingual Text object.

2. This text will provide a title for the window. Select the object and click and drag one of the corner icons
to expand its size. Then center the object roughly in the top middle of the screen as shown.

81
3. In the Properties Grid, click the Font property and click the ellipsis button at right. Change the font to 26
point.

4. Now change the Text property to an appropriate title for this screen.

5. Expand the text object and use the center horizontal toolbar icon as needed to reposition the title.

6. Create a copy of this Multilingual Text object to use as a label for the input section. Right-click the object
and select copy from the context menu. Then Right-click where you would like to place the next label

82
 and select paste from the context menu.

7. Change the Font property for the copy to 12 point, and enter Inputs for the text property. Position the
label roughly as shown.

8. Continue to make copies to create the following labels as shown [Inputs, Outputs, X0:, X1:, Y4:, Y5:, and
IO Following:].

Bit Lamps
19 ► With the labels in place, we will now add bit lamps to monitor the state of the two inputs.

1. Click the Bit Lamp icon , then click the screen to the right of the label for X0.

83
2. In the properties grid for this Bit Lamp, change the Style property to From Picture Library.

3. Click the field for the FromPictureLibraryOFF property then click the ellipsis button to open the
library browser.

4. Click any of the lamps, then click OK to select it.

 Note: this will automatically select the corresponding ON image for the FromPictureLibraryON
property.

84
 5. Click the Tag Name property, then click the ellipsis button: . Select Slot01-IN_Coil_00000 as the tag
to use for this bit lamp.

6. Make a copy of this bit lamp, and place it to the right of the X1: label.

7. Click the new bit lamp so that its property grid is shown. Change the Tag Name property from Slot01-
IN_Coil_00000 to Slot01-IN_Coil_00001.

Toggle Bit Objects

20 ► Next, we will add Toggle Bit objects to control the outputs and enable/disable the I/O following rung of logic.
1. From the Draw toolbar select Advanced Objects > Buttons > Bit Action > Toggle Bit. Click to the right of
the label for output Y4 to place the Toggle Bit button.

2. In the properties grid for this Toggle Bit object change the Feedback Tag property to Yes. This allows a
tag to control the appearance of the Toggle Bit object on the screen. It can be set to the same tag that
the object is controlling, or to a different tag

85
3. .Select Slot01-OP_Coil_00004 for both the Feedback Tag Name property and the Tag Name property.

4. In the Appearance – Feedback Tag On section, change the On Text property to ON.

5. Resize and reposition the Toggle Bit object as needed to fit next to the Y4: label.

6. Make a copy of the Toggle Bit object and place it to the right of the Y5: label.

86
 7. In the properties for the new Toggle Bit object set both the Feedback Tag Name and Tag Name
properties to Slot01-OP_Coil_00005.

8. Create one more copy of the Toggle Bit object and place it to the right of the IO Following: label.

9. In the property grid for this object, select EnableIOFollow for both the Feedback Tag Name and Tag
Name properties.

That is all the objects that will be displayed on this screen.

87
 Duplicating a Screen
21 ► To save time setting up the next screen, we will duplicate this first screen and use it as a starting point for the
second.
1. Right-click the Screen1 folder in the Project Information Window and select Duplicate from the context
menu.

2. You should now see two screens listed in the project tree.

The editor screen has changed to the new Screen2, even though it looks exactly the same as Screen1
because it is a duplicate.
3. Before moving on to Screen2, we need to add a navigation button to Screen1 that opens Screen2. Click
the Screen1 folder to switch back to the editor window for that screen.
4. From the Draw toolbar select Quick Buttons > GoTo Screen

5. Click in the lower right of the screen to place the navigation button.

88
6. In the Property Grid for the GoTo Screen button change the On Text property to Analog, and the Screen
Name property to Screen 2.

7. Resize and reposition the GoTo Screen button so that it fits neatly in the bottom right of the screen.

8. Screen 2 will be edited next. This screen will be used to monitor analog input channel zero, along with
the scaling and limits functionality created earlier in the logic blocks. Click the Screen2 folder in the
Project Information Window.

Screen2, looking exactly the same as Screen1 without the GoTo Screen button, will appear in the work
area.

89
► Modify labels and objects.
9. To edit the text of an existing label, simply click the label to open its property grid. Then enter the
desired text in the text property. Edit the title of Screen2 so that it reads: Analog Inputs.

10. To save time, use existing objects as staring points for new objects. Delete the two Toggle Bit objects for
Y2 and Y1, and move the two Bit Lamp objects to the right.

11. Change the Inputs label so that is says Input Values and move it upward to make some room.

12. The raw input and scaled input will be displayed under this Input Values section of the screen. Change
the text property of the X0: label to Raw Input: and the text property of the X1: label to Scaled Input:.
Move these two labels below the Input Values label as shown.

90
 Numeric Displays
22 ► Next we will configure Numeric Display objects to show the raw input value and the scaled input value.

1. From the common objects toolbar click the numeric display icon , then click to the right of the Raw
Input label.

2. In the property grid for this numeric display object, set the font property to 10 x 14 and the Tag Name
property to Slot01-Ch0_AnalogIPReg. In the Format section, change the Number Of Digits to 5.

3. Create a copy of this Numeric Display object and paste it directly below to use as the scaled input
display.

91
 4. In the property grid for the Scaled Input numeric display, change the Format > Digits After Decimal
property to 2, the Data Type property to Float, and the Tag Name property to ScaledInput.

Numeric Entry
23 ► Next we will place two Numeric Entry objects to allow the engineering scale for the input to be changed
during runtime.
1. Copy the labels from the InputValues section, paste them and edit the text properties of the copies to
create; Scaling, Eng. High: and Eng. Low: labels as shown.

92
 2. From the Common Objects Toolbar, click the Numeric Entry icon , then click to the right of the Eng.
High: label.

3. In the property grid for the new Numeric Entry object set; the Font property to 10 x 14, the Tag Name to
EngHigh, the Data Type to Float, the Format > Number Of Digits to 5, and the Format > Digits After
Decimal Point to 2.

4. Create a copy of this Numeric Input object and paste it directly below the original to create a Numeric
Input for EngLow. Change the Tag Name property from EngHigh to EngLow.

The last section of Screen2 will display the limit indicators controlled by the ladder logic program. The existing
bit lamps and toggle bit object will be modified for this section. Two numeric entry objects will be added,
allowing the limits to be adjusted.

93
5. Rearrange the existing objects as shown

6. Modify the Text property of the four multilingual text object labels on the right side of the screen.
Change; Outputs to Limits, Y4: to High Limit:, Y5: to Low Limit:, and I/O Following: to Enable Limits:.

7. Change the TagName property for the HighLimit bit lamp from Slot01-IN_Coil_00000 to Slot01-
OP_Coil_00002. Change the Tag Name property in the LowLimit bit lamp from Slot01-IN_Coil_00001 to
Slot01-OP_Coil_00003.

8. Change both the Feedback Tag Name and Tag Name properties in the Enable Limits toggle bit object
from EnableIOFollow to EnableLimits.

94
9. Create a copy of the Eng. High: Numeric Entry object and paste it to the right of the High Limit: Bit Lamp
object. Change the Tag Name property in this new Numeric Entry object from EngHigh to HighLimit.

10. Create a copy of the Eng. Low: Numeric Entry object and paste it to the right of the Low Limit: Bit Lamp
object. Change the Tag Name property in this Numeric Entry object from EngLow to LowLimit.

11. To complete the second screen add a GoTo Screen button allowing the operator to navigate back to
Screen1. Select Quick Buttons > GoTo Screen from the Draw Toolbar. Click in the lower right corner of
the screen to place the button.

12. In the property grid for the new button, set the On Text property to Digital and the Screen Name
property to Screen1.

95
This completes the set up for the second screen. The finished Screen 2 should look something like this:

The project is now complete and ready to be downloaded to the HMC hardware.

Testing the Project

Test Hardware Setup

Install the HMC3-M0808Y0401T expansion module into the expansion slot of the HMC3043A-M. Connect the
HMC3043A-M to a 24VDC power supply. Connect the 0 and 24VDC connectors on the HMC3-M0808Y0401T to
the 24VDC power supply.
 See the HMC3000 I/O Guide and appropriate Quick Start Guide for more detail on how to install the
expansion module.
A simple test circuit to control the inputs and view the outputs is shown below.

If indicator LEDs or lamps are not available, the continuity function on a digital multi-Meter can be used to test
the state of the relay outputs. For outputs Y2, Y3, and Y4, test continuity between C1 and the output pin. For
output Y5 test continuity between C2 and Y5. Do not connect 24V to C1 and C2 in this case.

96
 Downloading the Project
This step assumes that you are using a USB download cable. If not, please consult Chapter 2 – Software Tour.
24 ► To download the project.
1. Connect a Micro USB download cable (PN: 7431-0019) between your programming computer and the
HMC USB Slave Port.
2. Click Project > Transfer > Download to display the Download dialog box:

Under Download Options, check Firmware.

Under Project, check Application and Ladder.
Under Device Settings, check ‘Automatically put unit in halt mode’ and ‘Automatically put unit in run
mode’
3. Click the Download button.

 Check the ‘Do not show this message again’ to hide this warning message on future downloads
during this session.
4. Click OK. The file will begin downloading:

97
 5. When complete, the HMC3043A-M will reinitialize and display the application:

Running the Application

25 ► Application test procedure.

1. Toggle the output toggle bit buttons. Verify that the corresponding outputs come on.
2. The bit lamp indicators should change state when the corresponding input switch is closed.
3. Enable the I/O following feature and verify that the outputs do indeed follow the state of the inputs.
4. On the analog screen, vary the input voltage and watch the raw and scaled values change.

5. Enable the High/Low limits and vary the input voltage to see Y2 and Y3 toggle on and off at each limit.
6. Touch the High and Low limit numeric entry objects to change the values on the fly and verify that Y2
and Y3 toggle on and off at the new limits.
7. Do the same for the Eng. High and Eng. Low to change the output scale of the scaling instruction.

98
 Online Monitoring
With the project running in the HMC and the USB download cable still attached, MAPware can be used to
monitor logic block execution in real time.
26 ► To begin an online monitoring session.
1. Open the editor for Block 1
2. Select Tools > Preferences > Online Communications Mode to select the communication method used
for online monitoring.

 If using Ethernet, the IP address of the HMC must be entered in this window. Here we assume USB is
selected.
3. Select Mode > Online > Without Upload from the menu bar. This mode will use the currently open
project to go online with the selected HMC.
The logic block will be shown with the current values above the operands.

99
Contacts and coils are color coded according to their current state. Contacts are red when open (off), and green
when closed (on).

Output coils are green when energized (on) red when not energized (off).

Values can be changed from within the logic block editor. Double click the contact or operand to be changed,
and enter the state or value as needed:

 For more information on using online monitoring mode or debugger mode, refer the MAPware Ladder Logic
Guide, or the IEC 61131-3 Programming Guide.

Review
Before leaving this chapter, let’s review what has been learned. Although not all of the features available in
MAPware or the HMC Series have been covered, we have taken our first steps in using this software and
becoming familiar with device operation. Consider what has been accomplished:
• A new project was created, and configured for an HMC model, including setting up and configuring an
expansion module.
• The tag database was used to create new tags using internal HMC memory as well as I/O module
registers.
• Two screens were created using data display, data entry and navigation objects.
• The project showed how to create a simple ladder logic program using Logic Blocks, including a
subroutine block.
• The project was saved, compiled, and downloaded into the HMC.
• Online monitor mode was used to view the application as it executed.
The rest of this manual will go into greater detail on the many features available in the HMC Series, beginning
with a more in-depth discussion on tags and screen features.

100
Chapter 4 – Tags
What are tags?
Tags are names assigned to internal memory registers of the HMC, contacts of an expansion module, and any
PLC data registers/coils of an external PLC. Some system tags are predefined when you first begin a project (see
Predefined System Tags below). Other tags are created by the programmer. For example, you must create and
assign a tag to every PLC memory address that you wish to read/write to. When using the optional I/O
Expansion modules tags are created in order to use them. The Tag Database collects and stores all tags for
review and editing.
Once a tag is assigned, you can easily link any object (i.e. bit lamp, numeric register, etc.) to the tag. Tags have
several advantages:
• Tags provide an organized method of tracking all memory addresses used in a project.
• Tags are much more descriptive of functionality than the name of the memory address.
• Tags are more easily edited, should a change be required.
• Tags can be exported and imported into other MAPware projects, regardless of which HMC unit is
selected.

Tag Types and Addresses (Native Ladder vs. IEC 61131-3)

Tags created by the user are classified into different types which are stored in different memory locations on the
HMC. How these tags appear to the user differs somewhat depending on whether the project is created in
Native Ladder mode or in IEC 61131-3 mode.

In Native Ladder projects, tags are defined with a specific address in the HMC’s memory.
These addresses are grouped into different address spaces according to how a tag defined in
each space is intended to be used. Examples are; D registers (general purpose data registers
for 16 or 32 bit data), B registers (single bit internal registers), SW (S) registers (System tags
that control how the HMC hardware functions). For a complete list and information on each
of the available address spaces refer to MQTT
. In some circumstances IEC 61131-3 tags are assigned specific addresses. For example, retentive registers are
assigned addresses and tags that are intended to be accessed from an external PLC using the HMC as a Modbus
RTU slave can be assigned a Modbus address.

Predefined System Tags

In addition to user-defined tags, the tag database contains tags assigned to internal memory coils (bits) and
registers of the HMC. These internal memory registers have predefined functions (e.g. beeper control, screen
saver timer, RTC settings, etc.) which may be useful in your project. For more information on these predefined
system tags, see Appendix B – System Tag Memory.

101
Creating and Modifying a Tag
To create a new tag and assign it to an internal memory address or PLC address, you must first open the tag
database:
• Click Define > Tag Database from the standard menus or
• Click the Tag Database icon located in the Layout Toolbar or
• Click the Tags folder in the Project Information Window.

The tag database displays:

Each assigned tag in the database has attributes arranged and presented as columns:
• Tag No. – This is the tag number assigned to the tag when created. Tags are assigned in numerical order.
• Tag Name – When you create a tag, you must provide a name for the tag.
• Data Type (IEC 61131-3 projects only) – Defines the type (BOOL, INT, DINT, etc.) of the tag.

102
 • Tag (Native Ladder projects only) – Specifies the size of the tag in bytes (1, 2, 4, or bit). For some system
tags the data may occupy either the high or low byte of a two byte register. If that is the case High or
Low will be specified in this column.
• Tag Address – this is the specific internal memory address or PLC memory address assigned to the tag.
• Port – If the address assigned to the tag comes from one of the external ports (i.e. Com1, Com2,
Ethernet), then the port is shown.
• Node Name – where the tag memory address is located (i.e. internal memory or external connection to
a PLC).
• Tag Category – either Default Tag (predefined tag) or User Defined Tag (programmer defined).
• Export Tag – checkbox to select which tags to export in a Tag Export operation.
To modify the tag database, use the buttons displayed in the Tag Database popup window (see above) or right-
click the Tags folder in the Project Information Window to display a popup dialog box:

Adding a New Tag

27 ► In the Tag Database, perform the following steps to add a new tag:
1. Click the Add button to display the Add Tag dialog box:

2. Node Name: click the list to select the node (i.e. internal memory or PLC communications driver
attached to the COM/Ethernet ports) where the target address is located.
3. Tag Type: options are Register and Coil/Bit Addressed Register. If both options are available then the
memory area selected is interpreted by the HMC as either a data register or a bit.
4. Coil/Register: The first field (Size: 2 bytes, 1 bit, etc.) indicates how much memory is allocated to each
address in this memory range. The enclosed address underneath represents the particular address

103
 targeted after entries are made in the ‘address input’ fields located to the right. Below are some
examples:

HMC internal address

Allen Bradley MicroLogix Address

5. Auto-add: By checking this option, you can quickly add a series of tags based upon a consecutive set of
registers. When used, the Tag Name will have a five digit number appended (ex. 00000, 00001, etc.):

6. Number of Tag: enter the total number of consecutive tags you wish to create when using the Auto-add
feature.
7. Show Error Report: if checked, then the MAPware software displays a Text Only file
(ErrorTag_AutoAddTag.txt) that shows any errors that may have occurred when using the Auto-add

104
 feature:

8. Byte(s): Some memory registers can be configured as a single byte, word, or double-word register:

9. Scope (Global / Retentive / Local) (IEC 61131-3 mode only) – There are three radio buttons that can be
selected to define a tag’s scope:

Global – The tag can be used throughout the project. Tags created as Global can be changed to
Retentive during project development.
Retentive – Same as Global but the value is retained through a power cycle. Tags created as
Retentive can be changed to Global during project development. For more information on this
option refer to the Keep Memory Area and Retentive Tags section.
Local – The tag can only be used in a specific logic block. The Block is selected in the Block Type
dropdown list. Local tags can still be used in application objects such as screens and tasks.
10. Initial Value (IEC 61131-3 projects only) – Specify the default value the tag will have when the project
starts. This option is not available for Strings or Retentive Registers or if Retentive is selected for the
scope (see item 9b above).
11. Block Type (IEC 61131-3 projects only) – Specify the block where a Local tag can be used when the Local
option is chosen as the Scope (see item 9c above).
12. Length (IEC 61131-3 projects only) – Specify the length for a string. Available only when the Register /
Coil Type is set to string.
13. Click the Add button to add the new tag to the tag database. The Add dialog box remains on screen so
that you can create other tags. When you have finished, click the Close button.

Deleting a Tag
28 ► To delete a tag that is in the tag database, simply:
1. Open the tag database.
2. Highlight (click) the tag.

105
 3. Right-click to display a popup dialog box and select Delete:

4. A popup dialog box appears asking if you are sure that you want to delete the tag. Click Yes. Note: all
tags defined as Default Tags are system tags and cannot be deleted.
You can delete multiple tags simultaneously by highlighting one tag in the tag database, and then hold down the
CTRL (or SHIFT) key and clicking other tags.
You also have the option of deleting all user-defined tags in the tag database by clicking Delete All Tags.

106
 Editing a Tag
29 ► To edit a tag:
1. Open the tag database.
2. Highlight the tag.
3. Right-click to display a popup dialog box, and then click Edit:

4. In Edit mode, you can only change the name of the tag and the target address. Any other changes
require that you delete the tag entirely, and then recreate the tag.

Finding Tags
If you have created many tags and have a large database, it may be difficult to locate a particular tag. To help
you locate a tag quickly, right-click anywhere in the tag database to display the popup dialog box:

Click the Find option to display the Find dialog box:

Enter the name of the tag or tag address – MAPware will then search through the database and highlight the
tag.

107
You can also reorder the tag database by clicking any of the column headings. The tags reorder alphabetically
according to the entries in that column.

There is also the option to filter the Tag Database.

Clicking the filter button at the top of the Tag Database opens the filter options.

Tag Usage
This feature allows you to select a tag in the tag database and view where used in your project:

Importing and Exporting Tags

The tag database created in MAPware exports as a CSV (comma-separated value) file. You can edit this file then
import back into MAPware. This provides the following advantages:
• Tag databases can be moved from one project to another without copying the entire project.
• If you wish to modify many tags, this is quickly done by editing a CSV file.
• In some cases, you may be able to import the PLC addresses you use in your external PLC ladder logic
program, thus saving time.

108
30 ► To Export Tags:
1. Open the tag database and right-click to display the popup dialog:

2. Click Export:

3. Node tags – select All to export all nodes (internal memory and tags assigned to all Com ports).
Check Selected to use the checkboxes to filter which nodes you wish to export.
4. Export Tag Types – Check All to export all tags in the program (All System and User defined check boxes
below will become checked).
Check Selected Export Tag List to only export checked tags in the Tag Database.
Check System and Used and/or Unused to export internal system (S and SW register) memory tags in
the tag database.
Check User Defined and Used and/or Unused to export tags created by the programmer.
5. Export to File – For Format, select ASCII or Unicode. For Mode, select Append (add to existing file) or
Overwrite.
6. Click the Export button. The file is created:

Sample Exported Tag Database File in Excel

109
31 ► To Import Tags:
1. Open the tag database and right-click to display the popup dialog:

2. Click Import:

3. Replace tags in case of duplicate tag found – check this box if you wish MAPware to replace a tag name
in the tag database with one of the same name in the imported file.
4. Auto generate tag name in case of duplicate tag name found – checking this box will make MAPware
append a number to the duplicate tag name.
5. Tag Columns – in order to import a CSV file, you must specify where each tag column (i.e. Tag Name, Tag
Address, Node Name, etc.) is located in the CSV file. By default, the columns arrange in the same format
used when exporting the tag database as a CSV file.
6. View error log – if checked, this will display a text file after MAPware000 has finished importing that
shows any errors that have occurred.

110
Chapter 5 – Screens
What is a Screen?
A screen is a predefined collection of objects to be displayed at the same time. A screen is displayed by the press
of a button, function key, or can be called by a request from a PLC.
How many different types of screens are there? In MAPware, you can configure or define a screen to be one of
the following:
• Base Screen – this is the most common type of screen. Simply put, this is a full-sized screen that displays
objects placed onto it. The term ‘full-sized’ varies, of course, depending upon the HMC model selected
and the display size of that model. For example, a base screen for the HMC7043A-M model (4.3”
diagonal screen) is 480x272 pixels. When displayed, a base screen covers the entire area of the display.
• Popup Screen – this is another common type of screen that is used to display a smaller ‘popup’ screen
on top of a base screen. Popup screens allow you to display information or objects only when needed by
the HMC operator. This keeps the HMC interface more intuitive and simpler to use. Because a popup
screen displays on top of a base screen, a popup screen must be smaller than full-size for the display
used.
• Template Screen – This screen is also full-sized but is not called directly by a button or function key on
the HMC. It cannot display using a command from a PLC. A template screen displays by attaching it to a
base screen. When displayed, all objects on the template screen overlay onto the base screen.
• Keypad Screens – there are four pre-defined popup keypad screens: numeric keypad, hex keypad, bit
keypad, and ASCII keypad. These keypads can be used by objects (i.e. Bit Entry, Numeric Entry) to modify
register values.
• Web Screens – (Only available on HMC models with an Ethernet port). This type of screen can be viewed
by connecting to the HMC’s built in web server with an internet browser program. The screen is
displayed in the web browser as if it were a website. Only text based objects and static images are
supported in this type of screen.

Screen Types and Templates

Base Screens
Base screens are full-sized screens that display groups of objects (i.e. Bit Lamps, Buttons, Bar graphs, etc.) on the
HMC display.

How to create a base screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Screen > New Base Screen from the standard menu

111
 Click the New Base Screen icon in the Layout Toolbar.
Right-click the Base Screens folder located in the Project Information Window. A popup dialog box
appears – click New Base Screen.

• The new screen appears in the work area of MAPware and the Screen Properties box displays.

Base Screen Properties

Click anywhere on the screen (but not on any objects that have been placed onto the screen) to display the
Screen Properties box on the right side of the screen.

• Appearance
Background Color – determines the fill or background color of the screen. Click the button to
display the color palette and select a color.
• Design
Name – this is the name assigned to the selected screen. The text entered for the name appears as
the title for the screen in the Projects Information window. By default, the name is simply Screen1,
Screen2, etc. However, you may wish to assign a new name that helps define the purpose of the
screen, (i.e. numeric keypad).
Number – this is the number assigned to the screen. A number assigns to each screen when created.
By default, the number assigned is the next available number in sequence but you can edit this field
to assign a new number. Range is 1 to 49999.
• Screen Properties –
Bookmark – option to assign a bookmark to this screen. For more information on using bookmarks,
see Chapter 2 – Software Tour.

112
Description – Enter text to help describe the purpose of this screen.
 Note: this text is not downloaded to the HMC.
No. of Characters To Print – if this screen is configured to print to a serial printer, this value
determines how many of the characters displayed on the screen will be sent to the serial printer.
 Note: maximum is 1590 characters (using smallest font). If there is more text on the target screen
than the value entered, then only the specified number of characters prints, beginning with text at
the top of the screen.
Password – user can protect access to the selected screen by assigning a numeric password. Range is
0 to 9999 (0 is no password assigned). When password-protected, a request to display the target
screen causes a dialog box to appear, asking user to enter correct password:

If correct, screen displays.

Screen Columns – determines the total number of characters (columns) in each row that print.
Screen Memory Status – this indicates the total amount of memory required (in bytes) for selected
screen. Click the button to display a more detailed description of the memory used:

Screen Print Properties – determines how the screen is to be used when requested:
Display Screen (default) – screen is displayed on the HMC and not sent to a serial printer.
Print Screen – screen data is sent to a serial printer only and is not displayed when requested.
However, a message “Printing in Progress” displays on the HMC and remains until the HMC is
finished sending all text on the screen to the serial printer. Then the prior screen displays.
Print Once and Display Screen – screen is displayed and printed. Please note that the screen
does not appear on the HMC display until the entire text is output to the serial printer. To
shorten the time interval, use the fastest baud rate available for the printer, and reduce the No
Of Characters to Print setting to the minimum required.
 Note: the target screen will print again every time the screen displays.
Screen Type – identifies what type of screen this is (i.e. base, popup, or template).
Wait for PLC Data – if enabled, the HMC does not display the screen until after it has read the
current values of all PLC-related objects. Disable this option if you wish to increase the speed of
screen updates.

113
 • Security Properties
Access Level – Allows an Access Level to be assigned to this screen. Users and Access Levels are
assigned using the Define > Access Level menu option. If a screen is assigned an access level other
than zero, the operator must log in using a valid Username and Password in order to view the
screen. See the Chapter 8 – Security for more information.
• Tasks –
Task List – option to assign tasks to the target screen.
 Note: this method of configuring screen tasks is the same as clicking the Tasks subfolder under
each Screen Name listed in the Screens directory of the Project Information Window. Click the
button to display the Task List for the selected screen:

For more information on tasks, see Chapter 6 – Task Management.

• Templates
Use Template – enable this option to attach one or more template screens to the selected screen
(see Template Screens later in this chapter).
No. Of Templates – determines the total number of template screens assigned to this screen.
Template 1, 2, etc. – choose a template screen from the pull-down box.

Placing Objects onto a Base Screen

Any of the objects described in Chapter 7 – Data & Display Objects can be placed onto a base screen.

Popup Screens
Popup screens are screens that display groups of objects (i.e. Bit Lamps, Buttons, Bar graphs, etc.) on the HMC.
They display on top of base screens and are smaller than the size of the HMC LCD display.
 Note: although you can configure several popup screens to display on a base screen, only one popup screen
displays at a time.

114
How to create a popup screen
• Use one of the following:
Click Screen > New Popup Screen from the standard menu
Click the New Popup Screen icon in the Layout Toolbar.
Right-click the Popup Screens folder located in the Project Information Window. A popup dialog box
appears – click New Popup Screen.
• The new screen appears in the work area of MAPware and the Screen Properties box displays:

Popup Screen Properties

Click anywhere on the screen (but not on any objects that have been placed onto the screen) to display the
Screen Properties box on the right side of the screen.
• Appearance
Background Color – determines the fill or background color of the screen. Click the button to
display the color palette and select a color.
• Design
Name – this is the name assigned to the selected screen. The text entered for the name appears as
the title for the screen in the Projects Information window. By default, the name is simply
Screen65005, Screen65006, etc. However, you may wish to assign a new name that helps define the
purpose of the screen, (i.e. numeric keypad).
Number – this is the number assigned to the screen. A number is automatically assigned to each
screen when created. By default, the number assigned is the next available number in sequence
(starting with 65005), but you can edit this field to assign a new number.
 Note: popup screens must be in the range of 65005-65534.
• Layout
Size – sets the pixel size (width x height) of the popup screen. Default is 237x180 pixels.
Width – the width (in pixels). Range is 30 to 319.
Height – the height (in pixels). Range is 30 to 239.
Top Left – this position indicator places the top left corner of the popup screen in relation to the
base screen when called.

115
 X – Position (in pixels) along the horizontal (X) axis.
 Note: the maximum setting must less than the width of the popup screen and the base
screen + one pixel. For example, if the width of the popup screen is 237 pixels, then the
maximum position along the X-axis is 320 (width of base screen) minus 237 (width of popup) – 1
pixel equals 82 pixels.
Y – Position (in pixels) along the vertical (Y) axis.
 Note: the maximum setting must less than the height of the popup screen and the base
screen + one pixel. For example, if the height of the popup screen is 180 pixels, then the
maximum position along the Y-axis is 240 (height of base screen) minus 180 (height of popup) –
1 pixel equals 59 pixels.
• Screen Properties –
Bookmark – option to assign a bookmark to this screen. For more information on using bookmarks,
see Chapter 2 – Software Tour.
Description – Enter text to help describe the purpose of this screen.
 Note: this text is not downloaded to the HMC.
No. of Characters To Print – if this screen is configured to print to a serial printer, this value
determines how many of the characters displayed on the screen will be sent to the serial printer.
 Note: maximum is 1590 characters (using smallest font). If there is more text on the target screen
than the value entered, then only the specified number of characters prints, beginning with text at
the top of the screen.
Screen Columns – determines the total number of characters (columns) in each row that print.
Screen Memory Status – this indicates the total amount of memory required (in bytes) for selected
screen. Click the button to display a more detailed description of the memory used: (see next
page)

Screen Print Properties – determines how the screen is to be used. For popup screens, this option is
always set to Display Screen.
Screen Type – identifies what type of screen this is (i.e. base, popup, or template).
• Security Properties-
Access Level – Allows an Access Level to be assigned to this screen. Users and Access Levels are
assigned using the Define > Access Level menu option. If a screen is assigned an access level other
than zero, the operator must log in using a valid Username and Password in order to view the
screen. See the Error! Reference source not found. section below.
• Tasks –
Task List – option to assign tasks to the target screen. Click the button to display the Task List for
the selected screen:

116
 For more information on tasks, see Chapter 6 – Task Management.

Placing Objects onto a Popup Screen

Any of the objects described in Chapter 7 – Data & Display Objects can be placed onto a popup screen with the
exception of the Bit Entry and Numeric Entry objects.

Template Screens
Template screens are screens that overlay onto base screens. Template screens are used for two primary
reasons:
• To conserve project memory – If you have a project that requires the same objects (like a Text box or
Company Logo picture) to be displayed on multiple screens, place these objects on a template screen.
This reduces the amount of memory required to display these objects.
• To save time and cost of updating projects – If some objects in a project are shared in a number of
screens, using a template reduces the amount of time required to make changes to these common
objects.

How to create a template screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Screen > New Template Screen from the standard menu
Click the New Template Screen icon in the Layout Toolbar.
Right-click the Templates folder located in the Project Information Window. A popup dialog box
appears – click New Template Screen.

117
 • The new screen appears in the work area of MAPware and the Template Screen Properties box displays:

Template Screen Properties

Click anywhere on the screen (but not on any objects that have been placed onto the screen) to display the
Template Screen Properties box on the right side of the screen.
• Design
Name – this is the name assigned to the selected screen. The text entered for the name appears as
the title for the screen in the Projects Information window. By default, the name is simply
Template1, Template2, etc. However, you may wish to assign a new name that helps define the
purpose of the screen, (i.e. company logo).
Number – this is the number assigned to the screen. A number assigns to each screen when created.
By default, the number assigned is the next available number in sequence (starting with 1), but you
can edit this field to assign a new number.
 Note: template screens must be in the range of 10.
• Screen Properties
Screen Type – identifies what type of screen this is (i.e. base, popup, or template).

Placing Objects onto a Template Screen

Any of the objects described in Chapter 7 – Data & Display Objects can be placed onto a base screen.

Applying a template screen

After you have created your template screens, you must then assign the templates to base screens. Then when a
base screen is displayed on the HMC display, the assigned template screens will show as well.

118
To assign a template screen to a base screen, click Screen > Apply Template Screens from the standard menus:

The table is a list of all base screens created in the project (each row corresponds to a base screen). Ten columns
represent the Template screens (maximum of ten template screens can be created). To assign a particular
template screen to a base screen, simply check the appropriate template.
 Note that the Preview screen indicates how the template screens overlay onto the selected base screen.
Another method of assigning template screens to a base screen is to display the base screen and assign the
template using the Templates attribute listed in the Screen Properties dialog box:

Web Screens (Ethernet Models Only)

Web screens can be viewed through a web browser connected to the HMC’s web server, allowing remote access
to HMC data from a remote computer on the Ethernet network or, if exposed to the internet, from anywhere in
the world. Web screens allow the remote user to both view and modify data in the HMC. The objects used on
web screens are restricted to text based data display / input objects, static images and navigation buttons. The
following objects are available for use on web screens:

119
Icon Command Description
Bit Display Represent the state of a bit in a text format (1 for On, 0 for Off).
Numeric Display Displays a number stored in a data register.
Bit Entry Use this object to change the state of a bit (1 for On, 0 for Off).
Set Bit Use this object to latch a bit on

Reset Bit Use this object to latch a bit off

Momentary Bit Use this object to set a bit when the object is actuated and reset the bit when
the object is released
Toggle Bit Use this object to toggle the status of a bit (set when pressed once; reset
when pressed again)
Write Value to Tag Use this object to write a constant value to a tag

Add Value to Tag Use this object to add a constant value to a tag

Subtract Value from Use this object to subtract a constant value from a tag
Tag
Add Tag B to Tag A Use this object to add the value of Tag B to Tag A

Subtract Tag B from Use this object to subtract the value of Tag B from Tag A
Tag A
Numeric Entry Allows numeric entry to a targeted data register.
Multilingual Text Create a text box using Windows TrueType fonts.
 Note: the browser must be able to display the selected font, otherwise a
default font is displayed.
Picture Object Display a JPG, BMP, or GIF picture using either predefined libraries or your
own custom image.
Go To Screen Allows the remote user to navigate to other web screens.
Go To Next Screen Allows the remote user to navigate to the sequentially next web screen

Go to Previous Screen Allows the remote user to navigate to the previous web screen

120
Enabling the Webserver
Before a web screen can be created the web server must be enabled and configured. To do this click Tools >
Web Server Configuration, and check the checkbox to enable the web server:

Once enabled, several fields are activated allowing the web server to be configured:
• Username / Password – A username and password are required. The remote operator will be prompted
to enter these credentials before they can view the web screens in their browser. Both Username and
Password can be up to 14 characters and can contain alpha numeric characters as well as; ‘*’, ‘-’, ‘_’ and
‘.’ characters.
• Header – If enabled, the text entered here will be displayed in the browser window as banner with white
text on a blue background.

• Show Navigation – If enabled, a navigation bar will appear in the browser to the left of the active web
screen with links to all of the web screens in the project. The operator can click any of the screens listed
to go directly to that screen.

121
 • Show Border – If enabled, a border will appear around the web screens.
Ethernet Settings – This button is a shortcut to the Ethernet Settings tab on the Project Configuration window.
The IP address entered here is the address the remote user will point their browser to in order to view the
screens. See the Error! Reference source not found. section in Chapter 2 – Software Tour for more information.

Creating Web screens

Once the web server is enabled, as described above, a Web screens folder will appear in the Project Information
Window.

In this folder a default web screen will be created. The default screen name will appear in blue indicating that
this is the first screen displayed when the user connects the web server. To create additional web screens simply
right click the Web screens folder and select New Web Screen from the context menu:

Once there are multiple web screens, a different web screen can be designated as the default screen by right
clicking the screen name in the Project Information Window and selecting Set as Default screen from the
context menu.
The process for adding objects to a web screen is the same as adding objects to a base screen. Only objects
available for use on web screens will be selectable. There are some differences in how the objects behave on a
web screen as opposed to on a base screen:
• Input objects used on web screens will not have a keypad associated with them, instead the browser will
have an input method that can be used to enter data. For example, on a desktop, the remote user can
click a numeric input object with their mouse then enter data with a keyboard, pressing enter on the
keyboard writes the data to the HMC.
• Not all properties are available on web screens
• A font selected for an object on a web screen must be present on the browser; otherwise the browser
will use a default font to display the object.
• GoTo buttons can only be used to go to another web screen. Popup screens are not allowed.

122
 • External PLC tags cannot be used on a web screen.
• A maximum of 100 tags can be used per web screen.
• A maximum of 100 web screens can be configured per project.
Once the web screens are created, download the application to the HMC. If the Ethernet settings have been
changed, don’t forget to check the Ethernet Settings checkbox in the download window.

Connecting to Web Screens with an Internet Browser

Once the screens have been created and downloaded to the HMC, the next step is to connect to the web
screens with an internet browser. If the computer running the browser is on the same Local Area Network (LAN)
as the HMC, simply enter the IP address assigned to the HMC in the web browser’s address bar:

A prompt will appear to enter the Username and password configured for the web server:

Once that is entered click the Sign in button to display the default web screen:

 The following notes apply to web screens:

• A maximum of 10 users can connect to a single HMC’s web server.
• TCP port 80 is used to serve the web screens.
• Web screens have a refresh time of one second.

123
Connecting from the Internet
If the browser used to connect to the HMC is not on the same Local Area Network as the HMC it will be
necessary to expose the HMC’s web server to the Internet. Typically this is done by opening port 80 in the router
or by forwarding port 80 to the HMC’s IP address by adding an entry in the port forwarding table in the router.
On the Ethernet Settings tab of the Project Configuration window set the default gateway to the router’s private
IP address. Once the router is configured, connect to the HMC sever by entering the router’s public IP address in
the web browser address bar.
 Network set up issues are beyond the scope of this manual. Contact a networking specialist for further
information.

Modifying screens

Navigating Screens
The easiest way to navigate to a screen is to select it from the Screens folder in the Project Information
Window:

124
Another method is to click Window > List of Open Screens from the standard menu:

If you have many screens and you wish to work on a subset of screens, then the bookmark feature may be
useful. Bookmarks provide a means to switch quickly from one screen to another. For information on how to use
bookmarks, see Chapter 2 – Software Tour.

Viewing multiple screens

You may wish to look at several screens at a time in the workspace area of the MAPware software. To do this,
click Window > Tile Horizontally (Vertically):

 Note: click the Close All option in Windows to close all open screens.

125
 Deleting a screen
Select one of three methods to delete a screen. Display the screen in the work area of MAPware:
• Click Screen > Delete from the standard menu.
• Click the Delete Screen icon in the Screen Toolbar.
• Right-click the Screen name listed in the Project Information Window, then click Delete.

Duplicating a screen
Select one of two methods to duplicate a screen. Display the screen in the work area of MAPware:
• Click Screen > Duplicate from the standard menu.
• Right-click the Screen name listed in the Project Information Window, then click Duplicate.

Renaming a screen
Select one of two methods to rename a screen. Display the screen in the work area of MAPware:
• Click any area of the screen to display the Screen Properties dialog box, and then enter a new name
under the Design > Name attribute.
• Right-click the Screen name listed in the Project Information Window, then click Rename.

Importing a screen
Full size screens and popup screens can be imported from an existing project, provided that the screen size in
the source project is the same as the screen size of the destination project.
32 ► To import a screen:
1. Click Screen > Import Screen from the menu bar.
2. An open file dialog window will be displayed. Browse to the source project file (.mpl) and click open.
3. A preview window is displayed allowing you to browse through the available windows and select the
desired window(s) to import.

126
 Multiple windows can be imported by holding down the Control key and clicking the windows in the
Import Screen List.
4. Select the tags you would like to import with the screen(s).
5. Click the Import button, the selected screens will be added to the Screens folder in the project tree. The
screen will retain the screen number from the source project unless a screen with that number already
exists in the destination project.

127
Chapter 6 – Task Management
What is a Task?
An integral part of the MAPware software is the ability to create tasks. Tasks are specifically predefined actions
taken by the controller such as writing a value to a tag register, displaying a new screen, turning a bit on/off, etc.
The number of tasks is limited only by the total amount of memory available in the controller. Each task has two
fundamental components: the action taken when the task activates and the triggering mechanism that starts
the action.
Tasks can be activated from the following sources in MAPware:
• Quick Button keys – all of the quick button keys (i.e. Go to Screen, Set Bit, Write Value to Tag, etc.) are,
in fact, designed to implement a simple task. For example, the Go to Screen button key, when pressed,
executes the GotoScreen task.
• Touchscreen button keys – in addition to the quick button keys, there are two ‘specially designed’
advanced button keys that can perform multiple tasks: the Multi-Task Single-State button and the
Multi-Task Multi-State button . Button tasks are further split into three types:
Press tasks: task(s) execute each time the button is pressed by the operator. It does not matter if the
button is pressed and released or pressed and held down, the associated task(s) will execute only
once per button press.
Pressed tasks: task(s) continuously execute while the associated button is held down. With this
option, the HMC will repeatedly send the command(s) until the button is released.
Released tasks: task(s) execute when the operator releases the pressed button.
 Note that the associated task only executes once per button release.
 Note: see Chapter 7 – Data & Display Objects for more information on these buttons.
• Screen Tasks – these are tasks that are ‘tagged’ to a particular screen. Therefore, screen tasks execute
when the screen displays. There are three types of screen tasks:
‘Before showing Screen’: task executes before the tagged screen is displays
‘While showing Screen’: task executes continuously while the tagged screen displays
‘After Hiding Screen’: task executes immediately after the tagged screen is closed
• Global Task – these tasks execute continuously while HMC is on. Tasks are ‘global’ meaning that it does
not depend on any particular screen to display.
• Power-on Task – tasks that execute once during initial power-up of the HMC.
Membrane key tasks – tasks attached to one or more of the membrane-style keys. Key tasks can be assigned
globally (task is executed no matter what screen is currently displayed) or by screen. See
• Chapter 11 – Miscellaneous Features for more information on Membrane Function Keys.

Task List
Over fifty actions can be performed by a task. The tables below provides a list of all tasks available and a brief
description.

128
 Task Action Description
Add a Constant Value to Add a constant value to the current value residing in an internal HMC or external
a Tag PLC tag
Add Tag B to Tag A Add a value residing in the Tag B register to the current value residing in the Tag A
register
Copy HMI Block to Copies the values in a block of continuous registers beginning with the Tag B
HMI/PLC Block register to the block of registers designated with the Tag A register
Copy HMI/PLC Block to Copies the values in a block of continuous registers beginning with the Tag B
HMI Block register to the block of registers designated with the Tag A register
Copy RTC to PLC Block Copies the real-time clock (RTC) data in the HMC to a consecutive set of 16-bit
registers (using BCD format) in the PLC beginning with the target tag
Copy Tag B to Tag A Copies a value residing in the Tag B register to the target Tag A register
Copy Tag to LED Controls the Function Key LEDS
Delay Any tasks in the list that are after this task will not be executed until the delay
time has expired
Go to Popup Screen Displays a popup screen
Go To Screen Displays a new screen
Previous Screen Displays the prior screen (in numerical order)
Next Screen Displays the next screen (in numerical order)
Print Data Prints the displayed screen (to a connected serial printer)
Set RTC Change a set value (i.e. year, month, day, etc.) of the internal real-time clock of
the controller
Swap Tag A and Tag B Swaps (exchanges) the values residing in the Tag A register and the Tag B register
Switch Screen From Tag Displays a base screen according to the value in a targeted tag
Subtract a Constant Subtract a constant value from the current value residing in an internal HMC or
Value from a Tag external PLC tag
Subtract Tag B from Tag Subtract a value residing in the Tag B register to the current value residing in the
A Tag A register
Toggle Bit Toggles (turn off/on) an internal HMC or external PLC tag coil/bit
Turn Bit ON Set (turn on) an internal HMC or external PLC tag coil/bit
Turn Bit OFF Clear (turn off) an internal HMC or external PLC tag coil/bit
USB Data Log Upload Copies (uploads) a series of data registers into a USB Flash Drive
Wait While Any tasks in the list that are after this task will not be executed until this condition
is true
Write Value to Tag Write a constant value to an internal HMC or external PLC tag
Key Specific Tasks Tasks that can only be executed using an Advanced Bit or Word button on screen.
See next table for a detailed list.

Key Specific Tasks: Description

Clear Data Entry Clears value displayed in Data Entry window of keypad
Cancel Data Entry Restores the original value in the Data Entry window of keypad and
discontinues entry
Accept Data Entry Writes the value displayed in Data Entry window of keypad to target register
Switch to Next Data Entry Moves to next Bit/Register Entry object according to Object ID number
Switch to Previous Data Moves to prior Bit/Register Entry object according to Object ID number
Entry

129
Increase Value by 1 Adds +1 to the existing value
Decrease Value by 1 Subtracts from the existing value
Increase Digit by 1 Adds +1 to the highlighted digit of existing value. If highest digit value already
shown, then cycles back to lowest digit value
Decrease Digit by 1 Subtracts from the highlighted digit of existing value. If lowest digit value
already shown, then cycles back to highest digit value
Shift Value to Left Shifts value one digit to the left (same as multiplying by 10)
Move Cursor to Left Shifts focus cursor one digit to the right
Move Cursor to Right Shifts focus cursor one digit to the right
Sign Key (+/-) Toggles signed value
Sign Key (+/-) and 0 Toggles signed value when pressed once. Changes to 0 when pressed again
Numeric keys 0-9 and A-F Enters specified numeral into entry field
Edit Bit On Changes Bit Entry value to 1
Edit Bit Off Changes Bit Entry value to 0
Acknowledge Alarm Acknowledges the top-Most alarm displayed
Acknowledge All Alarms Acknowledges all currently active alarms
Previous Alarm Move all alarms down one line in the list of alarms
Next Alarm Move all alarms up one line in the list of alarms
Previous Historical Alarm Move all alarms down one line in the list of historic alarms
Next Historical Alarm Move all alarms up one line in the list of historic alarms
Refresh All Trends The Historical Trend graph is updated when this task is executed
Start Logger for all Groups Begins logging data as specified in Data Logger for all groups
Stop Logger for all Groups Discontinues logging data as specified in Data Logger for all groups
Start Logger of Group # Begins logging data as specified by Data Logger group number
Stop Logger of Group # Discontinues logging data as specified by Data Logger group number
Clear Log Memory Clears all data collected in HMC memory by the Data Logger
Move to Latest Historical Move to the last recorded alarm in the list of historic alarms
Alarm
Key Specific Tasks: Description
Move to Oldest Historical Move to the oldest recorded alarm in the list of historic alarms
Alarm
Move to Latest Alarm Move to the last recorded alarm in the list of active alarms
Move to Oldest Alarm Move to the oldest recorded alarm in the list of active alarms
Start Printing of Group # Begins printout of data as specified by Data Logger group number
Stop Printing of Group # Discontinues printout of data as specified by Data Logger group number
Clear Historical Alarm Clears out all alarms listed in the Historic Alarm list
Memory
Show Ethernet Displays a predefined window that allows the user to change Ethernet settings
Configuration Screen during runtime.
Copy Screen Data to USB Copy data to the attached USB drive.
Copy Screen Data to SD Card Copy data to the attached SD card.
Show Login Screen Displays a user login screen to enable Screen Access Levels.
Log Out Logs out the current user.
Change Password Allows the current user to change their password. Password changes are not
retained through power cycle.

130
 Start External Logger for All Begins logging data as specified in Data Logger for all external groups
Groups
Stop External Logger for All Discontinues logging data as specified in Data Logger for all external groups
Groups
Start External Logger of Begins logging data as specified by Data Logger external group number
Group #
Stop External Logger of Discontinues logging data as specified by Data Logger external group number
Group #

Execution Table
Not all tasks are available for each method of execution (i.e. global vs. power-on, etc.) as some tasks are not
suitable in some circumstances. Below is a table that indicates which tasks are available for each method of
execution: (see next page)

131
 Task Description Touchscreen Buttons/ Screen Tasks Power- Global
Membrane Keys On
Press/ Pressed Before /After While
Released Tasks Screen Tasks Showing
Tasks Screen Tasks
Go To Screen x x x
Previous Screen x x
Next Screen x x
Switch Screen From Tag x x x x
Go to Popup Screen x
(Touchscreen models
only)
Write Value to Tag x x x x x x
Add a Constant Value to a x x x x x x
Tag
Subtract a Constant Value x x x x x x
from a Tag
Add Tag B to Tag A x x x x x x
Subtract Tag B from Tag A x x x x x x
Turn Bit ON x x x x x
Turn Bit OFF x x x x x
Toggle Bit x x x x x
Copy Tag B to Tag A x x x x x x
Swap Tag A and Tag B x x x x x
Print Data x
Set RTC x
Copy Tag to LED (models x x x x x
w/ membrane keys only)
Copy HMI Block to x x x x x x
HMI/PLC Block
Copy HMI/PLC Block to x x x x x x
HMI Block
Copy RTC to PLC Block x
USB Data Log Upload x x x x x x
Wait While x
Delay x
Key Specific Tasks x x

Task Descriptions
Add a Constant Value to a Tag
Description: Add a constant value to the current value residing in an internal HMC or external PLC tag .
Parameters:
• Tag – target address
• Number – constant value added to the target tag when the task executes.
• Type – format (Unsigned, Signed, Hexadecimal, BCD, Binary, or Float) of data.

132
Add Tag B to Tag A
Description: Add a value residing in the Tag B register to the current value residing in the Tag A register.
Parameters:
• Tag A: destination address
• Tag B: source address

Copy HMI Block to HMI/PLC Block

Description: Copies the values in a block of continuous registers beginning with the Tag B register to the block of
registers designated with the Tag A register.
Parameters:
• Tag A: destination location of values. Can be either internal memory or a block of PLC registers
• Tag B: source location of values. Must be internal memory
• Number of words: This is the total number of consecutive registers copied.
• Enable Control: Allows tags to control this task.
 Note: this option is only available if configuring a global task or a “while showing” screen task. Only
internal HMC tags are used.
Enable: if ON, allows task to be executed
Done: HMC sets this coil after completion of task
Error: HMC sets this coil if error performing task

Copy HMI/PLC Block to HMI Block

Description: Copies the values in a block of continuous registers beginning with the Tag B register to the block of
registers designated with the Tag A register.
Parameters:
• Tag A: destination location of values. Must be internal memory
• Tag B: source location of values. Can be either internal memory or a block of PLC registers
• Number of words: This is the total number of consecutive registers copied.
• Enable Control: Allows tags to control this task.
 Note: this option is only available if configuring a global task or a “while showing” screen task. Only
internal HMC tags are used.
Enable: if ON, allows task to be executed
Done: HMC sets this coil after completion of task
Error: HMC sets this coil if error performing task

Copy RTC to PLC Block

Description: Copies the real-time clock (RTC) data in the HMC to a consecutive set of 16-bit registers (using BCD
format) in the PLC beginning with the target tag.
Parameters:
• First PLC Tag – target location that is used to write RTC values as follows:
Address 0 (Specified by First PLC Tag): Hour (hh) – range 0 to 23
Address +1: Minute (mm) – range 0 to 59
Address +2: Seconds (ss) – range 0 to 59
Address +3: Day of Month (DD) – range 1 to 31
Address +4: Month (MM) – range 1 to 12

133
 Address +5: Year (YY) – range 0 to 99
Address +6: Day of Week (DY) – range 1-7 with 1=Sunday,…, 7=Saturday
• Enable Control – Allows tags to control this task.
 Note: this option is only available if configuring a global task or a “while showing” screen task. Only
internal HMC tags can be used.
Enable – if ON, allows task to be executed
Done – HMC sets this coil after successful completion of task. Coil clears (reset) the next time the
task executes.
Error – HMC sets this coil if error occurs during performance of task. Coil clears (reset) the next time
the task executes.

Copy Tag B to Tag A

Description: Copies a value residing in the Tag B register to the target Tag A register.
Parameters:
• Tag A: this is the destination address
• Tag B: this is the source address
• Enable Control: Allows tags to control this task.
 Note: this option is only available if configuring a global task or a “while showing” screen task. Only
Internal HMC tags are used.
Enable: if ON, allows task to be executed
Done: HMC sets this coil after completion of task
Error: HMC sets this coil if error performing task

Copy Tag to LED

Description: Controls the Function Key LEDS. Use an 8-bit register to turn on/off the LEDS. Each bit in the tagged
register controls an LED. The least significant bit (Bit 0) controls F1 LED, and so on.
Parameters:
• Tag: target location that is read to determine LED position.

Delay
Description: Any tasks in the list that are after this task will not be executed until the delay time has expired.
Parameters:
• Delay: the constant value (in seconds) used to determine the delay time. Maximum value is 3600
seconds.
• Unit: always in seconds.

Go to Popup Screen
Description: Displays targeted popup screen.
Parameters:
• Popup Screen Number: Target popup screen to display
• Popup Screen Name: Assigned name of popup screen

Go to Screen
Description: Displays targeted base screen.
Parameters:

134
 • Screen Number: Target base screen to display
• Screen Name: Assigned name of base screen

Print Data
Description: Prints the displayed screen (to a connected serial printer).

Set RTC
Description: Change a set value (i.e. year, month, day, etc.) of the internal real-time clock of the HMC. This is
done by configuring the key to increment or decrement the current value by 1 whenever the key is pressed.
Parameters:
• Real Time Clock Settings:
Increment: add +1 to the current value
Decrement: subtract from the current value
• Options:
Year – range 0 to 99
Month – range 1 to 12
Date {Day of Month} – range 1 to 31
Hour – range 0 to 23
Minute – range 0 to 59
Seconds – range 0 to 59
Day of Week – range 1-7 with 1=Sunday,…, 7=Saturday

Subtract a Constant Value from a Tag

Description: Subtract a constant value from the current value residing in an internal HMC or external PLC tag.
Parameters:
• Tag: this is the target address
• Number: constant value to subtract from the target tag when the task is executed.
• Type: format (Unsigned, Signed, Hexadecimal, BCD, Binary, or Float) of data

Subtract Tag B from Tag A

Description: Subtract a value residing in the Tag B register to the current value residing in the Tag A register.
Parameters:
• Tag A: this is the destination address
• Tag B: this is the source address

Swap Tag A and Tag B

Description: Swaps (exchanges) the values residing in the Tag A register and the Tag B register.
Parameters:
• Tag A: target location for Tag B value
• Tag B: target location for Tag A value

Switch Screen from Tag

Description: Displays a new screen based upon the value in the Tag register. The requested screen must be a
base screen. If the number in the tag register does not represent a valid screen, an error message displays on
the HMC screen.
Parameters:

135
 • Tag: target location that is read to determine screen

Toggle Bit
Description: Toggles (turn off/on) an internal HMC or external PLC tag coil/bit.
Parameters:
• Tag: this is the target address

Turn Bit ON
Description: Set (turn on) an internal HMC or external PLC tag coil/bit.
Parameters:
• Tag: this is the target address
• Enable Control: Allows tags to control this task.
 Note: this option is only available if configuring a global task or a “while showing” screen task. Only
internal HMC tags are used.
Enable: if ON, allows task to be executed
Done: HMC sets this coil after completion of task
Error: HMC sets this coil if error performing task

Turn Bit OFF

Description: Clear (turn off) an internal HMC or external PLC tag coil/bit.
Parameters:
• Tag: this is the target address
• Enable Control: Allows tags to control this task
 Note: this option is only available if configuring a global task or a “while showing” screen task. Only
internal HMC tags are used.
Enable: if ON, allows task to be executed
Done: HMC sets this coil after completion of task
Error: HMC sets this coil if error performing task

USB Data Log Upload

Description: Copies (uploads) a series of data registers into a USB Flash Drive
Parameters:
• DateTime: 16-bit register that is used to record the date and time
• Group: 16-bit register used to record group data
• Start Register For File Name or Filename option
• File Name
• Status Register

Wait While
Description: Any tasks in the list that are after this task do not execute until this condition is true.
Parameters:
• Tag: Register that is continuously monitored to see if the condition is met
• Operation: the operation performed to determine if the condition is met. Options are:
Equal to (==)
Not Equal to (!=)

136
 Less than (<)
Less than or equal to (<=)
Greater than (>)
Greater than or equal to (>=)
• Operand Type: option compares the value in the target tag address with another address (Operand) or a
constant value.
Tag – select another tag address for the operand
Number – use a constant value when comparing to Tag address
• Operand: this is the Operand Tag address or the constant value
Type: if Number is selected for Operand Type, select what format type is used. Options are
Unsigned, Signed, Hexadecimal, BCD, or Float (for 32-bit registers)

Write Value to Tag

Description: Write a constant value to an internal HMC or external PLC tag .
Parameters:
• Tag: this is the target address
• Number: constant value placed into the target tag when the task executes.
• Type: format (Unsigned, Signed, Hexadecimal, BCD, Binary, or Float) of data
• Enable Control: Allows tags to control this task
 Note: this option is only available if configuring a global task or a “while showing” screen task Only
internal HMC tags are used.
Enable: if ON, allows task to be executed
Done: HMC sets this coil after completion of task
Error: HMC sets this coil if error performing task

Key Specific Tasks

Description: tasks execute using a membrane function key or the Multi-State Single-Task or Multi-State Multi-
Task buttons on screen.
Parameters:
• Clear Data Entry: Clears value displayed in Data Entry window of keypad.
• Cancel Data Entry: Restores the original value in the Data Entry window of keypad and discontinues
entry.
• Accept Data Entry: Writes the value displayed in Data Entry window of keypad to target register.
• Switch to Next Data Entry: Moves to next Bit/Register Entry object according to Object ID number.
• Switch to Previous Data Entry: Moves to prior Bit/Register Entry object according to Object ID number.
• Increase Value by 1: Adds +1 to the existing value.
• Decrease Value by 1: Subtracts from the existing value.
• Increase Digit by 1: Adds +1 to the highlighted digit of existing value. If the highest digit value is shown,
then cycles back to lowest digit value.
• Decrease Digit by 1: Subtracts from the highlighted digit of existing value. If the lowest digit value is
shown, then cycles back to highest digit value.
• Shift Value to Left: Shifts value one digit to the left (same as multiplying by 10).
• Move Cursor to Left: Shifts focus cursor one digit to the right.
• Move Cursor to Right: Shifts focus cursor one digit to the right.
• Sign Key (+/-): Toggles signed value.

137
• Sign Key (+/-) and 0: Toggles signed value, and then enters 0.
• Numeric keys 0-9 and A-F: Enters designated digit.
• Edit Bit On: Changes Bit Entry value to 1.
• Edit Bit Off: Changes Bit Entry value to 0.
• Acknowledge Alarm: Acknowledges the top-Most alarm displayed.
• Acknowledge All Alarms: Acknowledges all currently active alarms.
• Previous Alarms: Move all alarms down one line in the list of alarms.
• Next Alarm: Move all alarms up one line in the list of alarms.
• Previous Historical Alarm: Move all alarms down one line in the list of historic alarms.
• Next Historical Alarm: Move all alarms up one line in the list of historic alarms.
• Refresh All Trends: The Historical Trend graph is updated when this task is executed.
• Start Logger for all Groups: Begins logging data as specified in Data Logger for all groups.
• Stop Logger for all Groups: Discontinues logging data as specified in Data Logger for all groups.
• Start Logger of Group #: Begins logging data as specified by Data Logger group number.
• Stop Logger of Group #: Discontinues logging data as specified by Data Logger group number.
• Clear Log Memory: Clears all data collected in HMC memory by the Data Logger.
• Move to Latest Historical Alarm: Move to the last recorded alarm in the list of historic alarms.
• Move to Oldest Historical Alarm: Move to the oldest recorded alarm in the list of historic alarms.
• Move to latest Alarm: Move to the last recorded alarm in the list of active alarms.
• Move to oldest Alarm: Move to the oldest recorded alarm in the list of active alarms.
• Start Printing of Group #: Begins printout of data as specified by Data Logger group number.
• Stop Printing of Group #: Discontinues printout of data as specified by Data Logger group number.
• Clear Historical Alarm Memory: Clears out all alarms listed in the Historic Alarm list.
• Show Ethernet Configuration Screen: Displays a predefined window that allows the user to change
Ethernet settings during runtime.
• Copy Screen Data to USB: Copy data to the attached USB drive.
• Copy Screen Data to SD Card: Copy data to the attached SD card.
• Show Login Screen: Displays a user login screen to enable Screen Access Levels.
• Log Out: Logs out the current user.
• Change Password: Allows the current user to change their password. Password changes are not retained
through power cycle.
• Start External Logger for All Groups: Begins logging data as specified in Data Logger for all external
groups.
• Stop External Logger for All Groups: Discontinues logging data as specified in Data Logger for all external
groups
• Start External Logger of Group #: Begins logging data as specified by Data Logger external group number.
• Stop External Logger of Group #: Discontinues logging data as specified by Data Logger external group
number.

138
Assigning Tasks

• To assign Global or Power-On Tasks, click the Tasks folder in the Project Information Window. Power On
Tasks are executed one time when the HMC first powers up. Global Tasks are executed continuously
while the HMC is running

Notice there is a default Power On task that tells the HMC which screen to display first.

• To assign a Screen Task, click the Tasks subfolder located under the screen you wish to assign a task to.

A summary of the number of assigned tasks for that screen shows across the top.

• To assign a touchscreen button task, see Chapter 7 – Data & Display Objects for more information.
• To assign a membrane function key task, see
• Chapter 11 – Miscellaneous Features for more information.

139
33 ► Creating a Task
1. Tasks: Before you select which task you would like to execute(see Select Task below), you must click the
radio button for when you would like the task to execute. Options are Power-On and Global in the global
task folder, Before, While and After for screen tasks, and Press, Pressed, and Released for the button
and function key tasks.

Global Tasks Folder Screen Tasks Button/Key Tasks

2. Select Task: Click the drop-down menu to select one of the tasks available (see descriptions earlier in
this chapter for more information on what each task does). If additional parameters are required for the
selected task, they will appear in the area below. Enter the required additional parameters.

140
 3. Click the Add button. The task is entered into the selected tasks action.

► Modifying a Task
4. To change the parameters for an existing task, highlight the task you wish to modify. The Update button
becomes active.

141
 5. Change your parameter to the desired option and click Update.

► Deleting a Task

6. To delete a task, highlight the task you wish to delete and click the button. A popup dialog box
appears, asking if you want to remove the task.

► Task Order of Operation

You can create multiple tasks for each key action. During operation, the HMC executes the list of tasks from top
to bottom, in the order that they appear. There is no limit to the number of tasks you can add, (except for the
overall memory limit of the HMC).

142
7. If you wish to reorder the tasks listed, simply use the up/down arrows to rearrange the order:

143
Chapter 7 – Data & Display Objects
What is an Object?
Screens and tags, as described in the previous chapters, are not useful in and of themselves. Tags contain data
that represent machine operation, but without a means of interacting with this data there is no way for an
operator to understand or control what the machine is doing. This chapter explores the various graphic objects a
programmer can place on HMC screens, exposing program data to the operator, and fulfilling the Human
Machine Interface function of the HMC.

Object List
The table below lists all of the objects that can be placed on a screen. Properties available for each object are
indicated by letters which refer to the property list in the next section. Information specific to each object is
given in the sections that follow. For clarity, objects used to display alarm data are detailed in Chapter 9 –
Alarms, and trending objects are detailed in Chapter 10 – Data Logger and Trending.
Icon Name Description Properties
Line Straight line of varying angle, length and color A,B,C,D,E,S,T

Rectangle Rectangle of varying size and color A,B,C,D,E,F,S,T

Ellipse Ellipse of varying size and color A,B,C,D,E,F,S,T

Round Rectangle Rectangle of varying size and color with rounded edges A,B,C,D,E,F,S,T

Picture Object .bmp, .jpg, .gif image using either predefined libraries C,S,T
or custom image
Simple Text Single line of static text using predefined system fonts A,B,C,D,F,G,K,S,T
and various colors
Multilingual Text Multi-Line static text using either predefined system C,D,F,G,I,J,K,S,T
fonts or Windows TrueType fonts in various colors
Time Time of day according to the HMC’s RTC A,B,C,D,F,I,S,T

Date Date according to the HMC’s RTC A,B,C,D,F,I,S,T

Goto Screen Button that will change the screen displayed on the J,L,M,N,O,S,T
HMC
Goto Next Screen Button that will change the screen displayed on the J,L,M,N,O,S,T
HMC to the next screen according to screen number
Goto Previous Button that will change the screen displayed on the J,L,M,N,O,S,T
Screen HMC to the previous screen according to screen
number
Open Popup Button that will open a popup screen on the current J,L,M,N,O,S,T
Screen screen
Bit Lamp Display one of two images selected by the state of a bit G,H,J,L,M,Q,S,T

Bit Display Display one of two predefined messages determined A,B,C,D,F,G,I,K,Q,S,T

by the state of a bit

144
 Set Bit Button that turns a bit ON when pressed J,L,M,N,O,Q,S,T

Reset Bit Button that turns a bit OFF when pressed J,L,M,N,O,Q,S,T

Momentary Bit Button that sets a bit when pressed and resets the bit C,J,L,M,N,O,T
when released
Toggle Bit Button that toggles (inverts) the state of a bit J,L,M,N,O,Q,S,T

Bit Entry Change the state (On or Off) of a bit using a keypad to F,G,I,K,P,Q,S,T
enter a 1 or a 0
Word Lamp Graphic display that is controlled by the value in a data G,H,J,S,T
register
Numeric Display Display a number stored in a data register A,B,C,D,F,G,I,K,P,Q,S,T

Message Display Displays predefined text for multiple states depending A,B,C,D,F,G,I,K,P,Q,S,T
upon the current value in a data register
Write Value to Tag Write a predefined value to the target tag when the J,L,M,N,O,P,Q,S,T
button is pressed
Add Value to Tag Add a predefined constant value to the target tag J,L,M,N,O,P,Q,S,T
whenever the button is pressed
Subtract Value Subtract a predefined constant value from the target J,L,M,N,O,P,Q,S,T
from Tag tag whenever the button is pressed
Add Tag B to Tag A The value in tag A is increased by the value in tag B J,L,M,N,O,R,S,T
when this button is pressed
Subtract Tag B The value in tag A is decreased by the value in tag B J,L,M,N,O,R,S,T
from Tag A when this button is pressed
Numeric Entry Enter data into internal HMC or external PLC tags F,G,I,K,P,Q,S,T
through a keypad / Display the current value
Numeric Keypad Place a keypad on the screen that can be used to enter F,H,J,S,T
numeric data in input objects
ASCII Keypad Place a keypad on the screen that can be used to enter F,H,J,S,T
alpha numeric data into input objects
Icon Name Description Properties
Custom Keypad Place a keypad on the screen that can be customized F,H,J,S,T
to suit specific input requirements
Multi – Task Single Creates a touchscreen graphics object that can G,H,J,L,M,N,O,S,T
– State Button perform multiple tasks when pressed, while pressed,
or when released.
Multi – Task Multi Button to perform multiple tasks and have multiple G,H,J,O,R,S,T
– State Button states, changing state every time the button is pressed
Bar Graph Display values in data registers as a bar graph A,C,Q,S,T

Multiple Bar Displays values from multiple registers as separate bar C,J,S,T
Graphs graphs within a single object
Analog Meter Display values in a data register as an analog meter. C,G,H,J,Q,S,T

Trend Plot the values in up to four registers over time F,H,I,J,Q,S,T

145
 Historical Trend Plot data from up to four channels recorded by the F,I,J,Q,S,T
data logger vs. time
XY Plot Plot data in one register against the data in another H,S,T
register, a single point is displayed on the plot that
moves as the values in the registers change
Transfer Recipe Transfer data from a predefined set of consecutive J,L,M,N,R,S,T
HMC memory addresses to a set of PLC memory
addresses
Upload Recipe Transfer data from a predefined set of consecutive PLC J,L,M,N,R,S,T
memory addresses to a set of HMC memory addresses
Alarm List Displays a list of preconfigured alarm messages when C,J,S,T
the trigger bit specified for each message is activated
Alarm Acknowledge the alarm on the top of the alarm list J,L,M,N,S,T
Acknowledge
Acknowledge All Acknowledges all of the alarms displayed in an alarm J,L,M,N,S,T
Alarms list
Next Alarm Shifts that alarms displayed in an alarm list object up J,L,M,N,S,T
by one
Previous Alarm Shifts the alarms displayed in an alarm list down by J,L,M,N,S,T
one

General Object Properties

Object Properties control an object’s appearance and function. The programmer can configure these properties
using the Property Grid which displays the properties of the currently selected object. Most of the objects
placed onto a screen share common properties described (for the sake of brevity) in this section. Later sections
will examine each individual object in more detail to provide information that may be particular to the operation
of that object.

Property List
General Properties
A Color Animation
B Flash Animation
C Visibility Animation
D Flash
E Line Color
F Background Color
G Border
H Label
I Font
J Language
K Text
L Feedback Tag On/Off Text
M Button Style
N Feedback Tag
O Task(s)

146
 A Color Animation
P Value or Data Properties
Q Tag Properties
R Tag A/B
S Design
T Layout

A. Color Animation:
Dynamically change the color of the selected object. Enter a number between 0-255 (number assigned to each
color can be determined by looking at the color palette) to select a color. The default tag address is internal
memory register D4095 but you can select any register in the D memory of the HMC. In this example, we will
enable Color Animation on a Line and select D100 as the tagged address used to control the color of the line:

Using Color Animation in MAPware

Changing the color of the line to red using simulation mode.

B. Flash Animation:
Dynamically ‘flash’ selected object. ‘Flash’ means the object displays on screen periodically depending upon the
value (0-65535) in a tag register. This can indicate an alarm condition or attract the operator’s attention. When
enabled, the following options are displayed:
• Flash Animation Properties: this lists a brief summary of all the options selected.
• Flash When: determines when flashing should occur. Options are ‘within range’ (flash when the current
value is within the set high and low limits) and ‘out of range’ (flash when the current value is above the
high limit or below the low limit set).
• High Limit: the upper limit that determines when to flash

147
 • Low Limit: the lower limit that determines when to flash
• Speed: the rate at which flashing occurs when activated. Options are slow (0.5 fps – flashes per second),
medium (1 fps), and fast (2 fps).
• Tag List – the default tag register is D4095 but any 2-byte tag register can be selected.
In this example, we will enable Flash Animation on a simple Text object and select D300 as the tagged
address used to control the flashing of the text:

• When the value in D300 falls within 100 to 500, the text will slowly flash:

Example of flashing message text

C. Visibility Animation:
Use this feature to make the object disappear. A tag address monitored to determine when the object becomes
invisible – made visible only when needed. This helps to reduce clutter on screen and focus the operator’s
attention to the area of the screen that is most important. Options are:
• Visibility Animation Properties: this lists a brief summary of all the options selected.
• High Limit: the upper limit determines when to make the selected object invisible.
• Low Limit: the lower limit determines when to make object invisible.
• Show When: determines when visibility should occur. Options are ‘within range’ (show when the current
value is within the set high and low limits) and ‘out of range’ (show when the current value is above the
high limit or below the low limit set).
• Tag List – the default tag register is D0 but you can select any 2-byte tag register.
In this example, we enable Visibility Animation on a multilingual Text object and a picture object. Select
D4094 as the address to control the visibility of the objects:

When the value in D4094 is outside the range of 10-20, the two objects are visible:

148
 Example of visibility feature using a text object and a picture

D. Flash:
This is similar to the Flash Animation feature described above except a tag register does not control this option.
Therefore, if enabled, the Flash feature continues as long as the object displayed.
Options are:
• No Flash – default state. Object will not flash.
• Flash – Slow – Object flashes at 0.5 fps (flashes per second)
• Flash – Medium – Object flashes at 1.0 fps.
• Flash – Fast – Object flashes at 2.0 fps.

E. Line Color:
This determines the color of the perimeter line of a simple shape (i.e. line, rectangle, ellipse, etc.). Use the
button to display the color palette to select the color:

F. Background Color:
You can select a background color to simple shapes or many of the other objects that display data. Click the
button to use the color palette to select a background color:

149
G. Border:
Add a line around the perimeter of the object.
• Border Color – select the color of the border using the color palette.

Example of border applied to a text object

H. Label:
A label identifies the object placed on the top or bottom of the object. Options are:
• Background Color – click the button to select background color using the color palette.

• Position – options are top or bottom of the object.

• Text – enter the text that you wish to appear in the label.
• Text Color – this is the color of the text. Click to display the color palette.
• Text Font – select the font attributes:
Name: Windows type font
Size: font size
Unit: reserved for future use – not applicable at this time
Bold: highlight with bold type
GdiCharSet: reserved for future use – not applicable at this time
GdiVerticalFont: reserved for future use – not applicable at this time
Italic: highlight with italics
Strikeout: highlight with strikeout
Underline: highlight with underline

I. Font:
Use this to configure the text displayed in the text objects as well as many of the other objects that use text.
 Note that some of the objects use a simple predefined font that is not a Windows true type font. This

150
simplified font does not offer as many options listed below as is available for Windows true type fonts. The
simplified font does have four options for size: 5x7 pixels, 10x14, 20x28 and 7x14. True type fonts have the
following options:
• Name: Windows type font
• Size: font size
• Unit: reserved for future use – not applicable at this time
• Bold: highlight with bold type
• GdiCharSet: reserved for future use – not applicable at this time
• GdiVerticalFont: reserved for future use – not applicable at this time
• Italic: highlight with italics
• Strikeout: highlight with strikeout
• Underline: highlight with underline

J. Language:
This feature is the Language feature described later in this chapter. This provides the ability to configure each
object with a text label for up to nine languages. When the object displays, the HMC selects the language label
to show based upon the current value in a particular internal HMC register (SW0001). Many objects employ the
language feature but to use this feature, you must first decide which languages you need then add them to the
Languages section. Once completed, you click the pull-down box in this option, select a language, and then
configure the text for the object using that language. During normal operation, you can set up buttons on the
HMC that will instantly change the ‘language’ (i.e. English, Spanish, German, etc.) of the HMC without the need
to download a new project. Below are snapshots of HMC screens (using simulation mode) in which a ‘Jump to
Screen’ button and Text change as new values are placed into SW0001:

K. Text:
This is the entry location where the programmer enters text that will appear in a text object. The size of the
display screen and the font size determine the total number of characters permissible. Multiple lines are not
allowed.

151
 • Text Alignment – Only available when using the Multilingual Text object, this option determines
alignment of the text in relation to the size of the text box. Options are Left (justified), Right (justified),
and Center (justified).
• Text Color – Determines the color of the text. Click to display the color palette.

L. Feedback Tag On/Off Text:

This option is available on most of the screen button objects. It provides the ability to customize the label that
appears on the button.

• On/Off Text: entry field for the text that is to appear on the button.
• On/Off Text Background Color: fill color of the button.
• On/Off Text Border Style: there are seven options for the border.

Raised

Etched

Bump

Sunken

Frame

None

Flat
• On/Off Text Color: this is the color of the text. Click to display the color palette.
• On/Off Text Font: these are the particular font size settings for the TrueType font selected.
• On/Off Text Pattern: option to have a two-color pattern for the background.
• On/Off Text Pattern Color: select the secondary color for the patterned background.

M. Button Style:
As with the Feedback On/Off Text described above, this option is available on most button-type objects. Options
are:

152
 • Generic Square

• Circle

• Rounded Rectangle

• Invisible
 Note: the object is active but not seen by the operator

• User defined Images

 Note: use any *.bmp, *.jpg, or *.gif image
On/Off State Image: Click to locate target graphics image file.

• From Picture Library

 Note: from predefined libraries included in software
On/Off State Picture Library: Click to display predefined library images.

N. Feedback Tag:
This feature is optional on most button-type objects (i.e. bit control, change screens, write values, alarm
buttons, etc.). If disabled, there is no visual ‘feedback’ that the button, when pressed, has performed its
intended function (see Toggle button #1 in illustrations). Therefore, the Appearance – Feedback Tag On section
determines what displays on the button.
Enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the feedback tag address, if you wish
to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look to an ‘on’ or touched look). Configure
unique labels using the Appearance-Feedback Tag Off/On sections (see Toggle button #2 in illustrations).
Alternatively, select a different feedback tag address to verify that some action has taken place in the controller.
The controller is then responsible for setting the feedback tag bit, which will then cause the label on the button
object to change states (see Toggle button #3 in illustrations).

In the illustrations above, the three buttons along the bottom set bit B0 when pressed. A lamp that represents
the current state (On or Off) of B0 is directly above these buttons. To the right of this lamp is the status of
another bit, B1.
Button #1 is configured with no feedback. Notice that there is no change to how the button looks regardless of
whether or not B0 is On or Off.
Button #2 has feedback and both the target and feedback addresses are B0. This button changes ‘state’ to
reflect the current state of B0.

153
Button #3 has feedback as well but is using B1 for the feedback address. As a result, it does not change state
depending upon the value in B0. Rather, the look of this button changes according to the value in B1, although
the button controls B0.
• Feedback Tag Address: the address read to determine which label state to display.
• Feedback Tag Name: Tag name assigned to the targeted tag address.
• Simulation: this option simply shows how the ‘On’ state and ‘Off’ state look for the particular object
selected, when changed during programming. This option has no effect on operation of the button
during online or simulation.

O. Task(s):
This option is for button-type objects (i.e. Multi-Task Single-State button) that can be configured for more than
one task. If the Task is grayed out, this means that the object can do only that one defined task.
A task is some action(s) that the button is programmed to do (see Chapter 6 – Task Management for more
information). Click to locate display the Touch Screen Task List dialog box to add/modify the tasks.

P. Value or Data Properties:

This section configures how the selected object interprets (i.e. signed/unsigned, leading zeroes, ranges, etc.) the
number it is to display or write.
• Value Data Type: options vary according to the tag address selected (bit, 1 byte, 2 bytes, or 4 bytes).
Options are unsigned, signed, hexadecimal, BCD, binary, Float, ASCII, or ASCII Numeric.
Unsigned – represents number in target address as an unsigned decimal number.
Signed – represents a signed decimal number. Range is – -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 for 4-byte
registers, -32768 to 32767 for 2-byte, and 28 to 127 for 1-byte.
Hexadecimal – represents a hexadecimal (base 16) number. Range is – 0 to FFFFFFFF for 4-byte
registers, 0 to FFFF for 2-byte, and 0 to FF for 1-byte.
BCD – represents as a BCD (binary coded decimal) number. Range is – 0 to 99999999 for 4-byte
registers, 0 to 9999 for 2-byte, and 0 to 99 for 1-byte.
Binary – represents as a binary (base 2) number. Range is limited to 16 bits (LSW) for 4-byte
registers, 16 bits for 2-byte, and 8 bits for 1-byte.
Float – represents a floating-point number using the IEEE 754 single precision format. Any number
with no more than nine digits can be displayed. If necessary, the number is rounded. Only supported
with a 4-byte register tag address.
ASCII – represents the data in a 16 bit number as two ASCII printable characters. Hex values 0-9
display as numbers 0-9, 0AF is displayed as small case decimal numbers, 20-FF is shown as printable
ASCII characters. The HMC reads consecutive registers according to the Length field (ex: if
Length=10, then HMC will read five consecutive registers, starting with the designated Tag Address.
ASCII Numbers – same as ASCII (see above) except that all non-printable values display as zeroes.
• Display Leading Zeroes: when enabled, data is presented with leading zeroes to the left of the value, if
required to fill in the number of digits specified.
• Hide Data: if enabled, data will be represented with asterisks ‘***’. This feature is for security password
entry.
• Keypad (for data entry objects): enable or disable popup keypad input.
 Note: if popup keypad input is disabled, entry is still available if a static keypad is placed onto the
same screen as this object or on a popup screen. For more information on how to do this, see On Screen
Keypads later in this chapter.
Screen Name: determines which popup keypad is used.

154
 Screen Number: screen number of the popup keypad used.
Ranges (for data entry objects): these are the limits allowed when entering a new number.
Maximum Value (List P) – enter the maximum value that the HMC operator can enter into the target
register.
Minimum Value (List P) – enter the minimum value that the HMC operator can enter into the target
register.

Q. Tag Properties:
Defines the properties of the tag attached to the object.
• Tag Address: this is the address of the target register monitored.
• Tag Name: this is the name given to the target register in the Tag Database.

R. Tag A/B:
For objects that perform a mathematical operation on two addresses (ex. Add Tag B to Tag A) or copy from one
address to another (i.e. recipes).
Tag A Address: Address assigned to Tag A in the Tag database.
Tag B Address: Address assigned to Tag B in the Tag database.

S. Design:
The programming software uses this section to identify each object. For this reason, the user cannot edit this
section.
Id: this is an identification number assigned to the object.
Name: this is the name given to the object.

T. Layout:
This section provides the coordinates for the selected object.
• Bottom Right (or End Pt.): coordinates (pixel location) of the end point of the object
• Size: The total size (in pixels) of the selected object. The first value is the width, and second value is
height.
• Top Left (or Start Pt.): location of the start point of the object
• Refer to the above section often when working with screen objects. The next section covers all objects
that are placed onto a screen.

Simple Drawing Tools and Static Objects

The MAPware software provides many drawing tools used to create simple graphics on a screen. Sophisticated
static objects are also available to display graphics or text. Static objects (as opposed to dynamic objects) are
screen objects that do not change what displays on screen. Dynamic objects (such as lamps or numeric input
registers) change according to the value of a coil or register in a PLC or internal memory of the HMC. This section
provides descriptions of the simple drawing tools and static objects available in the MAPware software.

155
Line Object
Display simple lines on a screen of varying angle, length and color.

Place a line on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Graphical Objects > Line from the standard menu
Click Drawing Tools > Line from the Draw toolbar
Click the Line icon from the Draw toolbar
• Move cursor to a start point for the line. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the line and release. The line appears on screen and the Line
Properties box displays.

Line Properties options

• Color Animation (see Feature List A) – dynamically change the color of the object.
• Flash Animation (List B) – dynamically ‘flash’ object.
• Visibility Animation (List C) – make the object disappear or become ‘invisible’.
• Flash (List D) – continuously ‘flashes’ the object.
• Line Color (List E) – sets color of the perimeter line.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.

Resize a Line
Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

156
Rectangle Object
Use to display a rectangle or square on a screen of varying size and color.

Place a rectangle on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Graphical Objects > Rectangle from the standard menu
Click Drawing Tools > Rectangle from the Objects toolbar
Click the Rectangle icon from the Draw toolbar
• Move cursor to a starting corner endpoint for the rectangle. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor diagonally to the opposite endpoint for the rectangle and release. The rectangle
appears on screen and the Rectangle Properties toolbox displays.

Rectangle Properties Options

• Color Animation (see Feature List A) – dynamically change the color of the object.
• Flash Animation (List B) – dynamically ‘flash’ object.
• Visibility Animation (List C) – make the object disappear or become ‘invisible’.
• Background Color (List F) – option to select a color as a ‘backdrop’ to the object.
• Flash (List D) – continuously ‘flashes’ the object.
• Line Color (List E) – sets color of the perimeter line.
• Pattern: this is an option to use two colors for the background. The pattern determines how the two
colors display. Eight patterns are available. Click to display the pattern options.
• Pattern Color: Select the second background color when using the pattern option above. Click to
display the color palette.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.

Resize a rectangle
Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

157
Ellipse Object
Use to display an ellipse or circle on a screen of varying size and color.

Place an ellipse on a screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Graphical Objects > Ellipse from the standard menu
Click Drawing Tools > Ellipse from the Objects toolbar
Click the Ellipse icon from the Draw toolbar
• Move cursor to a starting corner endpoint for the ellipse. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor diagonally to the opposite endpoint for the ellipse and release. The ellipse appears
on screen and the Ellipse Properties toolbox displays.

Ellipse Properties Options

• Color Animation (see Feature List A) – dynamically change the color of the object.
• Flash Animation (List B) – dynamically ‘flash’ object.
• Visibility Animation (List C) – make the object disappear or become ‘invisible’.
• Background Color (List F) – option to select a color as a ‘backdrop’ to the object.
• Flash (List D) – continuously ‘flashes’ the object.
• Line Color (List E) – sets color of the perimeter line.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.

Resize an ellipse
Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

158
Round Rectangle Object
Use to display a rounded (with beveled edges) rectangle or square on a screen of varying size and color.

Place a rounded rectangle on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Graphical Objects > Rounded Rectangle from the standard menu
Click Drawing Tools > Rounded Rectangle from the Objects toolbar
• Move cursor to a starting corner endpoint for the rounded rectangle. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor diagonally to the opposite endpoint for the rounded rectangle and release. The
rectangle appears on screen and the Round Rectangle Properties toolbox displays.

Round Rectangle Properties Options

• Color Animation (see Feature List A) – dynamically change the color of the object.
• Flash Animation (List B) – dynamically ‘flash’ object.
• Visibility Animation (List C) – make the object disappear or become ‘invisible’.
• Background Color (List F) – option to select a color as a ‘backdrop’ to the object.
• Flash (List D) – continuously ‘flashes’ the object.
• Line Color (List E) – sets color of the perimeter line.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.

Resize a round rectangle

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

159
Pictures Object
Use to display a picture (predefined *.bmp, *.jpg, or *.gif graphic image file) on a screen of varying size.

Place a picture on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Drawing Tools > Picture from the Objects toolbar
Click the Picture icon from the Draw toolbar
• Move cursor to a starting corner endpoint for the picture. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor diagonally to the opposite endpoint for the picture and release. The picture appears
on screen and the Picture Properties toolbox displays.

Picture Properties Options

• Visibility Animation (List C) – make the object disappear or become ‘invisible’.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.
• Picture Properties: use to assign a graphic image to the picture object.
Picture Name: this is the file name of the image that is displayed in the picture. To select an image,
click the directory button , then locate and select the image in the Picture Library or use the
browser window.
Picture Type: options are Picture Browser or Picture Library.
Picture Browser: this option allows you to search your hard drive for imported images using the
Picture Name field. The image can be *.bmp, *.gif, or *.jpg format.
Picture Library: choose from a large selection of predefined images in the Picture library
included with the MAPware software.

Resize a picture
Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

160
Simple Text Object
Use to display text on a screen using one of four font sizes and selectable color.

Place simple text object on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Display Objects > Text from the standard menu
Click Drawing Tools > Text from the Objects toolbar
Click the Text icon from the Draw toolbar

• Move precision cursor to the desired location for the text and click to place.
• The Text object (with ‘Text’) appears on screen and the Text Properties toolbox displays.

Simple Text Object Properties Options

• Color Animation (see Feature List A) – dynamically change the color of the object.
• Flash Animation (List B) – dynamically ‘flash’ object.
• Visibility Animation (List C) – make the object disappear or become ‘invisible’.
• Background Color (List F) – option to select a color as a ‘backdrop’ to the object.
• Border (List G) – add a line around the perimeter of the object.
• Flash (List D) – continuously ‘flashes’ the object.
• Font (List I) – select from one of four options – 5x7, 7x14, 10x14, and 20x28 pixels.
• Text (List K): The text that appears in the box. Screen size of the display and the font used determine the
maximum number of characters.
• Text Color (List Kb) – Determines the color of the text. Click to display the color palette.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.

Resize a simple text object

Text objects are not resizable – the number of characters and font size determines the size. To move the text
object, simply click and drag using the mouse to the target location on screen.

161
Multilingual Text Object
Use to display multilingual text on a screen using Windows True Type fonts. The term ‘multilingual’ refers to the
ability to use the Multilanguage feature with this object. This is the ability to configure up to nine text labels per
object. The current value in the Language tag (SW0001) determines the particular text label shown during
operation. For more information on this feature, see Languages later in this chapter. The multilingual text object
also differs from the simple text object because it uses Windows True type fonts.

Place multilingual text on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Graphical Objects > Multilingual Text from the standard menu
Click Drawing Tools > Multilingual Text from the Objects toolbar
Click the Multilingual Text icon from the Draw toolbar

• Move precision cursor to the desired location for the text and click to place.
• The Multilingual Text object (with ‘Sample Text’) appears on screen and the Multilingual Text Properties
toolbox displays.

Multilingual Text Properties Options

• Visibility Animation (List C) – make the object disappear or become ‘invisible’.
• Background Color (List F) – option to select a color as a ‘backdrop’ to the object.
• Border (List G) – add a line around the perimeter of the object.
Border Color – select a color for the border.
• Flash (List D) – continuously ‘flashes’ the object.

162
 • Font (List I) – configure how you wish the text to appear.
• Language (List J) – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text.
• Text (List K) – the text that appears in the box. Screen size of the display and the font determined the
maximum number of characters.
• Text Alignment (List Ka) – determines how text on multiple lines aligns: Left, Right, or Center justified.
• Text Color (List Kb) – Determines the color of the text. Click to display the color palette.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.

Resize a multilingual text object

The Multilingual text object is resizable and has the advantage that the text wraps around to the next line if the
width of the text box is too small.
Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Time Object
Use to display time (all HMCs have a built-in real time clock RTC) on a screen using one of four font sizes and
selectable color.

Place a time object on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Display Objects > Time from the standard menu
Click Clock Objects > Time from the Objects toolbar

• Move precision cursor to the desired location for the Time and click to place.
• The Time object (with current computer time) appears on screen and the Time Properties toolbox
displays.

Time Object Properties Options

• Color Animation (see Feature List A) – dynamically change the color of the object.
• Flash Animation (List B) – dynamically ‘flash’ object.
• Visibility Animation (List C) – make the object disappear or become ‘invisible’.
• Background Color (List F) – option to select a color as a ‘backdrop’ to the object.
• Border (List G) – add a line around the perimeter of the object.
• Flash (List D) – continuously ‘flashes’ the object.
• Font (List I) – select from one of four options – 5x7, 7x14, 10x14, and 20x28 pixels.

163
 • Text Color (List Kb) – Determines the color of the text. Click to display the color palette.
• Time Format: options are HH:MM:SS (hours, minutes, seconds) or HH:MM (hours, minutes)
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.

Resize a time object

Time objects are not resizable – the size is fixed by the number of characters and font size. To move the time
object, simply click and drag using the mouse to the target location on screen.

Date Object
Use to display date (all HMCs have a built-in real time clock RTC) on a screen using one of four font sizes and
selectable color.

Place a date object on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Display Objects > Date from the standard menu
Click Clock Objects > Date from the Objects toolbar

• Move precision cursor to the desired location for the Date and click to place.
• The Date object (with current computer date) appears on screen and the Date Properties toolbox
displays.

Date Object Properties Options

• Color Animation (see Feature List A) – dynamically change the color of the object.
• Flash Animation (List B) – dynamically ‘flash’ object.
• Visibility Animation (List C) – make the object disappear or become ‘invisible’.
• Background Color (List F) – option to select a color as a ‘backdrop’ to the object.
• Border (List G) – add a line around the perimeter of the object.
• Date Format: several options are available. See the dropdown menu in MAPware for these options.
• Display Day: option to display the day of the week to the left of the Date.
• Flash (List D) – continuously ‘flashes’ the object.
• Font (List I) – select from one of four options – 5x7, 7x14, 10x14, and 20x28 pixels.
• Text Color (List Kb) – Determines the color of the text. Click to display the color palette.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.

164
Resize a date object
Date objects are sized according to the number of characters and font size. To move the date object, simply click
and drag using the mouse to the target location on screen.

Screen Buttons
The MAPware software provides four button objects that change screens. When the operator presses one of
these buttons, a new screen displays or a popup screen appears.

Go to Screen Object
Use to display a button on screen that, when pressed, displays a new screen.

Place a Go to Screen button on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Buttons > Navigation Buttons > Go to Screen from the standard menu
Click Quick Buttons > Go to Screen from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Go to Screen Properties box displays.

Go to Screen Properties Options

• Language (List J) – configure a text label for up to nine languages per object.
• Appearance Feedback Tag On/Off (List L) – select the On and/or Off labels.
• Button Style (List M) – selects a style or ‘look’ to the button.
• Feedback Tag (List N): Enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look).
• Screen Name: select from the pull-down list box, the screen that you wish to display when the button is
pressed.
Screen Number: this is the number assigned to the selected screen.
• Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is set to ‘Yes’).
• Task (List O) – Go to Screen (cannot be modified)
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.

165
Resize a Go to Screen button
Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Go to Next Screen Object

Use to display a button on screen that, when pressed, displays the next screen in numerical sequence. If there
are no higher screens, then pressing this button has no effect.

Place a Go to Next Screen button on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Buttons > Navigation Buttons > Go to Next Screen from the standard menu
Click Quick Buttons > Go to Next Screen from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Go to Next Screen Properties box displays.

Go to Next Screen Properties Options

• Language (List J) – configure a text label for up to 9 languages per object.
• Appearance Feedback Tag On/Off (List L) – select the On and/or Off labels.
• Button Style (List M) – selects a style or ‘look’ to the button.
• Feedback Tag (List N): Enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look).
• Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is set to ‘Yes’).
• Task (List O) – Go to Next Screen (cannot be modified)
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.

Resize a Go to Next Screen button

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

166
Go to Previous Screen Object
Use to display a button on screen that, when pressed, displays the prior screen in numerical sequence. If there
are no lower screens, then pressing this button has no effect.

Place a Go to Previous Screen button on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Buttons > Navigation Buttons > Go to Previous Screen from the standard menu
Click Quick Buttons > Go to Previous Screen from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Go to Previous Screen Properties box displays.

Go to Previous Screen Properties Options

• Language (List J) – configure a text label for up to 9 languages per object.
• Appearance Feedback Tag On/Off (List L) – select the On and/or Off labels.
• Button Style (List M) – selects a style or ‘look’ to the button.
• Feedback Tag (List N): Enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look).
• Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is set to ‘Yes’).
• Task (List O) – Go to Previous Screen (cannot be modified)
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.

Resize a Go to Previous Screen button

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

167
Open Popup Screen Object
Use to display a button on screen that, when pressed, displays a popup screen (a screen that is smaller than the
size of the display). The Open Popup Screen button cannot be placed and used on popup screens.

Place Open Popup Screen button on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Buttons > Navigation Buttons > Open Popup Screen from the standard menu
Click Quick Buttons > Open Popup Screen from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Open Popup Screen Properties box displays.

Open Popup Screen Properties Options

• Language (List J) – configure a text label for up to 9 languages per object.
• Appearance Feedback Tag On/Off (List L) – select the On and/or Off labels.
• Button Style (List M) – selects a style or ‘look’ to the button.
• Feedback Tag (List N): Enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look).
• Screen Name: select from the pull-down list box, the popup screen that you wish to display when the
button is pressed.
Screen Number: this is the number assigned to the selected screen.
• Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is set to ‘Yes’).
• Task (List O) – Go to Popup Screen (cannot be modified)
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.

Resize an Open Popup Screen button

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

168
Bit-based Objects
The MAPware software provides many options for displaying and writing to bit/coil registers. Bit/coil registers
are two state registers that are used to represent an ‘On[1]’ and ‘Off[0]’ condition. Bit registers often display
lamps or buttons that control a target bit.

Bit Lamp
Bit lamps indicate the current state of a bit register using a graphic image (i.e. lamp) or text (i.e. ON/OFF). When
a bit lamp is on a screen that is currently displayed on the HMC, the HMC continuously polls the target bit
register to determine which state image to display.

Place a Bit Lamp object on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Display Objects > Bit Lamp from the standard menu
Click Advanced Objects > Bit Lamp from the Draw toolbar
Click the Bit Lamp Display icon in the Objects toolbar.

• Move cursor to a start point for the object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the object and release. The object appears on screen and the Bit
Lamp Properties box displays.

Bit Lamp Properties Options

• Border (List G) – add a line around the perimeter of the object.
• Label (List H) – option to have a label appear on the top/bottom of the object.
• Language (List J) – configure displayed text for up to 9 languages per object.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Lamp Properties – selects the ‘style’ and target address.

169
 • Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is set to ‘Yes’).
• Style (List M) – select a style or ‘look’ to the button.
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of the target bit/coil that is monitored.
• Tag Name (List Qb) – name assigned in the tag database to the target bit/coil.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.
• On/Off Text Properties (List L) – select the On and Off labels that appear when using the Generic Square,
Circle, or Rounded Rectangle button style.

Resize a Bit Lamp object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Bit Display
Bit Display indicates the current state of a bit register using two predefined messages (i.e. ON/OFF). The current
value read in the targeted bit/coil message determines what message displays. Messages can be of varying
length (maximum of 40 characters). When a bit data display is on an HMC screen, the HMC continuously polls
the target bit register to determine which message to display.

Place a Bit Display object on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Display Objects > Data Display > Bit Data from the standard menu
Click Show Data > Bit Data from the Draw toolbar
Click the Bit Display icon in the Objects toolbar.

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click to place the object on screen.
• The object appears on screen and the Bit Text Display Data Properties box displays.

Bit Display Properties Options

• Color Animation (see Feature List A) – dynamically change the color of the object.

170
 • Flash Animation (List B) – dynamically ‘flash’ object.
• Visibility Animation (List C) – make the object disappear or become ‘invisible’.
• Background Color (List F) – option to select a color as a ‘backdrop’ to the object.
• Border (List G) – add a line around the perimeter of the object.
• Flash (List D) – continuously ‘flashes’ the object.
• Font (List I) – select from one of four options – 5x7, 7x14, 10x14, and 20x28 pixels.
• Off/On Text – message text displayed according to the current value in the target address. Maximum
number of characters is 40.
• Text Color (List Kb) – Determines the color of the text. Click to display the color palette.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Display Data Properties – address of target.
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of the target bit/coil that is monitored.
• Tag Name (List Qb) – name assigned in the tag database to the target bit/coil.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.

Resize a Bit Display object

The Bit Data object cannot resize (unless you change the Font attribute) but can move.

Set Bit
The Set Bit button sets a targeted bit/coil. The button displays with either text labels or a graphic image to
represent two states. When a set bit button is on screen, the HMC continuously polls the target bit register to
determine which state to display (feedback tag must be enabled to display two states).

Place a Set Bit button object on screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Buttons > Bit Action > Set Bit from the standard menu
click Quick Buttons > Set Bit from the Draw toolbar
click the Set Bit icon in the Objects toolbar

171
 • Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Set Bit Properties box displays.

Set Bit Properties Options

• Language (List J) – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text.
• Appearance Feedback Tag On/Off (List L) – select the On and/or Off labels.
• Button Style (List M) – selects a style or ‘look’ to the button.
• Feedback Tag (List N) – enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look).
• Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is ‘Yes’).
• Task (List O) – turn Bit On (cannot be modified)
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.
• Tag Properties (List Q) – address of target to use.
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of the target bit/coil that is set.
• Tag Name (List Qb) – name assigned in the tag database to the target bit/coil.

Resize a Set Bit button object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Reset Bit
The Reset Bit button resets (clears) a targeted bit/coil. The button displays with either text labels or a graphic
image to represent two states. When a reset bit button is on screen, the HMC continuously polls the target bit
register to determine which state to display (feedback tag must be enabled to display two states).

172
Place a Reset Bit button object on screen
• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Buttons > Bit Action > Reset Bit from the standard menu
click Quick Buttons > Reset Bit from the Draw toolbar
click the Reset Bit icon in the Objects toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Reset Bit Properties box displays.

Reset Bit Properties Options

• Language (List J) – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text.
• Appearance Feedback Tag On/Off (List L) – select the On and/or Off labels
• Button Style (List M) – selects a style or ‘look’ to the button
• Feedback Tag (List N) – enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look)
• Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is set to ‘Yes’)
• Task (List O) – turn Bit Off (cannot be modified)
• Design (List S) – identifies object
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object
• Tag Properties (List Q) – address of target to use
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of the target bit/coil that is reset
• Tag Name (List Qb) – name assigned in the tag database to the target bit/coil

Resize a Reset Bit button object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Momentary Bit
The Set Bit button sets a targeted bit/coil on while the button is being pressed and resets the bit/coil when the
button is released. The button displays with either text labels or a graphic image to represent two states. When
a momentary bit button is on screen, the HMC continuously polls the target bit register to determine which

173
state to display (feedback tag must be enabled to display two states).

Place a Momentary Bit button object on screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Buttons > Bit Action > Momentary Bit from the standard menu
click Quick Buttons > Momentary Bit from the Draw toolbar
click the Momentary Bit icon in the Objects toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Set Bit Properties box displays.

Set Momentary Properties Options

• Button Style (List M) – selects a style or ‘look’ to the button.
• Feedback Tag (List N) – enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look).
• Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is ‘Yes’).
• Task (List O) – turn Bit On (cannot be modified)
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.
• Tag Properties (List Q) – address of target to use.
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of the target bit/coil that is set.
• Tag Name (List Qb) – name assigned in the tag database to the target bit/coil.

Resize a Momentary Bit button object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

174
Toggle Bit
The Toggle Bit button alternates setting and clearing a targeted coil each time the button is pressed. When
pressed by the operator, the HMC reads the current value of the coil, and then sends a command to set or reset
the coil depending upon the value read. The button shows text labels or a graphic image that is used to
represent two states. When a toggle bit button is on screen, the HMC continuously polls the target bit register
to determine which state to display (feedback tag must be enabled to display two states).

Place a Toggle Bit button object on screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Buttons > Bit Action > Toggle Bit from the standard menu
click Quick Buttons > Toggle Bit from the Draw toolbar
click the Toggle Bit icon in the Objects toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Toggle Bit Properties box displays.

Toggle Bit Properties Options

• Language (List J) – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text
• Appearance Feedback Tag On/Off (List L) – select the On and/or Off labels
• Button Style (List M) – selects a style or ‘look’ to the button
• Feedback Tag (List N) – enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look)
• Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is ‘Yes’)
• Task (List O) – toggle Bit (cannot be modified)
• Design (List S) – identifies object
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object
• Tag Properties (List Q) – address of target to use

175
 • Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of the target bit/coil that is toggled
• Tag Name (List Qb) – name assigned in the tag database to the target bit/coil

Resize a Toggle Bit button object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Bit Entry
Bit Entry is used to set/clear a targeted bit/coil. Two predefined messages display according to the current value
read in the targeted bit/coil. Messages can be of varying length (maximum of 40 characters). When a bit entry is
on a screen that is currently shown on the HMC, the HMC continuously polls the target bit register to determine
which message to display.

Place a Bit Entry object on screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Input Objects > Data Entry > Bit Entry from the standard menu
click Edit Data > Bit Entry from the Draw toolbar
click the Bit Entry Display icon in the Objects toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click to place the object on screen.
• The object appears on screen and the Coil Data Entry Properties box displays.

Bit Entry Properties Options

• Background Color (List F) – option to select a color as a ‘backdrop’ to the object
• Border (List G) – add a line around the perimeter of the object
• Flash (List D) – continuously ‘flashes’ the object
• Font (List I) – select from one of four options – 5x7, 7x14, 10x14, and 20x28 pixels
• Off/On Text – message text that appears according to the current value in the target address. Maximum
number of characters is 40.
• Text Color (List Kb) – Determines the color of the text. Click to display the color palette.
• Data Entry Properties (List P) – address of target and keypad to use
• Keypad – enable or disable popup keypad input.
 Note: if popup keypad input is disabled, entry is still available if a static keypad is placed onto the

176
 same screen as this object or on a popup screen. For more information on how to do this, see On Screen
Keypads later in this chapter.
• Screen Name – if a popup keypad is enabled, select which popup keypad to use.
• Screen Number – popup screen assigned to the keypad above.
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of the target bit/coil that is monitored.
• Tag Name (List Qb) – name assigned in the tag database to the target bit/coil.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.

Resize a Bit Entry object

The Bit Entry object cannot resize (unless you change the Font attribute) but can move.

Bit Entry object and Popup Screens

The Bit Entry object cannot be placed onto a popup screen – only base and template screens.

Register-based Objects There are many options for displaying and writing to 16/32-bit registers. Register-
based objects display the value in an internal or PLC register and allow the operator to write new values.
Register-based objects can also display predefined messages or images depending upon the ‘state’ or range of
values in the register.

Word Lamp
Word lamps display predefined text labels or images shown according to the ‘state’ of the target address. Each
state represents a single value or range of values tied to a particular text label or image. The HMC continuously
polls the target register to determine which state image to display. A maximum of 32 states are supported.
Word lamps are used where more than two choices are required. For example, a tri-state condition with Run,
Auto, and Manual modes may be indicated using a word lamp.

Place a Word Lamp object on screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Display Objects > Word Lamp from the standard menu
click Advanced Objects > Word Lamp from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.

177
 • Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Word Lamp Properties box displays.

Word Lamp Properties Options

• Border (List G) – add a line around the perimeter of the object.
• Label (List H) – option to have a label appear on the top/bottom of the object.
• Language (List J) – configure displayed text for up to 9 languages per object.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.
• State Properties – this section configures the number of states and the target tag address that the word
lamp monitors.
• Current State – shows the current state displayed on the Word Lamp for editing.
• Number of States – indicates the total number of states configured for this particular word lamp. This
attribute cannot be modified here. Use State Properties to add/delete states.
• State Properties (Collection) – use to create the states and assign attributes for each particular state.
Click the button to display the State Properties popup dialog box:

The left side of the State Properties box shows all of the States currently configured. There are a
maximum of 32 states per Word Lamp.
Add State – click this button to add a new state (always appended to the bottom of the list).
Delete State – click one of the States in the list box to highlight and then click this button to delete it.
 Note: when deleting a state that is in-sequence, all states, listed after the selected state, are
renumbered.
The right side of the State Properties box shows the configuration for the highlighted state:
Display Text – option to display what is written in the Text field on the button for that state.
Text – label applied to that particular state. Default text is ‘Word Button’.
Font – the text attributes
Name – Type font used
Size – select font size
Bold – select ‘True’ to enable
Italic – select ‘True’ to enable

178
 Underline – select ‘True’ to enable
Text Color – determines the text color. Click the button to display the color palette and select a
color.
Text Background Color – determines the fill or background color of the state. Click the button to
display the color palette and select a color.
Style – options are Generic Square, Circle, Rounded Rectangle, User defined Images, or From Picture
Library.
Border Style – the style or appearance of the button. Options are Raised, Etched, Bump, Sunken,
Frame, Flat and None.
Low Limit – enter the minimum value associated with this particular state. Any value read from the
target PLC address that is within the Low Limit and High Limit will display this state.
High Limit – enter the maximum value associated with this particular state.
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of the target bit/coil that is monitored.
• Tag Name (List Qb) – name assigned in the tag database to the target bit/coil.

Resize a Word Lamp object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Numeric Display
Numeric Display shows the current value of an 8/16/32-bit register. The value can be displayed using a number
of formats (i.e. signed, unsigned, floating point), and special effects (ex. flash, color, visibility). The numeric
display object supports linear scaling (engineering units) with the ability to scale the read value based upon two
mathematical operations. When a numeric display is on a screen of the HMC, the HMC continuously polls the
target register to show the current value.

Place a Numeric Display object on screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Display Objects > Data Display > Numeric Display from the standard menu
click Show Data > Numeric Display from the Draw toolbar
click the Numeric Display icon in the Objects toolbar

179
 • Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click to place the object on screen.
• The object appears on screen and the Register Value Display Data Properties box displays.

Register Value Display Data Properties Options

• Color Animation (see Feature List A) – dynamically change the color of the object.
• Flash Animation (List B) – dynamically ‘flash’ object.
• Visibility Animation (List C) – make the object disappear or become ‘invisible’.
• Background Color (List F) – option to select a color as a ‘backdrop’ to the object.
• Border (List G) – add a line around the perimeter of the object.
• Flash (List D) – continuously ‘flashes’ the object.
• Font – select from one of four options – 5x7, 7x14, 10x14, and 20x28 pixels.
• Format – select optional decimal point display and total number of digits to show.
Digits after Decimal Point – used to display the value in the target register with a decimal point.
Maximum of 10 digits.
Number of Digits – represents the total number of digits before and after the decimal point (if used).
Maximum of 10 digits.
• Text Color (List Kb) – Determines the color of the text. Click to display the color palette.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Display Data Properties – Address of target and special features.
Byte Order – determines how HMC interprets the order of data (word order) when Data Type is
ASCII or ASCII Numeric.
Data Type – options are:
Data Type Range
Target Address (2 Target Address (4 bytes)
bytes)
Unsigned 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295
Signed -32768 to 32767 -2147483648 to
2147483647
Hexadecimal 0000 to FFFF 0000 to FFFFFFFF
BCD1 0 to 9999 0 to 99999999
Binary 16 bits 16 bits
Floating Point2 NA Maximum of 9 digits
ASCII3 Max length is 255 Max length is 255 chars
chars
ASCII Numeric4 Max length is 10 Max length is 10 chars
chars
If the value in the monitored target register is not a valid BCD number, a dollar sign ‘$’ is displayed.
Floating Point format is based upon the IEEE 754 standard for 32-bit single precision numbers. A
maximum of nine digits is supported. Values are rounded to the nearest decimal point (ex: if Format:
Digits After Decimal Point is set to 1 digit, then floating point number 1.52 would be displayed as 1.5
and 1.56 would be displayed as 1.6).
ASCII format interprets the data value in each 16-bit register as two ASCII printable characters. Hex
values 0-9 are displayed as numbers 0-9, 0AF is displayed as small case decimal numbers, 20-FF are
printable ASCII characters. The HMC reads consecutive registers according to the Length field (ex: if
Length=10, then HMC will read five consecutive registers, starting with the designated Tag Address).

180
 ASCII Numeric is the same as ASCII except that all non-printable values are displayed as zeroes.
Display Leading Zeroes – when enabled, data has leading zeroes to the left of the value.
Hide Data – if enabled, data will be represented with asterisks ‘***’. This feature is for security
password entry.
Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of target register that is monitored.
Tag Name (List Qb) – this is the name given to the tagged register in the Tag Database.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.
• Operation – use this feature to perform a mathematical calculation on the object data.
First Operation – this is the first mathematical operation performed on the data object. Options are
NOP (no operation), addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*), and division (/).
First Operand – this constant value applies to the value in the targeted data object according to the
mathematical operand listed under First Operation.
Second Operation – this is the second mathematical operation performed on the data object.
Second Operand – this constant value applies to the computed value of the First Operation
according to the mathematical operand listed under Second Operation.

Resize a Numeric Display object

Resize the Numeric Display object by changing the Font attribute. You can also move this object.

Message Display
Message Display shows a predefined set of messages depending upon the value read in a targeted register.
Messages can be of varying length (max of 40 characters). Maximum number of messages is 255.
 Note: if the value read from the targeted register is not within any of the predefined ranges, then the
message displayed is blank. When a message data display is on a screen of the HMC, the HMC continuously polls
the target register.

Place a Message Display object on screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Display Objects > Data Display > Message Data from the standard menu
click Show Data > Message Data from the Draw toolbar
click the Message Display icon in the Objects toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click to place the object on screen.

181
 • The object appears on screen and the Register Text Display Data Properties box displays.

Register Text Display Data Properties Options

• Color Animation (see Feature List A) – dynamically change the color of the object
• Flash Animation (List B) – dynamically ‘flash’ object
• Visibility Animation (List C) – make the object disappear or become ‘invisible’
• Background Color (List F) – option to select a color as a ‘backdrop’ to the object
• Border (List G) – add a line around the perimeter of the object
• Flash (List D) – continuously ‘flashes’ the object
• Font (List I) – select from one of four options – 5x7, 7x14, 10x14, and 20x28 pixels.
• Text Color (List Kb) – Determines the color of the text. Click to display the color palette.
• Design (List S) – identifies object
• Display Data Properties – address of target
• Ranges – click the directory button to display the Register Text Range popup window
Register Text Range – Maximum of 255 ranges allowed. Enter the Low Limit and High Limit values (0
to 65535) and the text to display when the value read from the targeted register is within range.
Each text message has a maximum of 40 characters.

• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of target register that is monitored
• Tag Name (List Qb) – this is the name given to the tagged register in the Tag Database
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object

Resize a Message Display object

Resize the Message Display object by changing the Font attribute. You can also move this object.

182
Write Value to Tag
The Write Value to Tag button writes a predefined constant value to the target tag register each time the button
is pressed.

Place a Write Value to Tag button object on screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Buttons > Word Action > Write Value to Tag from the standard menu
click Quick Buttons > Write Value to Tag from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Write Value to Tag Properties box displays.

Write Value to Tag Properties Options

• Language (List J) – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text.
• Appearance Feedback Tag On/Off (List L) – select the On and/or Off labels.
• Button Style (List M) – selects a style or ‘look’ to the button.
• Feedback Tag (List N) – enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look).
• Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is ‘Yes’).
• Task (List O) – write Value to Tag (cannot be modified)
• Value (List P) – this is the constant value that is written to the Tag Address.

183
 • Value Data Type (List Pa) – select the data format used to write the value to the target register. Options
are unsigned, signed, hexadecimal, BCD, and binary.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.
• Tag Properties (List Q) – address of target to use.
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of the target bit/coil that is toggled.
• Tag Name (List Qb) – name assigned in the tag database to the target bit/coil.

Resize a Write Value to Tag button object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Add Value to Tag

The Add Value to Tag button adds a predefined constant value to the target tag register each time the button is
pressed. The HMC reads the current value in the register and then adds to this value the predefined constant.

How to place an Add Value to Tag button object on a screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Buttons > Word Action > Add Value to Tag from the standard menu
click Quick Buttons > Add Value to Tag from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Add Value to Tag Properties box displays.

Options available using the Add Value to Tag Properties dialog box
• Language (List J) – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text.
• Appearance Feedback Tag On/Off (List L) – select the On and/or Off labels.
• Button Style (List M) – selects a style or ‘look’ to the button.

184
 • Feedback Tag (List N) – Enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look).
• Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is set to ‘Yes’)
• Task (List O) – Add Constant Value to Tag (cannot be modified)
• Value (List P) – this is the constant value that is added to the Tag Address
• Value Data Type (List Pa) – select the data format used to add the value to the target register. Options
are unsigned, signed, hexadecimal, BCD, and binary.
• Design (List S) – identifies object
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object
• Tag Properties (List Q) – Address of target to use
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of the target bit/coil that is toggled
• Tag Name (List Qb) – name assigned in the tag database to the target bit/coil

Resize an Add Value to Tag button object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Subtract Value from Tag

The Subtract Value to Tag button subtracts a predefined constant value from the target tag register each time
the button is pressed. The HMC reads the current value in the register and then subtracts the predefined
constant from this value.

How to place a Subtract Value from Tag button object on a screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Buttons > Word Action > Subtract Value from Tag from the standard menu
click Quick Buttons > Subtract Value from Tag from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.

185
 • Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Subtract Value from Tag Properties box displays.

Options available using the Subtract Value from Tag Properties dialog box
• Language (List J) – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text.
• Appearance Feedback Tag On/Off (List L) – select the On and/or Off labels.
• Button Style (List M) – selects a style or ‘look’ to the button.
• Feedback Tag (List N) – enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look).
• Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is ‘Yes’).
• Task (List O) – subtract Constant Value from Tag (cannot be modified)
• Value (List P) – this is the constant value that is subtracted from the Tag Address
• Value Data Type (List Pa) – select the data format used to add the value to the target register. Options
are unsigned, signed, hexadecimal, BCD, and binary.
• Design (List S) – identifies object
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object
• Tag Properties (List Q) – address of target to use
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of the target bit/coil that is toggled
• Tag Name (List Qb) – name assigned in the tag database to the target bit/coil

Resize a Subtract Value from Tag button object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Add Tag B to Tag A

When pressed by the operator, causes HMC to read the current value in a defined register designated as Tag B
and then add this value to the current value in a targeted register designated as Tag A.

186
Place an Add Tag B to Tag A button object on screen
• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Buttons > Word Action > Add Tag B to Tag A from the standard menu
click Quick Buttons > Add Tag B to Tag A from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Add Tag B to Tag A Properties box displays.

Add Tag B to Tag A Properties Options

• Language (List J) – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text
• Appearance Feedback Tag On/Off (List L) – select the On and/or Off labels
• Button Style (List M) – selects a style or ‘look’ to the button
• Feedback Tag (List N) – enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look).
• Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is set to ‘Yes’).
• Tag A/B (List R) – the two target addresses used to add values
• Task (List O) – add Tag A to Tag B (cannot be modified)
• Design (List S) – identifies object
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object

Resize an Add Tag A to Tag B button object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Subtract Tag B from Tag A

When pressed by the operator, causes HMC to read the current value in a defined register designated as Tag B
and then subtract this value from the current value in a targeted register designated as Tag A.

187
Place a Subtract Tag B from Tag A button object on screen
• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Buttons > Word Action > Subtract Tag B from Tag A from the standard menu
click Quick Buttons > Subtract Tag B from Tag A from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Subtract Tag B from Tag A Properties box displays.

Subtract Tag B from Tag A Properties Options

• Language (List J) – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text
• Appearance Feedback Tag On/Off (List L) – select the On and/or Off labels
• Button Style (List M) – selects a style or ‘look’ to the button
• Feedback Tag (List N) – enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look).
• Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is set to ‘Yes’).
• Tag A/B (List R) – the two target addresses used to subtract values
• Task (List O) – subtract Tag B from Tag A (cannot be modified)
• Design (List S) – identifies object
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object

Resize a Subtract Tag B from Tag A button object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Numeric Entry
Numeric Entry shows the current value of an 8/16/32-bit register and allows the operator the ability to write a
new value. The value displays using a number of formats (i.e. signed, unsigned, floating point, and ASCII). The
numeric entry object supports linear scaling (engineering units) with the ability to scale the read value based
upon two mathematical operations. When a numeric entry is on a screen of the HMC, the HMC continuously

188
polls the target register to show the current value.

Place a Numeric Entry object on screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Input Objects > Data Entry > Numeric Entry from the standard menu
click Edit Data > Numeric Entry from the Draw toolbar
click the Numeric Entry Display icon in the Objects toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click to place the object on screen.
• The object appears on screen and the Register Data Entry Properties box displays.

Register Data Entry Properties Options

• Background Color (List F) – option to select a color as a ‘backdrop’ to the object.
• Border (List G) – add a line around the perimeter of the object.
• Font (List I) – select from one of four options – 5x7, 7x14, 10x14, and 20x28 pixels.
• Format: select optional decimal point display and total number of digits to show.
Digits after Decimal Point – used to display the value in the target register with a decimal point.
Maximum of 10 digits.
Number of Digits – represents the total number of digits before and after the decimal point (if used).
Maximum of 10 digits.
• Text Color (List Kb) – Determines the color of the text. Click to display the color palette.
• Data Entry Properties (List P) – address of target and special features
Byte Order – determines how HMC interprets the order of data (word order) when Data Type is
ASCII or ASCII Numeric

189
 Data Type – options are:
Data Type Range
Target Address (2 Target Address (4 bytes)
bytes)
Unsigned 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295
Signed -32768 to 32767 -2147483648 to
2147483647
Hexadecimal 0000 to FFFF 0000 to FFFFFFFF
BCD1 0 to 9999 0 to 99999999
Binary 16 bits 16 bits
Floating Point2 NA Maximum of 9 digits
ASCII3 Max length is 255 chars Max length is 255 chars
ASCII Numeric4 Max length is 10 chars Max length is 10 chars
If the value in the monitored target register is not a valid BCD number, a dollar sign ‘$’ is displayed.
Floating Point format is based upon the IEEE 754 standard for 32-bit single precision numbers. A
maximum of nine digits is supported. Values are rounded to the nearest decimal point (ex: if Format:
Digits after Decimal Point is set to 1 digit, then floating point number 1.52 would be displayed as 1.5
and 1.56 would be displayed as 1.6).
ASCII format interprets the data value in each 16-bit register as two ASCII printable characters. Hex
values 0-9 are displayed as numbers 0-9, 0AF is displayed as small case decimal numbers, 20-FF is
printable ASCII characters. The HMC reads consecutive registers according to the Length field (ex: if
Length=10, then HMC will read five consecutive registers, starting with the designated Tag Address).
ASCII Numeric is the same as ASCII except that all non-printable values are displayed as zeroes.
Enable Control Bit – if enabled, the HMC monitors the selected bit tag address. ‘0’ prevents a
new entry, ‘1’ allows normal editing by the operator.
Hide Data – if enabled, data will be represented with asterisks ‘***’. This feature used for
security password entry.
Keypad (List Pd) – selects using a popup keypad (Yes) or use a keypad on located on the same
screen (No)
Maximum/Minimum Value (List Pe) – select the limits that the operator enters as a valid
number
Screen Name/Number (List Pd) – determines which popup keypad to use
Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of target register that is monitored
Tag Name (List Qb) – this is the name given to the tagged register in the Tag Database.
• Design (List S) – identifies object
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object
• Operation – use this feature to perform a mathematical calculation on the object data.
First Operation – this is the first mathematical operation performed on the data object. Options are
NOP (no operation), addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*), and division (/).
First Operand – this constant value applies to the value in the targeted data object according to the
mathematical operand listed under First Operation.
Second Operation – this is the second mathematical operation performed on the data object.
Second Operand – this constant value applies to the computed value of the First Operation
according to the mathematical operand listed under Second Operation.

190
Resize a Numeric Entry object
Resize the Numeric Entry object by changing the Font attribute. You can also move this object.

Numeric Entry object and Popup Screens

The Numeric Entry object is not permitted on a popup screen – only base and template screens.

Advanced Objects
Several objects are available in the MAPware software that have advanced features such as executing multiple
tasks (Multi-Task buttons), downloading/uploading recipes, and representing data using easy-to-read graphs or
meters.

Multi-Task Single-State Button

The Multi-Task Single-State button performs a set of predefined tasks whenever the button is pressed. The
button displays with text labels or a graphic image that represents two states. When a Multi-Task Single-State
button is on screen, the HMC continuously polls the target bit register to determine which state to display
(feedback tag must be enabled to display two states).

Place a Multi-Task Single-State button on screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Buttons > Multi-Task Single-State Button from the standard menu
click Advanced Objects > Multi-Task Single-State Button from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Bit Button Properties box displays.

Multi-Task Single-State Button Properties Options

• Border (List G) – add a line around the perimeter of the object.
• Label (List H) – option to have a label appear on the top/bottom of the object.
• Language (List J) – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text.
• Appearance Feedback Tag On/Off (List L) – select the On and/or Off labels.
• Button Style (List M) – selects a style or ‘look’ to the button.
• Feedback Tag (List N) – Enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look).

191
 • Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is ‘Yes’).
• Tasks – this is the number of tasks performed whenever the button is pressed. Click to display the
Touch Screen Tasks List.

To add tasks, perform the following steps:

In the Tasks section, select which touchscreen action you wish to use for the task by clicking the
appropriate option. Options are Press Tasks, Pressed Tasks, and Released Tasks.
Press Tasks – tasks activate as soon as the touchscreen object is touched or pressed. Tasks
execute only once.
Pressed Tasks – these tasks continuously execute as long as the touchscreen button is pressed
and held down by the operator.
Released Tasks – these tasks execute after the operator releases the touched button object.
Select from the pull-down list box under Select Task and click the task you wish to perform (see
Chapter 6 – Task Management for a detailed description of what each task does).
If there are any additional parameters required for the task selected, enter the appropriate
information.
Click the Add button. This will add the selected task to the Tasks section.
 Note: to delete a task listed in the Tasks section, simply highlight the task and click the Delete
button on your computer keyboard. To modify a task listed in the Tasks section, highlight the task,
modify the parameters, and then click the Update button.
Click OK.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.

Resize a Multi-Task Single-State button object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

192
Multi-Task Multi-State Button
The Multi-Task Multi-State button performs a set of predefined tasks whenever the button is pressed. The tasks
performed depend upon which ‘state’ the button is in when pressed. This button is very similar in operation to
the Multi-Task Single-State button described above except that instead of a single state that performs a task(s),
you have the option of creating multiple states, each with a unique set of tasks. The button displays with text
labels or a graphic image to represent the states. Whenever the button is pressed, the object performs the
programmed tasks for that state. The HMC continuously monitors a target tag address to determine which state
the button is in.

Place a Multi-Task Multi-State button object on screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Buttons > Multi-Task Multi-State Button from the standard menu
click Advanced Objects > Multi-Task Multi-State Button from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Word Button Properties box displays.

Multi-Task Multi-State Button Properties Options

• Border (List G) – add a line around the perimeter of the object
• Label (List H) – option to have a label appear on the top/bottom of the object
• Language (List J) – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text.
• Design (List S) – identifies object
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object
• State Properties section – this section configures the tasks and number of states
• Current State – shows how the button looks for the currently selected state. Use the pull-down list box
(after you have configured the states using the State Properties attribute below) to change the state.
• Number Of States – shows the total number of states configured for this object.
 Note: this field cannot change (see State Properties below to add/delete states).

193
• State Properties – this field configures the states for this object. Click to display the State Properties
List.

The left side of the State Properties box shows all of the States currently configured. Each word
button has a maximum of 32 states.
Add State – click this button to add a new state (always appended to the bottom of the list)
Delete State – click one of the States in the list box to highlight and then click this button to
delete it.
 Note: when deleting a state that is in-sequence, all states listed after the selected states
renumber.
The right side of the State Properties box shows the configuration for the highlighted state.
Display Text – option to display text on the button for that state.
Text – label applied to that particular state. Default text is ‘Word Button’.
Font – the text attributes
Name – Type font used
Size: select font size
Bold: select ‘True’ to enable
Italic: select ‘True’ to enable
Underline: select ‘True’ to enable
Text Color – determines the text color. Click the button to display the color palette and select
a color.
Text Background Color – determines the fill or background color of the state. Click the button
to display the color palette and select a color.
Button Style – options are Generic Square, Circle, Rounded Rectangle, Invisible, User defined
Images, or From Picture Library.
Button Border Style – the style or appearance of the button. Options are Raised, Etched, Bump,
Sunken, Frame, Flat and None.
Low Limit – enter the minimum value associated with this particular state. Any value read from
the target PLC address that is within the Low Limit and High Limit will display this state.
High Limit – enter the maximum value associated with this particular state
Tasks – this is the number of tasks performed whenever the button is pressed. Click to
display the Touch Screen Tasks List.

194
 To add tasks, perform the following steps:
In the Tasks section, select which touchscreen action you wish to use for the task by clicking
the appropriate option. Options are Press Tasks, Pressed Tasks, and Released Tasks.
Press Tasks – tasks activate as soon as the touchscreen object is touched or pressed.
Tasks execute only once.
Pressed Tasks – tasks continuously execute as long as the touchscreen button is pressed
and held down by the operator.
Released Tasks – these tasks execute after the operator releases the touched button
object.
Select from the pull-down list box under Select Task and click the task you wish to perform
(see Chapter 6 – Task Management for a detailed description of what each task does).
If there are any additional parameters required for the task selected, enter the appropriate
information.
Click the Add button. This will add the selected task to the Tasks section.
 Note: to delete a task listed in the Tasks section, highlight the task and click the Delete
button on your computer keyboard. To modify a task listed in the Tasks section, highlight
the task, modify the parameters, and then click the Update button.
Click OK.
Click OK again to exit the State Properties dialog box and record changes.
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of the target register that is monitored by the HMC to
determine which state the object is in.
• Tag Name (List Qb) – name assigned in the tag database to the target register.

Resize a Multi-Task Multi-State button object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Bar Graph
The Bar Graph object represents values in an 8/16/32-bit register as a single bar chart whose proportional
length corresponds to the quantity in the register. A bar graph can be configured to move in any direction (i.e.
left to right, bottom to top, etc.) and monitor the target register as a signed/unsigned integer, BCD, or floating-

195
point value. You can also employ special effects such as dynamic fill color or visibility.

Place a Bar Graph object on screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Display Objects > Bar Graph from the standard menu
click Advanced Objects > Bar Graph from the Draw toolbar
click the Bar Graph icon in the Objects toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the bar graph object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the bar graph object and release. The object appears on screen
and the Bar Graph Properties box displays.

Bar Graph Properties Options

• Color Animation (see Feature List A) – dynamically change the color of the object
• Visibility Animation (List C) – make the object disappear or become ‘invisible’
• Fill Color – select the color that represents relative value in target register
• Line Color (List E) – sets color of the perimeter line
• Pattern – this is an option to use two colors for the fill color. The pattern determines how the two colors
show. Eight patterns are available. Click to display the pattern options.
• Pattern Color – Select the second fill color when using the pattern option above. Click to display the
color palette.
• Design (List S) – identifies object
• Graph Operation – settings for the graph object
• Data Type – options are:
Data Type Range
Target Address (2 Target Address (4 bytes)
bytes)
Unsigned 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295
Signed -32768 to 32767 -2147483648 to
2147483647
Hexadecimal 0000 to FFFF 0000 to FFFFFFFF
BCD1 0 to 9999 0 to 99999999
Binary 16 bits 16 bits
Floating Point2 NA Maximum of 9 digits

196
 If the value in the monitored target register is not a valid BCD number, a dollar sign ‘$’ is displayed.
Floating Point format is based upon the IEEE 754 standard for 32-bit single precision numbers. A
maximum of nine digits is supported. Values are rounded to the nearest decimal point (ex: if Format:
Digits after Decimal Point is set to 1 digit, then floating point number 1.52 would be displayed as 1.5
and 1.56 would be displayed as 1.6).
• Direction – determines in which direction the graph moves as it tracks the target value. Options are Left
to Right, Right to Left, Bottom to Top, and Top to Bottom.
• Maximum/Minimum Value (List Pe) – select the limits the bar graph uses to determine the relative level
of the graph. The maximum value is a completely filled bar graph. The minimum value is a bar graph
with no fill color shown.
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of target register that is monitored
• Tag Name (List Qb) – this is the name given to the tagged register in the Tag Database
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object
• Maximum Value – the type selector allows the choice between number (constant) and tag to provide
the maximum value of the bar graph
• Minimum Value – the type selector allows the choice between number (constant) and tag to provide the
minimum value of the bar graph

Resize a Bar Graph object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Multiple Bar Graphs

The Multiple Bar Graph object represents up to four consecutive 8/16/32-bit registers as a bar chart whose
proportional lengths correspond to the quantity in each register. A multiple bar graph can move in any direction
(i.e. left to right, bottom to top, etc.) and monitor the target registers as signed/unsigned integer, BCD, or
floating point values. The Multiple Bar Graph object supports title bars, selectable colors, and number

197
designators along the Y-axis.

Place a Multiple Bar Graph object on screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Display Objects > Multiple Bar Graphs from the standard menu
click Advanced Objects > Multiple Bar Graphs from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the Multiple Bar Graphs object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the Multiple Bar Graphs object and release. The object appears
on screen and the Multiple Bar Graphs Properties box displays.

Multiple Bar Graph Properties Options

• Visibility Animation (List C) – make the object disappear or become ‘invisible’
• Appearance section – these attributes determine the general look of the bar graph
• Bar Spacing – determines the number of pixels between each bar graph
• Bar Width – determines the pixel width of each bar graph.
 Note: the bar width and bar spacing for each bar graph cannot exceed 68 pixels.
• Bar Graph Background Color – determines the background color of the graph. Click the button to
display the color palette and select a color.
• Border – optional line around the periphery of the bar chart

198
• Data Type – options are:
Data Type Range
Target Address (2 Target Address (4
bytes) bytes)
Unsigned 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295
Signed -32768 to 32767 -2147483648 to
2147483647
Hexadecimal 0000 to FFFF 0000 to FFFFFFFF
BCD1 0 to 9999 0 to 99999999
Floating Point2 NA Maximum of 9 digits
If the value in the monitored target register is not a valid BCD number, a dollar sign ‘$’ is displayed.
Floating Point format is based upon the IEEE 754 standard for 32-bit single precision numbers. A
maximum of nine digits is supported. Values are rounded to the nearest decimal point (ex: if Format:
Digits After Decimal Point is set to 1 digit, then floating point number 1.52 would be displayed as 1.5
and 1.56 would be displayed as 1.6) shows the current state displayed on the Multiple Bar Graphs
for editing
• Label – option to have a text label appear on the top/bottom of the bar graph chart. Click ‘Yes’ to
enable.
Label Background Color – determines the fill or background color of the label. Click the button to
display the color palette and select a color.
Label Text Font – determines the font type, size, etc.
Name – Type font used
Size – select font size
Bold – select ‘True’ to enable
Italic – select ‘True’ to enable
Underline – select ‘True’ to enable
Label Position – select top or bottom.
Label Text – enter the text to appear in the label
Label Text Color – determines the text color of the label. Click the button to display the color
palette and select a color
• Language (List J) – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text.
• Style – determines in which direction the graph moves as it tracks the target values. Options are Left to
Right, Right to Left, Bottom to Top, and Top to Bottom.
• Axis Attributes section – select the options that affect how the Y (vertical) axis displays
• Axis – option to enable/disable the display of a Y-axis
• Axis Color – Select the color used for the Y-axis and number titles. Click to display the color palette.
• Display Division Properties – configure the major/minor division scale points of the axis.
Major Division – these are the number of major ‘ticks’.
 Note: does not include the baseline (0 axis), minimum value must be 1.
Minor Division – these are the number of minor ‘ticks’ per major division.
 Note: if minor divisions are not required, select 1
• Display Divisions – option to display the major/minor division scales
• Display Range – option to display a number scale along the Y-axis

199
 • Display Range –
Maximum – sets the maximum value that appears at the top of the scale
 Note: the range allowed depends upon the Data Type selected in the Appearance section (for
negative numbers, you must select Signed or Float)
Minimum – sets the minimum value that appears at the bottom of the scale
• Label – option to display a heading at the top of the Y-axis
Label Background Color – determines the fill or background color of the Y-axis label. Click the
button to display the color palette and select a color.
Label Text – enter the text to appear in the Y-axis label
Label Text Color – determines the text color of the label. Click the button to display the color
palette and select a color.
• Bar Attributes – select number of bars, colors, etc.
• Number of Bars – range is 1 to 4 bars. Each bar will correspond to a particular tag register as determined
by the Tag Address field below.
• Bar Selected – select the bar you wish to modify/edit using the pull-down box
• Bar Value – this is the height of the selected bar with respect to the other bars in the bar graph (i.e. 100
= 100%, 50 = 50%, etc.). This value shows only when displaying the graph in MAPware; it has no affect
during runtime.
• Fill Color – the fill color of the selected bar. Click the button to display the color palette and select a
color.
• Label – option to display a text label underneath the selected bar
• Label Text Color – the text color of the label for the selected bar. Click the button to display the color
palette and select a color.
• Line Color – the color of the line that encloses the selected bar. Click the button to display the color
palette and select a color.
• Maximum Value – the maximum value read from the target register that indicates the selected bar is
completely full
• Minimum Value – the minimum value that indicates the selected bar is empty
• Maximum/Minimum Value (List Pe) – select the limits the bar graph uses to determine the relative level
of the graph. The maximum value completely fills bar graph. The minimum value represents no fill color.
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of target register monitored
• Tag Name (List Qb) – name given to the tagged register in the tag database
• Design (List S) – identifies object
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object

Resize a Multiple Bar Graph object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Analog Meter
The Analog Meter object represents an 8/16/32-bit register as an analog meter whose angle corresponds to the
quantity in a register. The analog meter object supports configurable start/stop angles, scaling label, and
multiple color segments. The target register is monitored as a signed/unsigned integer, BCD, or floating-point

200
value. The Analog Meter object supports titles, selectable colors, and number designators.

Place an Analog Meter object on screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Display Objects > Meter from the standard menu
click Advanced Objects > Analog Meter from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the Analog Meter object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the Analog Meter object and release. The object appears on
screen and the Analog Meter Properties box displays.

Options available using the Analog Meter Properties dialog box

• Visibility Animation (List C) – make the object disappear or become ‘invisible’
• Appearance section – these attributes determine the general look of the meter
• Color Patch Properties – use this attribute to determine the colors of each section “patch” of the meter
and the high/low limit for each patch. The meter may have as few as one color or as many as five. Color
is used to indicate ‘safe’ zones, ‘danger’ zones, or other designators.
• Color Patches – indicates number of color patch segments. To change the total number, edit the Color
Patch Properties (see above).
• Label – option to have a text label appear on the top/bottom of the analog meter.
Label Background Color – determines the fill or background color of the label. Click the button to
display the color palette and select a color.
Label Position – select top or bottom.
Label Text – enter the text to appear in the label.

201
 Label Text Color – determines the text color of the label. Click the button to display the color
palette and select a color.
Label Text Font – determines the font type, size, etc.
Name – Type font used
Size: select font size
Bold: select ‘True’ to enable
Italic: select ‘True’ to enable
Underline: select ‘True’ to enable.
• Language (List J) – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text.
• Simulation Value – this positions the location of the needle during simulation. Value entered should be
between the Minimum/Maximum Display Range set.
• Appearance – Meter Background
Meter Background – disable if you wish to display no background (i.e. arc line, color segments, and
number axis), only the needle indicator.
Meter Background Color – select the background color of the meter.
Meter Fill Color – this is the small ‘pie-shaped’ section directly below the arc line. Select the fill color
using the color palette chart.
Meter Style – options are Advanced, Custom Meter and D-Meter.
 Note: the D Meter is the same as the Custom Meter with the Start Angle set to 0° and the End
Angle set to 180°. Select custom meter option to change the starting and ending angles. In the
advanced option the meter fills more of the space used by the object and the Angle Style property
(see below) can be used to configure the appearance.
Needle Color – click the button to display the color palette and select a color for the needle.
• Appearance – Meter Foreground
Display Range – option to display the number axis
Divisions – configure the major/minor division scale points of the axis.
Major Division – these are the number of major ‘ticks’.
 Note: does not include the baseline (0 axis), minimum value must be 1.
Minor Division – these are the number of minor ‘ticks’ per major division.
 Note: if minor divisions are not required, select 1.
Maximum Display Range – sets the maximum value that will appear at the right of the number scale.
 Note: the range allowed depends upon the Data Type selected in the Operation section (for
negative numbers, you must select Signed or Float)
Minimum Display Range – sets the minimum value that will appear at the left of the scale.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.
• Operation – these are the parameters for the start/end angles of the meter and the target tag address.
• Angle – End – This is the relative location of the maximum angle on the analog meter. Number is in
degrees with reference to 0° located at the leftmost position on the analog meter.
• Angle – Start – This is the relative location of the minimum angle on the meter. Number is in degrees
with reference to 0° location.
• Angle – Style – This provides a window of preconfigured Start and End angles to use with a meter in the
Advance Meter style. Click the ellipse button to get a popup window and select from the various
options:

202
 Click the desired style to select it, the Angle – End and Angle – Start properties are automatically
updated when the selection is made.
• Data Type – options are:
Data Type Range
Target Address (2 Target Address (4
bytes) bytes)
Unsigned 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295
Signed -32768 to 32767 -2147483648 to
2147483647
Hexadecimal 0000 to FFFF 0000 to FFFFFFFF
BCD1 0 to 9999 0 to 99999999
Floating Point2 NA Maximum of 9 digits
If the value in the monitored target register is not a valid BCD number, a dollar sign ‘$’ is displayed.
Floating Point format is based upon the IEEE 754 standard for 32-bit single precision numbers. A
maximum of nine digits is supported. Values are rounded to the nearest decimal point (ex: if Format:
Digits After Decimal Point is set to 1 digit, then floating point number 1.52 would be displayed as 1.5
and 1.56 would be displayed as 1.6) shows the current state displayed on the Multiple Bar Graphs
for editing.
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of target register that is continuously read by the HMC to
determine the analog meter needle position.
• Tag Name (List Qb) – this is the name given to the tagged register in the tag database
• Value Start/End (List Pe) – select the limits that are used by the analog meter to show the relative level
of the meter. The maximum value has the needle indicator in the maximum position. The minimum
value has the needle in the minimum position.

Resize an Analog Meter object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

203
Keypads

Popup Keypads
A popup keypad is any keypad that appears automatically when you click into a Numeric Entry Object. To get the
popup keypad to appear, you must enable the Keypad option in the Data Entry Properties section of the
Numeric Entry object.

During operation, simply touch the Numeric Entry object. This will cause your popup keypad to display
immediately in the upper left corner of the display. The current value of the target register shows in the entry
area.

Use the keypad to enter a new number, then press the ENTER key. The new value writes to the target register
and the popup keypad disappears. Pressing the close window icon on the keypad removes the keypad
without making any changes to the value.
 Note: there is no way to move the popup keypad to a new location on the screen once displayed. Therefore,
if you wish to have the keypad appear in a different location when called, create a new keypad and use the X, Y

204
coordinates of the screen to place the keypad at the location you desire.

Then reference this keypad in the Register Data Entry Properties dialog box of the target register in the Screen
Name/Number attribute fields.

During operation, the popup keypad appears in the desired location:

On Screen Keypads
Rather than use the popup keypad feature, there may be an instance where you would prefer to have the
keypad always shown (perhaps to make it obvious to the operator that entry is allowed). To use an on-screen

205
keypad, first disable the popup keypad option in the Numeric Entry object by selecting No in the Keypad field.

Next, place one of the predefined keypads (see sections below) or a custom keypad of your own design on the
screen.

During operation, using an on-screen keypad differs slightly from using a popup keypad. To initiate entering a
new number simply click anywhere on the keypad not on the Numeric Entry Object. This causes the last digit of
the Numeric Entry object to blink with an underline, indicating that you are now in ‘entry’ mode.

Use the keypad to enter the new number, then press the ENTER button to send the new value to the target
register. If you wish to cancel the entry, you must first click the Clear (CLR) button, then press the ENTER button.
If you have multiple Numeric Entry objects on the same screen, and you are using an on-screen keypad, the
keypad will target each object in sequence, starting with the object that has the lowest Design ID number
assigned during project configuration.

206
Predefined Numeric Keypads
The MAPware software offers many predefined numeric keypads that popup when using a Numeric Entry or Bit
Entry object or can also display on screen. These keypads offer various styles to customize for the particular
needs of the project.

How to place a Numeric Keypad object on a screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Input Objects > Keypad from the standard menu
click Advanced Objects > Keypad from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the upper left corner of the keypad object. Click the mouse cursor
to place the object onto the screen.
• The keypad appears on screen and the Keypad Properties box displays.

Options available using the Keypad Properties dialog box

• Background Color (List F) – option to select a color as a ‘backdrop’ to the object
• Border (List G) – add a line around the perimeter of the object
• Key Spacing Horizontal – this attribute determines the number of pixels between each key along the
horizontal axis. Range is 6 to 43 pixels.
 Note: the overall width of the keypad determines the width of each key. Therefore, to adjust the size
of the keys, you must change the size of the overall keypad.
• Key Spacing Vertical – this attribute determines the number of pixels between each key along the
vertical axis. Range is 6 to 49 pixels.
 Note: the overall height of the keypad determines the height of each key. Therefore, to adjust the
size of the keys, you must change the size of the overall keypad.
• Keypad Style – there are eight options to the arrangement of the numeric keys:

207
Standard 10-key entry pad with negative entry key (default)

Standard 10-key entry pad

Hexadecimal entry pad with negative entry key

Hexadecimal entry pad with digit entry keys

Increment/Decrement entry pad

Simple increment/decrement by digit entry pad with Clear key

Simple increment/decrement by digit entry pad

208
 On/Off entry pad

• Label (List H) – option to have a label appear on the top/bottom of the object
• Label Background Color – select the background color. Click to display the color palette.
• Label Font (List I) – configure how you wish the label text to appear
• Label Text – the text that appears in the label. Maximum of 21 characters allowed.
• Label Text Color – select the label text color. Click to display the color palette.
• Language (List J) – configure displayed text for up to 9 languages per object.
• Show Value Display – this option is set to ‘No’ and cannot change.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.
• Keys Properties – select the ‘style’ and function of selected key.
• Back Color – select the background color of the button. Click to display the color palette.
• Display Text – option to display text on the button.
• Keypad Key Task – select from the pull-down list box which function (i.e. display a number, control key,
etc.) the selected button has:
Numeric Key 0-9, A-F – used to enter decimal and/or hexadecimal numbers.
Shift Value to Left – essentially this multiplies the value by 10 each time this key is pressed.
Move Cursor to Left, Move Cursor to Right keys – use these keys to move the focus cursor to the left
or right by one digit. This allows you to change each digit of a number during entry without the need
to clear the entry and start over.
Increase Digit by 1, Decrease Digit by 1 keys – these keys will increment or decrement the digit that
is currently highlighted by the focus cursor.
 Note: if digit 0 is displayed, pressing the Decrease by 1 key will change this digit to 9. Similarly, if
digit 9 is displayed, pressing the Increase Digit by 1 key will change the digit from 9 to 0.
Increase Value by 1, Decrease Value by 1 keys – these keys will increment or decrement the value or
number that is currently entered by one.
Sign Key (+/-) and Sign Key (+/-) and 0 keys – use these keys to change the sign (positive or negative)
of the number entered. The Sign Key with 0 adds a little twist – if the key is pressed more than once,
it will add 0s to the right of the number entered.
 Note: for these keys to work, you must use configure the target Numeric Entry register with Data
Type of Signed.
Clear Data Entry – when pressed, this key clears the entire entry and starts over.
Cancel Data Entry – this key exits data entry mode without making any changes to the value of the
target register.
Accept Data Entry – this key writes the entered keypad value to the target register.
Switch to Next Data Entry – if you have multiple Numeric/Coil Entry registers on the screen, this key
will move the focus of the keypad between registers.
Turn Bit On, Turn Bit Off keys – use these keys to set (1) or clear (0) a Bit Data register.
• Style (List M) – select a style or ‘look’ to the button.

Standard Key Sample:

209
 Large Key Sample:

Corner Key Sample:

Double Key Sample:

• Text (List K) – the text that appears in the button. The overall size of the keypad and the font used
determines the maximum number of characters.
• Text Color (List Kb) – determines the color of the text. Click to display the color palette.

Resize a Keypad object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.
 Note that if you resize the keypad to a point at which the buttons are too small, then an error message
displays.

Predefined ASCII Keypads (Alphanumeric)

The MAPware software offers two predefined ASCII keypads that popup when using a Numeric Entry or Bit Entry
object or can display on screen. These keypads offer various styles to customize for the particular needs of the
project.

How to place an ASCII Keypad object on a screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Input Objects > ASCII Keypad from the standard menu
click Advanced Objects > ASCII Keypad from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the upper left corner of the keypad object. Click the mouse cursor
to place the object onto the screen.
• The keypad appears on screen and the ASCII Keypad Properties box displays.

Options available using the ASCII Keypad Properties dialog box

• Background Color (List F) – option to select a color as a ‘backdrop’ to the object.
• Border (List G) – add a line around the perimeter of the object.
• Key Spacing Horizontal – this attribute determines the number of pixels between each key along the
horizontal axis. Value is set to 2 and cannot be changed.
 Note: the overall width of the keypad determines the width of each key. Therefore, to adjust the size
of the keys, you must change the size of the overall keypad.
• Key Spacing Vertical – this attribute determines the number of pixels between each key along the
vertical axis. Value is set to 2 and cannot be changed.
 Note: the overall height of the keypad determines the height of each key. Therefore, to adjust the
size of the keys, you must change the size of the overall keypad.
• Keypad Style – there are two options to the arrangement of the numeric keys:

210
 Standard 7x8 (56 keys) with upper/lower case (default)

10-key entry pad

• Label (List H) – option to have a label appear on the top/bottom of the object.
• Label Background Color – select the background color. Click to display the color palette.
• Label Font (List I) – configure how you wish the label text to appear
• Label Text – the text that appears in the label. Maximum of 21 characters allowed.
• Label Text Color – select the label text color. Click to display the color palette.
• Language (List J) – configure displayed text for up to 9 languages per object.
• Show Value Display – this option is set to ‘No’ and cannot change.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.
• Keys Properties – select the ‘style’ and function of selected key.
• Key Background Color – select the background color of the button. Click to display the color palette.
• Key Text Color: determines the color of the text. Click to display the color palette.

Resize an ASCII Keypad object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Creating a Custom Keypad

In addition to the predefined keypads, the custom keypad object allows you to create a keypad specific to your
needs.

How to place a Custom Keypad object on a screen

• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Input Objects > Custom Keypad from the standard menu
click Advanced Objects > Custom Keypad from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the upper left corner of the keypad object. Click the mouse cursor
to place the object onto the screen.
• The keypad appears on screen and the Custom Keypad Properties box displays.

Options available using the Custom Keypad Properties dialog box

• Design (List S) – identifies object
• Keypad Properties – these are the general properties of the keypad as a whole

211
 • Background Color (List F) – option to select a color as a ‘backdrop’ to the object
• Key Spacing Horizontal – this attribute determines the number of pixels between each key along the
horizontal axis. Range is 6 to 49 pixels.
 Note: the overall width of the keypad determines the width of each key. Therefore, to adjust the size
of the keys, you must change the size of the overall keypad.
• Key Spacing Vertical – this attribute determines the number of pixels between each key along the
vertical axis. Range is 6 to 49 pixels.
 Note: the overall height of the keypad determines the height of each key. Therefore, to adjust the
size of the keys, you must change the size of the overall keypad.
• Keypad Type – there are two options to the type of keypad used. Numeric is for data entry and ASCII is
for entering alphanumeric characters.
• Label (List H) – option to have a label appear on the top/bottom of the object
• Label Background Color – select the background color. Click to display the color palette.
• Label Font Color – configure the color of the label text. Click to display the color palette.
• Label Text – the text that appears in the label. Maximum of 21 characters allowed.
• Language (List J) – configure displayed text for up to 9 languages per object
• No. of Columns – select the number of key button columns. Range is 1 to 10.
• No. of Rows – select the number of key button rows. Range is 1 to 10.
• Show Value Display – this option is set to ‘No’ and cannot change
• Keys Properties – select the ‘style’ and function of selected key
• Key Background Color – select the background color of the button. Click to display the color palette.
• Key Text – option to display text on the button
• Key Text Color – configure the color of the button text. Click to display the color palette.
• Keypad Numeric Key Task – select from the pull-down list box which function (i.e. display a number,
control key, etc.) the selected button has (see Numeric and ASCII section for more details).
• Merge Keys – combine two keys together to form one function. This ensures that there is no space
between the two keys which, when pressed, does not do anything.
• Show Key – option to make key invisible and inactive
• Show Key Text – option to display the configured Key Text on the button. With this option, you can use
the Key Text field to create a description of the button without having the description displayed.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object

Resize a Custom Keypad object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Recipes
Recipes are preconfigured values that are either uploaded from the PLC into the HMC or downloaded from the
HMC into the PLC. The advantage of using recipes is in batch processing applications in which a series of unique
values or set points are required to produce or perform an operation. If there are several different batches or
recipes, then the recipe features makes it easier for the plant floor operator to select which recipe they need for
the current job, downloaded the preset values to the PLC from the HMC with the press of a button, and start the
job.

212
34 ► There are several steps required to set up a recipe using the MAPware software:
1. Configure the tag registers that will be used for the source registers (registers that are used to store the
preset values) and the target registers (register that receive the preset values when the operator
presses a button on the HMC screen). Use the Tag Database to configure these registers.
2. Configure a screen that is used to enter the preset values into the source registers. Preferably, the
source registers should be registers that reside in non-volatile memory (i.e. R registers in HMC memory).
3. Create a Transfer/Upload Recipe button and configure the target and source tag addresses and how
many consecutive register to transfer/upload.

Transfer Recipe
The Transfer Recipe button is used to copy predefined constant values from a consecutive set of internal HMC
memory tag addresses to a set of PLC memory tag addresses. Up to 100 values can be transferred per button
created.

Place a Transfer Recipe button object on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Buttons > Recipe > Transfer Recipe from the standard menu
Click Advanced Objects > Buttons > Recipe > Transfer Recipe from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Transfer Recipe Properties box displays.

Transfer Recipe Properties Options

• Language (List J) – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text.
• Appearance Feedback Tag On/Off (List L) – select the On and/or Off labels
• Button Style (List M) – selects a style or ‘look’ to the button
• Feedback Tag (List N) – Enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look).

213
 • Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is set to ‘Yes’).
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.
• Recipe – Address of source and target registers to use.
• No of Tags – enter the number of preset constant values (registers) that are transferred from the source
address to the target address. Range is 1 to 100.
• Tag A (PLC/HMC-D) – name assigned in the tag database to the target register. This is the address of the
target register(s) that the recipe preset values are transferred to.
 Note: if the value in No of Tags is greater than 1, you must make sure that there are an equivalent
number of consecutive tag registers available for the transfer.
• Tag A (PLC/HMC-D) Address – this is the address of the target register(s).
• Tag B (HMC-D) – name assigned in the tag database to the source register. This is the address of the
source register(s) that the recipe preset values transfer from.
 Note: if the value in No of Tags is greater than 1, you must make sure that there are an equivalent
number of consecutive tag registers available for the transfer.
• Tag B (PLC/HMC-D) Address – this is the address of the source register(s).

Resize a Transfer Recipe button object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Upload Recipe
The Upload Recipe button copies predefined constant values from a consecutive set of PLC memory tag
addresses to a set of internal HMC memory tag addresses. Up to 100 values can transfer per button created.

Place an Upload Recipe button object on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Buttons > Recipe > Upload Recipe from the standard menu
Click Advanced Objects > Buttons > Recipe > Upload Recipe from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the button object. Click and hold mouse cursor.

214
 • Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the button object and release. The button appears on screen and
the Upload Recipe Properties box displays.

Upload Recipe Properties Options

• Language (List J) – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text.
• Appearance Feedback Tag On/Off (List L) – select the On and/or Off labels.
• Button Style (List M) – select a style or ‘look’ to the button.
• Feedback Tag (List N) – Enable this feature and select the same tag for both the target address and the
feedback tag address, if you wish to see the button change state (i.e. go from an ‘off’ or untouched look
to an ‘on’ or touched look).
• Simulation (List Nc) – select ‘On/Off’ to see how button looks in that state (only available if Feedback Tag
is set to ‘Yes’).
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.
• Recipe – Address of source and target registers to use.
• No of Tags – enter the number of preset constant values (registers) that are uploaded from the source
address to the target address. Range is 1 to 100.
• Tag A (HMC-D) – name assigned in the tag database to the target register. This is the address of the
target register(s) in the HMC that the recipe preset values are uploaded to.
 Note: if the value in No of Tags is greater than 1, you must make sure that there are an equivalent
number of consecutive tag registers available for the upload.
• Tag A (HMC-D) Address – this is the address of the target register(s).
• Tag B (PLC) – name assigned in the tag database to the source register. This is the address of the source
register(s) in the PLC that the recipe preset values are uploaded from.
 Note: if the value in No of Tags is greater than 1, you must make sure that there are an equivalent
number of consecutive tag registers available for the upload.
• Tag B (PLC) Address – this is the address of the source register(s).

Resize an Upload Recipe button object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Recipe Database
The Recipe Database is a feature supported on the HMC2000, HMC3000 (Only IEC) and HMC4000 series and is
available in MAPware-7000 v2.36 and newer. It is not available on the HMC7000. This feature allows a recipe
database to be configured so that recipe data can be stored locally on the HMC.

Configuring the Recipe Database

Navigate to Define > Recipe Configuration… to open the Recipe Configuration window. In the Recipe
Configuration window, select “Enable Recipe” and “Set default tags” to assign the Display/Edit, Search and
Load/Save fields to the default tags that currently reside in the Tag Database.

215
Recipe Groups
A recipe group is like a table of recipes. A maximum of 16 groups can be configured in the Recipe Database, each
with their own set of recipes. Groups can be identified by their name and/or number. The number of recipes and
elements can vary between groups. Add or remove groups by changing the “No of groups” value. Switch
between groups by selecting a different number in the “Group Number” dropdown.
Recipes
Recipes are like the rows within a table or group. Elements are the columns or attributes that define the table.
Up to 256 recipes can be defined per group, with a maximum of 256 elements per recipe. Recipes can be
identified and searched for by their name or number. In the Recipe table, assign Display/Edit tags and Recipe
tags as well as the datatype for each element:

Display/Edit tags: These are the tags through which the recipe element value should be modified at runtime.
Recipe Tags: These are the tags for the tags for the current recipe being used in a process.

216
Display/Edit Tags
The Display/Edit tags are the tags through which the recipe values should be modified, while the Recipe Tags are
the tags that contain the values of the recipe currently being used in a process. The Display/Edit tags allow
recipes to be modified without interfering with the current recipe that is being referenced by some process.

Recipe No Display Tag

This tag contains the number of the recipe that currently resides in the Display/Edit Tags.

Recipe Name Display/Edit Tag

This tag contains the name of the recipe that currently resides in the Display/Edit Tags.

Group No Display Tag

This tag contains the number of the group that currently resides in the Display/Edit Tags.

Group Name Display/Edit Tag

This tag contains the name of the group that currently resides in the Display/Edit Tags.

Recipe Status Tag

This tag contains a numeric value representing the status of changes made to a recipe:
Recipe Status Codes
0 : Idle
1 : Group Not Found
2 : Recipe Not Found
3 : Recipe Found
4 : Load Success
5 : Display/Edit Save Success
6 : Load Fail
7 : Display/Edit Save Fail
8 : Recipe Save Success
9 : Recipe Save Fail
10 : Recipe Name Duplicate
11 : Group Name Duplicate

217
How to Search for a Recipe
Recipe feature comes with two search options
1. Search by Number
2. Search by Name

Set the binary state of the “Search Group by Number/Name Tag” to search for a recipe group by Number or
Name at runtime.
0 : Group Search By Number
1 : Group Search By Name

Set the binary state of the “Search Recipe by Number/Name Tag” for searching recipe by Number or Name at
runtime.
0 : Recipe Search By Number
1 : Recipe Search By Name

Now use “Group Number Tag” or “Group Name Tag” and “Recipe Number Tag” or “Recipe Name Tag” for
searching particular recipe.
Once the user updates the Recipe Search tags, the respective recipe is searched for and if it is valid, the element
values are updated into the Display/Edit tags.

How to Modify and Save a Recipe

Recipe values can be modified through the “Display/Edit tags” and saved back to the Recipe table by setting the
“Display/Edit Save Tag” to high.
Data in the “Recipe Tags” can also be saved to the Recipe Table by setting the “Recipe Save Tag” to high.

Recipe Name Edit at Runtime

After searching for a recipe from particular group, it is possible to edit the Recipe Name in the “Recipe Name
Display/Edit Tag” and can save the name by setting “Display/Edit Save Tag” or “Recipe Save Tag” to High.
Validation for duplication of a Recipe Name in a Group is implemented. If a recipe with same name is present in
a group then the “Recipe Status Tag” value will be updated to “10” to indicate a recipe name duplication.
If Recipe with same name is not present in a group then a normal save operation will happen as per the saving
event selected (Display/Edit Save - 5 and Recipe Save - 8).

Group Name Edit at Runtime

After searching for a particular group, it is possible to edit the Group Name in the “Group Name Display/Edit
Tag” and can save the name by setting “Display/Edit Save Tag” or “Recipe Save Tag” to High.
Validation for Duplication of Group Name in Groups is implemented. If a Group with same name is present in in
the Recipe Database then the “Recipe Status Tag” value will be updated to “11” to indicate a group name
duplication.
If Group with same name is not present in groups then normal save operation will happen as per saving event
selected (Display / Edit Save- 5 and Recipe Save- 8).

218
 Add or Remove a Recipe/Group at Runtime
Currently it is not possible to add or remove a recipe or group at runtime, only modify the values of existing
recipes and groups.

Import/Export the Recipe Database

The Recipe Database can be exported or imported as a .CSV file. If you need to make significant changes to the
database, you may want to export it and make the changes in Excel, then re-import the database.

Multi-Language Feature
The multi-Language feature enables the programmer to configure the project for use in many countries around
the world that may use a different language. You can configure each object or text box with multiple labels, each
designed for a unique language. During operation of the HMC, display a screen that allows the operator to select
which language he prefers to use. Once selected, all of the objects and text boxes immediately depict the
appropriate label. Up to nine separate languages are available per project.

How to Configure Languages

To use the multi-Language feature in MAPware, you must first configure which languages are available for your
project. To do this, open your project and click the Languages folder located in the Project Information Window
(or click Define > Languages from the Standard menu):

35  Note: if you do not see any language options in the Installed Languages options box, you must first make
additional languages available using the appropriate settings in your Windows operating system. For Windows
10, follow these steps:
1. Click the Start program button on the Windows Task Bar
2. Click the Settings button
3. Click Time & Language

219
 4. Click Region & Language or just Language
5. Choose a language from the Windows display language menu or under Preferred languages.
6. Select Add a language to install the one you want if it isn’t listed.
7. Select the Input Languages you wish to use and configure which Keyboard Layout you wish to assign to
each language
8. When done, you should now see these languages listed in MAPware.
If you see several languages listed in the Installed Languages options box in the Languages folder, simply click a
language and click the Add button to add the language to the Selected Languages (Max 9) options box in the
right column.
Check the box associated with each language to use the keyboard layout assigned to the language in the
Windows Language Options settings in Control Panel. Notice that the number assigned to the left of each
language is the number to enter into control register SW0001 to make all objects use the label created for the
selected language. A maximum of nine languages can be assigned. Click the OK button when you have finished
creating the list of languages you wish to have supported in your project.

Displaying Multiple Languages in Unit

Once you have created your list of languages using the steps described in the last section, you can now
assign/create a label for each available language for your selected object(s). The example below illustrates using
the multi-Language feature on a Multilingual Text object.
36 ► How to assign language labels to a Multilingual Text object on a screen
1. Place a Multilingual Text object on a screen.
2. In the Multilingual Text Properties box, click the Language attribute box.
3. Click the pull-down box and select which language you wish to edit.
4. Click the Text attribute box and enter the text for the selected language.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have entered the required text for each language.
In addition to creating objects that use multiple language labels (see above), you also need to create an object
on an HMC screen that displays the correct language. Do this by writing a constant value (1-9) to an internal
memory register (SW0001) in the HMC. This is done in two ways:

• Use a series of Write Value to Tag button objects, each configured to change to a specific state (i.e.
English, Spanish, etc.)
• Use a single Word button object that steps through each language each time it is pressed.
37 ► How to display each language label during runtime (using Write Value to Tag button)
1. Configure the languages you wish to use in the Languages folder.
2. Configure the objects that you wish to display the various language labels.
3. Create a screen that changes the language.
4. Add a Write Value to Tag button on the screen.
5. Select Tag Address SW0001 as the target.
6. Enter the value as 1 to 9, depending upon the language you wish to display (see Languages folder for
listing).
7. Option: create On Text label that identifies which language displays if button is pressed.
 Note: Remember to copy this label for each Language state so that it displays no matter which
language is currently active.
8. Repeat steps 4-6 for each language that you wish to display.

220
38 ► How to display each language label during runtime (using Word button)
1. Configure the languages you wish to use in the Languages folder.
2. Configure the objects that you wish to display the various language labels.
3. Create a screen that changes the language.
4. Add a Word button on the screen and go to the Word Button Properties dialog box.
5. Select Tag Address SW0001 as the target.
6. Click the State Properties (Collection) button to display the State Properties dialog box.

7. For each state:

Put the name of the language that is represented for that state (ex. State 3 language is French)
Set the Low Limit and High Limit to equal the State number.
Click the Tasks List to create a task:

Click Press Tasks

Under Select Task, click Write Value to Tag.
For Tag, select SW0001 (Language)
Under Number, enter the next number in sequence. For example, if the current State you are
configuring were State 3, then you would enter 4.
 Note: for the last state, you would enter 1 to cycle back to the beginning language.
Click the Add button to assign the selected task to Press Tasks. Then click OK.
8. Create enough states to represent the total number of languages (max of 9) that you wish to support.
Then click OK to return to the Word button.

221
 List of Text Objects which use Multiple Languages
MAPware software supports the Multi-Language feature in the following objects:
• Multilingual Text
• Go To Screen, Go To Next Screen, Go To Previous Screen, and Open Popup Screen buttons
• Set Bit, Reset Bit, and Toggle Bit buttons
• Write Value to Tag, Add Value to Tag, Subtract Value from Tag, Add Tag A to Tag B, and Subtract Tag B
from Tag A buttons
• Transfer and Upload Recipe buttons
• Advanced objects such as Advanced Bit, Word, Bit Lamp, Word Lamp, Multiple Bar graphs, Analog
Meter, Trend Graph, and Historical Trend
• Alarm buttons – Alarm Acknowledge, Alarm Acknowledge All, Next Alarm, and Previous Alarm

Using the Import/Export Text Objects Feature

The Import Text Objects and Export Text Objects features allow you to export a listing of all objects that are
capable of displaying Multilingual (Windows fonts) text. For a complete listing of all such objects, see the section
above. This is particularly handy when using the Multiple Language feature. Instead of entering each language
object-by-object in MAPware, you can export to a CSV (comma-separated value) file, and then edit the file using
another application such as Microsoft Excel. This might save time.

Exporting Text Objects

39 ► To Export Text Objects:
1. Open a project in MAPware that has multiple text objects.
2. Configure the languages you wish to use.
Ex:

222
3. Click Project > Export Text Objects:

Format – Use Unicode if you wish to display international characters such as characters with
diacritical marks (i.e. ç, é, ñ) or other alphabets (i.e. δ, ω, β, к, й, 萨, さ) that are not represented in
the standard ASCII character table.
Output Range – check Selected Screens, if you do not wish to export the entire project. Then click
the screens listed, (hold down the CTRL key which clicking each screen you want).
File Name – select the target file name that you wish to create.
View Error Log – not available when exporting.
4. Click the Export button.

5. Open the CSV file:

6. Edit the file. Make sure that all commas and quotation marks are left in their proper places. Save the file
using the same format.
In this example, we will edit the text label that signifies the Off position of a Bit Lamp object that is
located on Screen #1:

223
 Before Edit:

After Edit:

Importing Text Objects

40 After editing an exported text file (see steps above), you can import the file back into your project:
1. Open the target project in MAPware that has multiple text objects.
2. Click Project > Import Text Objects:

Select File – Use the file that you exported from MAPware.
 Note: make sure that the text (including commas and quotation marks) follows the same format
as was used in the export file.
Show Error Log – if checked, a text file is created by MAPware that lists any errors encountered
during the import.
3. Click the Import button.

4. If all went well, you should now be able to see the changes you made by reviewing each text object.

224
 Chapter 8 – Security
The HMC3000 and HMC7000 touchscreen models offer varying levels of screen security, from the simplest
password protected screen, to sophisticated user accounts and password access. In addition, the entire
MAPware project can be password protected to protect the programmers intellectual property.

Users and Access Levels

Access Levels and Users can be used to control access to Base Screens and Popup Screens. When a screen’s
Access Level property is something other than zero, the operator must be logged in to a user account that has
been granted access to that Access Level to view the screen.

If the user does not have the required Access Level a Screen Access Denied message is displayed and the screen
is not opened.
41 There are four steps to set up the Access Level feature in the MAPware project:
1. Create User Accounts, assigning a Username, Password and Access Level to each user.
2. Assign access levels to screens (see Editing a Base Screen or Editing a Popup Screen sections above).
3. Configure a button to allow the user to log in.
4. Configure a way for the user to logout.

Creating Users
Users and Passwords are configured using the Define > Access Level menu option. Current Users are listed in the
Access Level folder in the Project Information Window.

This screen can also be used to Add, Edit and Delete users. Right-click in the editor window and select the
desired option from the context menu.

The Access Level: Create User window has fields to assign Username, Password, and Access Level.

225
 Users have access to screens assigned access levels less than or equal to the Access Level assigned to their user
account. So User4 with Access Level 4, could open screens with Access Level 0 to 4, but not 5 and above.

Logging In
For the user to gain access to protected screens they must be able to log in to their account. This is done with a
button that runs a task to display a login screen. The login button should be placed on a screen that all users
have access to.
42 ► Follow these steps to provide access to the login screen:
1. From the Draw Toolbar select Advanced Objects > Multi-Task Single-State Button.

2. Click the screen to place the button.

3. In the property grid for the new button click the Tasks property field then click the ellipsis button to
display the Touch Screen Tasks List

226
 4. With the Press Tasks radio button checked, Select Key’s Specific Task in the Select Task dropdown list

5. Scroll down to the bottom of the Key’s Specific Tasks selection box and check the radio button for Show
Login Screen

6. Click Add to place the task in the Press Tasks section:

7. Click OK to save the task and close the popup window.

8. Change the On Text property to indicate that the button is used to login

When the operator presses this button they will be prompted for a Username and Password.

227
 Logging Out
There are two ways for a user to be logged out:
• Create a logout button
• Automatically logout the current user after a set timeout period
To create a logout button, follow the steps in the Logging In section above, only select the Log Out radio button
in the Key’s Specific Tasks selection box.

43 ► To set up a project to automatically logout the current user after a set timeout period:
1. From the Menu Bar select Project > Properties.

2. In the Project Configuration window click the Settings tab

3. Check the Logoff after checkbox and enter the time in seconds after which the user will be logged out.

 The time set in the Logoff After field is the period of screen inactivity. It the user is actively using the
touchscreen they will not be logged off.

228
 4. Select a screen to use as the Home Screen.

5. If a protected screen is displayed when a user is logged out the display will automatically switch to the
Home Screen selected here. Any screen with an Access Level of 0 can be used as a home screen.
6. Click OK to save the settings and close the Project Configuration Window.

Updating a Password
A user’s password can be updated from the HMC touchscreen. To provide this functionality follow the steps in
the Logging In section above, except select Change Password as the Key’s Specific Task.

44 This will create a button that opens a change password dialog. The operator will be prompted to:
1. Enter their current password
2. Enter the new password
3. Confirm the new password
A user must be logged in before using this function.
 Note: the new password will not be retained when power is cycled on the unit.

229
Basic Screen Level Security
Each individual screen can also be assigned a numeric password, separate from the Access Level feature. The
password is added in the screen property grid.

The acceptable password range is 0 to 9999 (0 is no password assigned) and no username is required for this
feature. When password-protected, a request to display the target screen causes a dialog box to appear, asking
user to enter correct password:

If correct, the screen will then display.

Backlight/Screen Saver Password Security

The HMC can be configured to go into a backlight/screen saver mode after a predefined length of time, up to 90
minutes, without any operator input. The operator reactivates the screen by touching it, but a username and
password can be configured before normal operation is restored. This can be used as an auto-logout type
feature at the end of shifts, ensuring that only authorized personnel can reactivate the HMC to begin the next
shift.

230
The Backlight saver is enabled in the Settings tab of the Project Configuration window, accessed from Project >
Properties. This is not available for the HMC4000 series

• Backlight saver Enable: Checkbox to enable the backlight saver. If enabled, a blank screen is displayed
on the HMC after the specified time-out. The operator can reactivate the screen by touching it.
Time (sec): Enter the amount of time in seconds (of touchscreen inactivity) that must elapse before
the backlight saver is engaged.
Username: Optional. If used, a screen is displayed that requires the operator to enter a username
and password to reactivate the screen. Maximum of 14 alphanumeric characters allowed.
Password: Optional. If used, maximum of 4 alphanumeric characters allowed.
Re-enter Password: Re-enter the desired password to set it.

231
Intellectual Property Protection
The ability to password protect your project is available in the Project Configuration window, Project >
Properties.

Creating an optional project password is a way to protect your project (and intellectual property) from
unauthorized modification. The password can be up to 8 alphanumeric characters in length. If a password is
entered in the Project Information tab of the Project Configuration window, the programmer will be required
to enter the password whenever project is opened or uploaded from the HMC. Care must be taken to remember
the project password, as it is not recoverable if forgotten. Maple Systems does not have a backdoor into
password protected projects. If the password is not available, the project must be recreated from scratch.

232
Chapter 9 – Alarms
What are Alarms?
At the most basic level, alarms are simply predefined messages that display on the HMC screen when a bit
attached to each message triggers. This is used in circumstances in which the HMC operator must be notified
immediately of a problem or event that is occurring in the system.
Alarm features:
• Configure up to 256 unique alarm messages for each project
• Auto acknowledge feature allows one key press to acknowledge each particular alarm or all active
alarms at once
• Option when alarm memory is full, to erase the previous alarms and log new alarms from the beginning
or simply to stop logging any new alarms that occur.
• Alarm messages trigger by bits that are part of ‘word’ registers. Option to select random 16-bit word
registers (more versatility but slower response time) or 16 consecutive word registers (less versatile but
quick response time)
• Log feature: captures event to non-volatile memory to view at a later date
• Severity (range 0 to 9) – determines priority of alarms
• Alarm Print Notification: if selected, alarm message is sent to serial printer that is connected to the
HMC.

Constructing an Alarm Database

Configure the alarm global parameters
First, you must select three parameters that determine how your HMC unit works with alarms. These settings
are configured either in the Project Configuration dialog box (select Project menu, then Properties, then click
the Alarm tab) or go directly to the Alarm Project Configuration Properties dialog box (click the Alarms folder in
the Project Information Window) and then click the Change Properties button.
Parameter 1 – 16 random or consecutive registers (HMC7000, HMC3000, and HMC2000 only)

Each alarm message must tag to a bit. When the bit is set, it will trigger the display of the alarm message. The
HMC monitors bits in word registers to ensure a fast response time. Therefore, each group of 16 alarm messages
requires one 16-bit word register. Therefore, for 256 alarm messages, the HMC must monitor 16 word registers.
The MAPware software provides two options for the HMC to read word registers allocated for alarms:
• 16 consecutive words: this option reserves sixteen word registers in consecutive order.
• 16 random words: this option allows you to randomly select word registers. They do not have to be in
consecutive order and you do not have to allocate 16 registers.
Select 16 consecutive words if you:
• Plan to configure all or most of the 256 alarm messages available in each project.
• Wish to ensure maximum speed and minimize any delays in displaying alarm messages.
Select 16 random words if you:

233
 • Do not need 256 alarms and, therefore, do not wish to ‘tie up’ so many registers in the PLC for alarm
messages.
• Do not have 16 consecutive registers available or would rather separate the registers into random
groups.
Parameter 2 – Auto acknowledge

The acknowledge feature is used to indicate that the plant floor operator has seen an alarm message. Do this by:
• Changing the color of the displayed message for an active alarm or
• Removing the displayed message from the screen if the alarm is no longer active
This parameter provides the option of configuring one bit/coil to acknowledge all alarms (Acknowledge All) or
select unique bit/coils for each alarm message that displays (Selectable).
Parameter 3 – If memory is full

This option determines how the HMC unit behaves when the memory allocated to historical alarms is full. Two
options are:
• Erase previous alarms and log from the beginning – this option will erase the oldest alarms recorded,
making room for new alarms that occur.
• Stop logging – use this option to make sure no prior alarms are lost. However, when the alarm memory
is full, then no new alarms display.
 Note: Make sure you perform the above steps first before you start creating alarm messages; you can
always return to this menu to change the global alarm settings but if you do, all alarm messages created
are erased:

Create the alarm tags using the Tag Database

Before you can start creating your alarm messages, you must open the tag database (Tags folder in the Project
Information Window) and assign word registers for the alarm messages. The word registers can be internal
HMC memory or registers located in a connected PLC. Calculate how many alarm tags you need based upon the
number of alarm messages that you wish to display. Use register memory, not bit/coil memory since alarms tag
to bits in word registers (16 messages/bits per register). Also, determine how many Acknowledge bit/coils you
require and create these as well.
 Note: if you selected ’16 consecutive words’ option above, then you must create 16 consecutive data
registers for alarms before you continue to the next step.

Generate the alarm messages

Click the Alarms folder in the Project Information Window. If you have selected the Auto Acknowledge –
Acknowledge All alarms option (see Step 1. Parameter 2 above), then you must select a tagged coil/bit using the

234
pull-down box next to Acknowledge All Alarms On Bit/Coil. If you do not enter this first, the following error
message displays on the Alarm dialog box “Please select Acknowledge All Alarms field first.”
• If 16 random words is chosen in Step 1a 16-bit word register, select the bank of messages (i.e. 00 (000-
015)) that you wish to configure under Alarm Section. Under Tag List, click the word register that you
wish to tag to this bank, then click Assign.
• If 16 consecutive words are selected, go directly to the Tag List and click a group of 16 consecutive
registers, then click Assign. If you see this:

The Assign button is unavailable. This means that MAPware does not see 16 consecutive registers in the
tag database. Go back into the tag database and verify that 16 consecutive data registers are available
for the 256 alarms.

HMC4000 Series Alarm Database Parameters

In the Project Information Window of your HMC4000 Series project, select the Alarms folder to access the
Alarm Database.

Alarm Tag

Tag
Select the Tag that the alarm will respond to from existing tags in the Tag Database or create a new tag.

235
Type
The Type can be either a Coil or a Register (or Register Bit).
If using a coil or register bit for the alarm, the option is given to trigger the alarm if the state is ON or OFF.
Additionally if using a register bit the Bit Number needs to be specified.

Alarm Attributes

History
Selecting the History option will allow the alarm to be displayed in a Historical Alarm List object on the screen.
Optionally, Acknowledgement data can be displayed in this object as well.

Alarm Notification
In previous models, selecting the “Print” option would send a notification of the alarm to a serial printer. This
option is not available for the HMC4000 Series. Use Email instead to push alarm notifications.

Alarm Severity
Set a Severity ranking from 0-9. Alarm Lists can be configured to display only alarms of a certain severity.

Edit Alarm Ack Text

This option allows changes to be made to the text that is displayed regarding an alarm’s Acknowledge status in
the Real Time Alarm Display Object.

Acknowledge/Clear Bit Tag

Alarms can be assigned a bit tag to acknowledge or clear them from logic if necessary. Alarms can be cleared
from the screen using the buttons on the Alarm List object.

Auto Acknowledge
Select whether the alarm will respond to the “Ack All” button or task or must be acknowledged individually.

If Memory Is Full
The response to full memory can either be to erase all alarms from the beginning or stop logging alarms.

Email
The Alarm can generate an email when it occurs, when it is acknowledged, and when it is cleared. Select the
Email Screen and the group to which it will be sent.

Add New Alarm

To create an alarm, configure the settings for the alarm then click Add New Alarm.

Update
To update an alarm, select an existing alarm from the table, modify the configuration and then click Update.

236
Export/Import
The alarm table can be exported/imported as a .csv file. This allows quick changes to be made to large numbers
of alarms in a spreadsheet editor or share alarms between HMC4000 projects.

Configuring Alarm Messages

Now that you have determined the global settings for your alarms and created the tags to use (see above
section), you are now ready to configure each alarm message, along with the particular attributes assigned to
each message.
To do this, you must go back to the Alarm Project Configuration Properties dialog box (click the Alarms folder in
the Project Information Window):

Step 1: Select the alarm you wish to edit/modify.

To enter or modify a particular alarm message, you must click the Alarm Number of the alarm you wish to edit –
a forward page symbol appears in the first column to indicate the selected alarm. The table indicates the current
settings for each alarm and cannot be directly edited.
Below is a brief description of each column:
• Alarm Assign – indicates if this particular alarm is active (assigned).
• Alarm Number – designated number assigned to each alarm. Range is 0 to 255.
• Tag Bit – this is the particular bit (005) of the word register (see Tag List above) monitored by the HMC
for this alarm. When this bit is set (1), the predefined alarm text for this alarm displays in the Alarm List
object.
• Alarm Text – the text that is shown in the Alarm List object when this alarm is activated.
• Log – option to capture the alarm to internal HMC memory so that it can be viewed at a later date (see
History section)
• Severity – indicates the severity level (0-9) of each alarm (see Alarm Severity below).

237
 • Print – option to send alarm text to a serial printer attached to the HMC
• Ack Tag – determines if an acknowledge bit is assigned to this message.
 Note: if the Acknowledge All Alarm global feature is used, then this option is preset to Yes and cannot
be changed.

Step 2: Enter the alarm text.

In the Alarm Description section, under Alarm Text, enter the text that will appear when this alarm triggers. A
maximum of 40 characters is permitted. If you are using more than one language (see Multi-Language Feature
in Chapter 7 – Data & Display Objects), click the Language pull-down box to configure a unique alarm message
per language selected.

Step 3: Alarm Notification

Check the Print box to send a copy of the alarm text message to a connected serial printer when an alarm
activates.

Step 4: Alarm Severity

Alarms display in the Alarm List object according to the severity level assigned to each alarm. This is a useful
feature if you wish to prioritize alarms. For example, if an Alarm List object is set to Severity Level 2, then it will
only display active alarms whose severity level is 2, 3, 4, on up to and including 9. Any alarm that is configured
with a Severity level of 0 or 1 will not be displayed. With this feature, you could set up an Alarm List object that
only shows alarms of the ‘highest’ priority. To do this, you might set the severity level to 9, then it would only
show alarms with a Severity Level of 9. Assign a severity level to each alarm (default is 0).

Step 5: Acknowledge
This option is available if the global setting (see last section) for Auto Acknowledge has been set to Selectable.
Then configure each alarm with a unique bit/coil tag address used to acknowledge the alarm. When the
acknowledge bit is set (for example by using an Advanced Bit Button object) by the plant floor operator, the
Alarm List object indicates that the alarm is acknowledged. This is accomplished by changing the color of the
alarm text message, recording the Date/Time of acknowledgement on screen, and/or simply using ‘Yes/No’ text
in the Alarm List object (see Alarm List object for more information):

In the example above, Alarm0 (green) activates, and then is acknowledged by the plant floor operator. Alarm1
(red) is also activate but has not been acknowledged. Finally, Alarm2 (yellow) was activate but became inactive
before the operator acknowledged the occurrence of the alarm.

238
When an alarm is configured with the Acknowledge option, the alarm message remains on display after the
operator has acknowledged the alarm (as shown above). However, when the alarm is no longer active, then the
alarm message is removed. In the scenario above, when Alarm0 is no longer active, the message is removed
(since the operator has already acknowledged the message). In addition, if the operator presses the Alarm2
Acknowledge Alarm button, then the Alarm2 message is removed (since this alarm has since become inactive).
 Note: if the Acknowledge option is not used, then the alarm message remains on the display regardless of
whether or not the alarm is active.

Step 6: History Description

The Alarm History option records the alarm message into non-volatile historical alarm memory (65536 bytes
reserved) of the HMC. Alarm messages stored in the historical alarm memory are viewed using the Alarm List
object with the Alarm Type attribute set to Historical.
There are two options:
• History Without Acknowledge – Alarms are recorded into historical alarm memory regardless of
whether or not the operator has acknowledged the alarm.
• History With Acknowledge – Any alarm configured with this option must be acknowledged by the HMC
operator by setting the assigned Acknowledge Bit. If this is not done, then the next time the alarm is
active, it will not be added to historical alarm memory (although it will display as an active alarm in the
Alarm List).
 Note: if the history option is checked, the alarm message displays on any Alarm List object configured as Real-
Time alarm type when it becomes active.
To finish, you must click the Accept (Update) button. This will record the settings for the particular alarm you
have highlighted. Once this has been done, you will see the Alarm Assign attribute change from No to Yes for the
selected alarm. You must click the Accept button for every alarm you create.

Other buttons in the alarm database

Accept/Update: Alarm text and other attributes can be changed at any time during the creation of a project (see
above). Simply go back into the alarm database, highlight the particular alarm message you wish to edit, make
the changes, and then click the Update button.
Delete: this button will delete that highlighted alarm and return it back to default settings.
Reset All Alarms: completely clears all of the alarms and returns them back to default.
 Note: you must reassign the Alarm Acknowledge coil and the tag registers before you can start creating alarm
messages again.
Export: save the alarm database as a CSV file that can be modified and imported back into the project.
Import: use this button to import an alarm database CSV file. Before you can import, make sure the following
parameters are met in your project:
• The global setting for alarm 16 consecutive/random word registers must match the alarm type used in
the imported CSV file. If not, you will see the message, “Current project Alarm Type is not the same as in
import alarm database”. Click the Change Properties button in the alarm database to correct this
setting.
• The tags used in the imported file must exactly match tags already created in your tag database.
• The imported CSV file should not contain any negative numbers.
• Do not change any of the Alarm Numbers assigned in the imported CSV file.
• The Number of Languages in the current project should match the import file.

239
Alarm List Display Objects
To display any alarm messages, you must place an Alarm List object on a screen. There are two basic types of
Alarm List objects:
• Real Time Alarms – use this type when you wish to display actively occurring alarms.
• Historical Alarms – use this type to display a history of alarms that have occurred in the past. Alarms are
saved to non-volatile memory so that they can be viewed even after power has been removed from the
HMC for a period of time.
There are many features and options that are available to you when displaying alarms:
• The Alarm List object can be any size on screen. Optional scroll bars allow you to display information
that might not completely fit in the alarm display that you have created.
• The Alarm Severity feature allows you to display a subset of active alarms so that you can display alarms
in groups of increasing importance.
• In addition to displaying alarm text messages, you can also record the time and date that the alarm took
place, when it was acknowledged, and when conditions went back to normal.
• The Real Time Alarms have the option of displaying the alarm messages in color according to state or
condition of the alarm (active, inactive, acknowledged).
The Alarm List object is used to display alarm messages that have been configured using the Alarm database
(see Constructing an Alarm Database section earlier in this chapter). Alarm messages appear in the configured
Alarm List object when the bit that they are associated with is set.

To place an Alarm on a screen:

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Display Objects > Alarm from the standard menu
Click Advanced Objects > Alarm from the Draw toolbar
Click the Alarm icon in the Objects toolbar.

240
 • Move cursor to a start point for the Alarm List object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the Alarm object and release. The object appears on screen and
the Alarm Properties box displays.

To configure/edit properties of the object:

Click the object on screen to display the Alarm Properties box on the right side of the screen.
• Animation (see General Properties section in Chapter 7 – Data & Display Objects)
Visibility Animation: (see General Properties in Chapter 7 – Data & Display Objects)
• Design (see General Properties in Chapter 7 – Data & Display Objects)
• General Attributes
Alarm Color – Active Acknowledged – sets the color that is displayed when the active alarm is
acknowledged by the operator.
 Note: not available for Historical Alarm Type.
Alarm Color – Active Unacknowledged – sets the color displayed when an alarm is active but has not
been acknowledged yet by the operator.
 Note: not available for Historical Alarm Type.
Alarm Color – Inactive Unacknowledged – the color used for text that is displayed when the alarm is
no longer active but did not get acknowledged by the HMC operator.
 Note: not available for Historical Alarm Type.
Alarm Header – Adds a header to the Alarm Display object. Header text is configured in the Select
Display Fields dialog.
Alarm Severity – ten levels (0-9) used to represent which alarms should be displayed. For example, if
alarm severity level is set to 3, then only alarm messages in the Alarm Database with Severity levels
of 3, 4 … 9 will be displayed.
Alarm Type – select Real Time to display alarms as they occur. Select Historical to display alarms
captured using the History feature in the Alarm database.
Background Color – determines the background color of the Alarm list. Click the button to display
the color palette and select a color.
Border – optional line around the periphery of the alarm list.
Column Spacing – number of pixels between the columns of data displayed (see Select Display
Fields).
Font Color – color of the columns of data displayed.
 Note: this setting only applies if Alarm Type is set to Historical. For Real Time Alarm Types, the
Alarm Colors (see above) take precedent over Font Color.
Scroll Bar Style – Use the scroll bar feature if the data to be displayed is larger than the Alarm list.
The vertical scroll bar is used to easily scroll through the list of alarm messages that are displayed.
The horizontal scroll bar is used to scroll through the columns of data (i.e. time, date, message,
acknowledge time/date, etc.)
Select Display Fields – determines what data is to be displayed when an alarm occurs. If Alarm
Header is enabled, the header text is configured in this dialog for each column. No spaces or special
characters are allowed in the header text.
Alarm Text – maximum of 52 characters is allowed.
Alarm Number – whenever an alarm occurs, a number is assigned to it. This is useful if there
might be more alarms than can be shown in the area allocated. Then the operator knows what
section of the total alarm list he is viewing.

241
 On-Time – this is the time at which an alarm became active. Options are: HH:MM:SS, MM:SS,
and HH:MM. (H=hour, M=minute, S= second).
Off-Time – this is the time at which an alarm became inactive.
On-Date – this is the date at which an alarm became active. Format is DD/MM/YY. (D=day of the
month, M=month, Y=year).
Off-Date – this is the date at which an alarm became inactive.
Active – this simply indicates if an alarm is currently active or not. Options are: Y/N or Yes/No.
Not available for historical alarms.
Ack-Time – this is the time at which an alarm was acknowledged by the HMC operator.
Ack-Date – this is the date at which an alarm was acknowledged by the HMC operator.
Acknowledge – indicates if alarm is acknowledged. Not available for historical alarms.
Severity – the severity level assigned to each alarm message, (0-9).
• Layout (see General Properties)

Resize an Alarm List object

You can change the overall height and width of the Alarm List object by holding the mouse cursor over one of
the white demarcation boxes along the perimeter of the object, then hold down the left mouse button to drag
to a new position. You can limit the viewable messages to one or expand the Alarm List object to cover the
entire screen.
 Note: The font size of each message is fixed (to 5x7 pixels) and cannot be changed.

Real-Time Alarm Display

The real-time alarm type option in the Alarm List object immediately displays any alarm message in which the
assigned bit has been set (i.e. current alarm). The message remains on display until:
• The operator has acknowledged the alarm by setting the configured acknowledge bit and
• The alarm message is no longer active (the assigned bit is reset)
 Note: if the Acknowledge format is set to Selectable and no Acknowledge tag is configured for a particular
alarm message in the Alarms folder, then during operation, the alarm message will remain on display even when
the alarm becomes inactive.
Below is an example of a simple real-time alarm:

242
 Note: the buttons/lamps under ‘Activate Alarms’ are used in this example to activate and deactivate an alarm
by controlling the target alarm bit. The buttons under ‘Acknowledge Alarms’ are used to acknowledge each
alarm by controlling the acknowledgement bit for each alarm.
We have configured this alarm display with a black background and text colors of green, red, and yellow to
indicate the active acknowledged, active not acknowledged, and inactive states respectively. We will display the
alarm text, an alarm number, and acknowledge indicator for each alarm message displayed. Notice that on the
Alarm Display Text Browser, you can rearrange the fields displayed by highlighting a field (in the right-hand
column) and clicking the Move Up/Move Down buttons.
When using the run time simulator in MAPware, the following screen is displayed:

No alarms are currently active; therefore, the alarm display is blank.

We will activate Alarm#1 by pressing the R5_0 button:

243
The message appears on the display (in red) along with an assigned alarm number (000) and text indicating that
this alarm has not been acknowledged yet (NO).
The operator presses the %M10 button which has been configured to acknowledge the alarm:

 Note that the color of the alarm has changed to green and the acknowledgement indicator is ‘YES’. However,
the alarm is still active so the message remains on display.
Let’s press the R5_0 button again, to clear the alarm condition:

The alarm message has been acknowledged and cleared (become inactive) so the message is removed from the
Alarm List object.
How does the alarm look if we activate the alarm, and then clear the alarm without pressing the
acknowledgement key?

244
In this case, the alarm remains on screen but the color is yellow (indicating alarm is no longer active). Also note
that the alarm acknowledgement indicator is ‘NO’. The alarm remains on screen until the operator presses the
acknowledgement key (%M10).
Alarms are displayed on the list in the order that they occur, with the first occurrence on top:

Use the optional scroll bar feature if there is a possibility of having more active alarms occurring than there is
room to display.

Historical Alarm Display

The historical alarm type option in the Alarm List object displays only alarm messages in the Alarm Database that
have the Log field (History) enabled. Unlike the Real-Time option, alarm messages remain on the list, even after
the alarm has become inactive and/or the operator has acknowledged the alarm.
Alarm messages in the Historical Alarm List are retained even when power is removed from the HMC, and then
reapplied. For this reason, the Historical Alarm List is primarily used to provide a record of alarms that have
occurred in the past.
Below is an example of a historical alarm:

245
 Note that the three alarm color options are not available for historical alarms; use the background and text
font color options. In this example, the following fields are shown; alarm number, alarm text, on-time, off-time,
and ack-time. For clarity, we have placed titles on the top of the alarm list to help identify each field.
For this example, there is also an Advanced Bit button (Clr Alarms) that is configured with a Key Specific Task to
Clear Historical Alarm Memory. This button can be used to clear the alarm memory and blank the display.
There is also a Numeric Display object (Alarm Count – SW0004) which shows how many alarm messages are in
memory. The other objects perform the same function as in our example of using a real-time Alarm List above.
Historical alarms display only alarm messages that have been stored in non-volatile memory of the HMC.
Therefore, you cannot use the MAPware run time simulator to display a historical alarm. To see a historical
alarm, you must download the project to the HMC unit:

Let’s activate Alarm#1 by pressing the R5_0 button. Then we acknowledge this alarm by pressing the %M10
button and press the R5_0 button again to deactivate the alarm:

246
The text appears on display, along with the time at which the alarm became active, acknowledged, and then
inactive.
Let’s press R5_0 again to activate the same alarm, but instead of acknowledging the alarm, let’s deactivate the
alarm without acknowledgement:

In the Alarm Database, this alarm is configured with the ‘History Without Acknowledge’ attribute. New instances
of this alarm will be recorded into the Alarm History memory of the HMC even though the operator did not
acknowledge the last alarm. Therefore, if we activate this alarm again without acknowledging, it will display:

Use the ‘History Without Acknowledge’ attribute if you want a record of each alarm occurrence, regardless of
whether or not the alarm was acknowledged by the operator.
The alarm that is triggered by pressing R5_1 is configured with the ‘History With Acknowledge’ attribute. Let’s
activate this alarm, press the %M11 acknowledge button, then press R5_1 button again to deactivate:

247
So far, nothing different; this alarm behaves the same as the prior alarm. Let’s now activate the same alarm
again, but instead of acknowledging, we will deactivate the alarm:

If this alarm is activated again, it is not placed into the Alarm Memory. Therefore, it does not appear on screen.
When using the ‘History With Acknowledge’ attribute, all new instances of this alarm (other alarms are not
affected) will not be displayed until the alarm is acknowledged by the plant floor operator. Use this setting if you
wish to conserve alarm memory space in the HMC or if operator acknowledgement of the alarm is a
requirement.
Finally, the alarm history is in non-volatile memory of the HMC so you can always see prior alarms that have
occurred even when power is removed from the HMC for a period of time. The MAPware software allocates
65536 bytes for alarm messages and can retain up to 6000 historical alarm messages. If you wish to clear the
alarm memory, simply use a Function Key or Advanced Bit Button that is configured as a Key Specific Task –
Clear Historical Alarm Memory. Otherwise, the memory is cleared based upon the global setting (see
Constructing an Alarm Database at the beginning of this chapter) in the Project Configuration dialog box (in the
Alarms folder, click Change Properties).

Uploading Historical Alarms

In addition to viewing historical alarms using the Historical Alarm object above, you can also upload the alarms
to the MAPware software. This allows you to export the alarms to a CSV file and to see how much memory has
been used.
• Connect the HMC unit to your computer.
• Close any open projects in MAPware.

248
 • Click Project > Transfer > Upload to display the Upload/Download dialog box:

• Select Application and/or Ladder. Also select Historical Alarm Data. Click Upload.
• After the upload has finished, a new file (HistAlarmData.bin) is created and placed in the MAPware
directory (default location is C:\Program Files\Maple Systems\MAPware7000). To create a CSV file, click
Tools > Display Historical Alarm Data. A CSV file is automatically created (HistAlarm.csv) and displayed
using Microsoft Excel.

Other Alarm Controls

Predefined Alarm Tags

In the tag database, there are several tags (bit and register) that can be used for alarm purposes:
• Acknowledge All Alarms (S00014 bit, Read Only): indicates if-
0: All alarms are acknowledged
1: All alarms are not acknowledged
 Note: applies to both Historical and Real Time alarms
• Real and Historical Alarm Control (S00035 bit, Read/Write): if bit is set to-
0: online operation, all alarms are monitored.
1: offline operation, all occurring alarms are ignored (not displayed or entered into the historical
alarm memory area) until control is reset back to 0.
 Note: any alarms that occurred while offline are displayed after control is reset back to 0.
• Historical Alarm Count (SW0004 register, Read Only): represents the total number of alarms currently
listed in the Historical Alarm Memory.

Touchscreen Tasks
• Alarm Acknowledge button: use this button to acknowledge the topmost alarm currently displayed in
the Alarm List. This button will only work if the following conditions are met:

249
 The Acknowledge All feature (see Project Configuration dialog box under the Alarm tab, Auto
Acknowledge option) is not set.
The selectable Acknowledge bit is not enabled for each alarm.
• Acknowledge All button: same as above except that, when pressed, this button acknowledges all of the
currently active alarms.
 Note: Same conditions as above apply.
• Next Alarm button: when pressed, this button advances (move all alarms up one line) the list of alarms
displayed. This is similar to pressing the Down Arrow on the Vertical Scroll bar when enabled.
 Note: only works with Alarm List object that is configured as Alarm Type – Real.
• Previous Alarm button: when pressed, this button recedes (move all alarms down one line) the list of
alarms displayed. This is similar to pressing the Up Arrow on the Vertical Scroll bar when enabled.
 Note: only works with Alarm List object that is configured as Alarm Type – Real.

Key Specific Tasks

• Key Specific Task – Acknowledge Alarm: performs same function as the Acknowledge Alarm touchscreen
button (see above).
• Key Specific Task – Acknowledge All Alarms: performs same function as the Acknowledge All alarms
touchscreen button (see above).
• Key Specific Task – Previous Alarm: performs same function as the Previous Alarm touchscreen button
(see above).
• Key Specific Task – Next Alarm: performs same function as the Next Alarm touchscreen button (see
above).
• Key Specific Task – Previous Historical Alarm: when pressed, this button detracts (move all alarms down
one line) the list of alarms displayed. This is similar to pressing the Up Arrow on the Vertical Scroll bar
when enabled.
 Note: only works with Alarm List object that is configured as Alarm Type – Historical.
• Key Specific Task – Next Historical Alarm: when pressed, this button advances (move all alarms up one
line) the list of alarms displayed. This is similar to pressing the Down Arrow on the Vertical Scroll bar
when enabled.
 Note: only works with Alarm List object that is configured as Alarm Type – Historical.
• Key Specific Task – Move to Latest Historical Alarm: this button moves to the last (bottom) line of the list
of alarms displayed, thereby showing the most recent (latest) historical alarm. This is similar to pressing
the Double Down Arrow on the Vertical Scroll bar when enabled.
 Note: only works with Alarm List object that is configured as Alarm Type – Historical.
• Key Specific Task – Move to Oldest Historical Alarm: this button moves to the first (top) line of the list of
alarms displayed, thereby showing the oldest historical alarm. This is similar to pressing the Double Up
Arrow on the Vertical Scroll bar when enabled.
 Note: only works with Alarm List object that is configured as Alarm Type – Historical.
• Key Specific Task – Move to Latest Alarm: this button moves to the last (bottom) line of the list of alarms
displayed, thereby showing the most recent (latest) alarm. This is similar to pressing the Double Down
Arrow on the Vertical Scroll bar when enabled.
 Note: only works with Alarm List object that is configured as Alarm Type – Real Time.
• Key Specific Task – Move to Oldest Alarm: this button moves to the first (top) line of the list of alarms
displayed, thereby showing the oldest alarm. This is similar to pressing the Double Up Arrow on the

250
 Vertical Scroll bar when enabled.
 Note: only works with Alarm List object that is configured as Alarm Type – Real Time.
• Key Specific Task – Clear Historical Alarm Memory: when pressed, this clears the Historical Alarm
memory of all past alarms entered.

251
Chapter 10 – Data Logger and Trending
The Data Logger is used to record the values of tags over time. The collected data is stored in non-volatile
memory inside the HMC or, for HMC3000 models with a SD card slot, can be saved directly to an SD card. This
data can be displayed in graphic format on the HMC using the Historical Trend Object. You can also upload the
collected data to a computer (using MAPware) or to an attached USB Flash drive as a CSV file. The HMC3000
series allows data to be sent from the SD card directly to a file transfer protocol (ftp) server. On the HMC4000,
data log files can be accessed directly from the unit via a self-hosted FTP server on an attached SD card/USB
drive. The Data Logging feature is most often used for data acquisition. The HMC gathers and saves valuable
information about the industrial system it is connected to. This information can then be reviewed at any time to
increase knowledge of what is happening in the system. Real time data can be monitored with the Real Time
Trend and XY Plot objects.

Factors to Consider
Before you begin configuring the Data Logger function, you need to determine the following:
• How much internal HMC memory will you need? During data logger setup, you can select the amount of
reserved memory to be allocated for the data you are collecting. To compute the amount of memory
required, consider:
Data Type used (i.e. 2 byte Integer or 4 byte Integer/Float)
Number of Tags that you will be recording
How often you will be recording (time interval)
Total length of time that you wish to capture
For example, I want to capture data from five registers in my PLC. I want to read these registers every 5
seconds over a period of one 24 hour period. The registers are 16 bit data type.
Therefore, my calculations for memory requirements are:
2 (bytes per 16 bit register)* 5 (no of registers) = 10 bytes + 8 bytes overhead for capturing the date and
time of each data read. Total is 18 bytes.
I will be reading 12 times per minute which means 720 times per hour which means 17280 times per 24
hour period.
Therefore, I will need 18 (bytes per reading) * 17280 = 311040 bytes or 311KB.
• Do you want the option to erase the Data Logger Memory during project download? If so, check the
‘Erase Data Logger Memory’ option located in the Settings tab of the Project Configuration dialog box.

252
 This dialog appears whenever you start a new project, or click Project > Properties:

• Determine which HMC or PLC data registers you wish to monitor and add these to the tag database.
• Determine how you wish to capture the data (Logging Mode):
Power up – continuously captures data at a predefined frequency while power is applied to HMC.
Start/Stop Time – captures data at a predefined time period and frequency during each 24 hour
cycle.
Key Task – captures data at a predefined frequency but the time period is determined by manually
starting/stopping the data collection via the membrane function keys or the Advanced Bit Button.
Logging with Run Time Frequency – similar to the Power Up option above except that the frequency
of capturing data is determined by the current value in a 16 bit internal memory register. This
feature allows you to vary the capture frequency during operation.
Bit Task – similar to the Key Task option but the data collection begins when an internal predefined
bit (S00028-S00031) is set and continues at the predefined frequency until the bit is reset. This
provides the ability to vary the start/stop times using ladder instructions in a logic block.
Event Based – Data is captured each time an assigned bit is triggered.

Internal Data Logger

Click the Data Logger folder in the Project Information directory, or click Define > Data Logger from the standard
menu. The HMC3000 series has an option for logging data to Internal memory or External memory while the
HMC7000 series will only show the Internal memory option.

The external memory option allows the logger to write directly to an SD card inserted in the SD card slot. The
external memory option also allows the HMC to act as an ftp client and send from the data log to an ftp server.
See the External Data Logger and the FTP client section below for more information.

253
Internal Memory Logging Configuration
Select the Internal memory option to display the Data Logger configuration window:

Configuration Settings
Click the Group Information tab:
• No. of Groups: Data Logging is configured according to “groups”. A “group” is a collection of registers
that the HMC will poll and record data according to the “logging mode” selected. Each group can have a
maximum of 30 registers. Up to four groups can be created. Use this box to enter how many data groups
you need.
• Memory Full: options are Stop Logging or FIFO.
Stop Logging: the HMC will stop logging data once the memory reserved has been used. You must
clear the memory by using the Clear Memory option in the Key Specific Task for function keys or the
Advanced Bit button. Or you can clear the memory by enabling the ‘Erase Data Logger Memory’
option under the Settings tab in the Project Configuration dialog box (see Project > Properties) and
downloading a project into the HMC.
FIFO: Once the data logger is full, the oldest data sample will be overwritten, and new data will
continue to be logged.
• Memory Size: options available depend on the model being used. This is the amount of memory
allocated for all of the groups combined. Select the most appropriate setting for your needs but
remember that any memory allocated to the data logger reduces the amount of memory available for
the rest of your project (click Tools > Application Memory Status for a breakdown of memory usage).
• Data Type: only selectable once a data logging group is selected. Options are 2 Byte (Signed or
Unsigned), 4 Byte (Signed or Unsigned ), and 4 Byte (Float). This option applies to all tags in a given
group and determines how the data logger will interpret the data collected. Only tags that are
configured with the appropriate byte length (i.e. 2 bytes {1 word} for Data Type: 2 Byte {Int}, and 4 bytes
{2 words} for Data Type: 4 Byte {Int or Float}) in the tag database will show in the Defined Tags box.
• Select Group: Once you have selected how many data groups you need in the No. of Groups box, the
data groups will be listed (ex. Group1, Group2, etc.). Click each Group to edit that group’s attributes.

254
• Logging mode: this setting determines how and when the HMC collects data. Each group can have a
different logging mode. There are six options for the logging mode:
Power up – collects data immediately after the HMC has initialized, according to the time value
entered into ‘Log at Every’ field. Therefore, if the value entered into this field is 00:00:10, then the
HMC records the data every ten seconds after initial power-up.
Start/Stop Time – this option is used if you wish to collect data during a specific time period every
day. The starting time is entered in the Logger Start Time field and end time in the Logger Stop Time
field. Between these time periods, the HMC collects data continuously according to the frequency
specified in the Log at Every field.
Key Task – the Start and Stop time are controlled by membrane function keys, the Multi-Task Single-
State button, or the Multi-Task Multi-State button (using the Key Specific Task option). The
frequency of data collection is specified using the Log at Every field.
Logging with Run Time Frequency – the frequency of capturing data is determined by the current
value in a 16 bit memory register (can be internal or a PLC register). This feature allows you to vary
the capture frequency during operation. The HMC interprets the value in the Frequency Tag as
minutes (this value must be > 30 minutes).
 Note: This mode is only available for Group1.
Frequency Tag (Logging with Run Time Frequency mode): This is the tag register (internal or PLC)
used to determine how often to capture the data.
Bit Task – the Start and Stop time is controlled by one of four predefined system bits (S0028-S0031)
located in the tag database. The frequency of data collection is specified using the Log at Every field.
Event Based – data logging is controlled using a ‘logging bit’ which is any HMC internal memory bit
(external PLC bits not allowed) configured in the task database. The data is captured based upon the
logging bit changing state according to one of the following three options: Positive Edge (transition
from 0 to 1), Negative Edge (transition from 1 to 0), and Both Edges.
Logging Bit (Event Based mode): this is the tag bit (internal only) that determines when data is
captured.
Logging Event (Event Based mode): this is the ‘event’ that triggers the Data Logger to capture
data. Options are Positive Edge (capture when bit transitions from Off to On), Negative Edge
(when bit transitions from On to Off), and Both.
Logging Speed (Event Based mode):
Normal logging: Data will be displayed as HH:MM:SS is generated .CSV files
Fast logging: Data will be displayed as HH:MM:SS:mS in generated .CSV files
• Log at Every: this is the time interval or frequency of data capture used by Power Up, Start/Stop Time,
Key Task, and Bit Task modes.
• Logger Start Time (Start/Stop mode): this is the set time at which the Data Logger starts capturing data
(frequency based upon the Log at Every setting).
• Logger Stop Time (Start/Stop mode): same as Start Time above, except this is when the Data Logger
stops capturing the data.
• Defined Tags: this list displays all of the tags available in the tag database which are the same size (ex 2
Byte Signed or Unsigned) as the Data Type selected in the General section. Scroll through the tags until
you find the one you wish to use. Click the tag to highlight it, and then click the Add button to move the
selected tag over to the Tags to be Logged list.
• Tags to be logged: this is the list of tags that the selected data group uses to capture and record data. A
maximum of 30 tags is allowed per group.
 Note: to remove a tag from this list, simply click the tag to highlight it, and then click the Delete

255
 button. The highlighted tag is removed from this list and placed back into the Defined Tags list.
 Note: deleting a tag from this list does not delete the tag from the tag database.

Printing Internal Memory Data Logs

In addition to capturing and storing data into memory, the HMC can also send internal memory Data Logger
records to a connected serial printer. To print you must:
• Connect a serial printer to COM1 or COM2 of the HMC
• Configure the serial printer protocol driver in the Network Configuration folder.
• Create a Data Log group in internal memory using the Data Logger folder.
• Click the Print Properties button in the Data Logger to configure what is to be printed (see Formatting
Data Logger Printouts)
• Click the Start/End Time Tags for Printing tab in the Data Logger. This tab is used to configure what
section of the captured Data Log memory (based upon the Start and Stop Times) is to be sent to the
serial printer (see Configuring Print Time for the Data Logger below).
• Create a Function Key (or Multi-Task Single-State Button) with the Key’s Specific Task: Start Printing of
Group # Port #. This key initiates the printing sequence.
• Create a Function Key (or Multi-Task Single-State Button) with the Key’s Specific Task: Stop Printing of
Group # Port #. This key ends the printing sequence.

Formatting Data Logger Printouts

You can define the data that you wish to be sent to a serial printer and even configure how you want this data to
be formatted. This is done by clicking the Print Properties button in the Group Information tab of the Data
Logger.
 Note: To display the Print Properties button you must:
• Highlight a group in the Groups box
• Make sure that the highlighted group has at least one tag in the ‘Tags to be Logged’ list

256
Print Format when using Logging with Run Time Frequency mode:
When using this logging mode, you can format the printout to display a header and/or footer. You can also
adjust the margins and insert an optional column which shows the time of each data capture:

Definition of Terms:
• Logged Tags: this is a list of all of the tags that are to be logged for the selected Group. To print a tag,
highlight (click) the tag, then click the Add button. This will add the tag to the ‘Tags to be Printed’ list on
the right.
• Tags to be Printed: this is the list of tags that will be printed. A separate column is allocated for each tag
with the option to create a heading, adjust the width of the column, select the number of digits
(including decimal notation), and specify the data type. To edit these parameters, highlight each tag,
adjust the parameters in the appropriate fields below, and then click the Change button. A tag can be
removed from the list by highlighting the tag, then clicking the Remove button.
• Paper Size: at the time of this printing, only A4 paper size (8.3” x 11.7”) is available.
• Power Failure: This feature allows you to print a message (up to 80 characters) that indicates a power
failure. When using the Logging with Run Time Frequency mode, during normal operation, the Data
Logger will capture data according to the time interval set in the Frequency Tag. If there are periods of
time in which power is removed from the HMC, it will not be able to capture data. To indicate periods of
power loss on the print out, you can create a message that will print instead of the expected data.
• Power Up: This feature allows you to print a brief (5 character) label indicating when the HMC’s power
was restored. This label will print just above the first data capture.
• Comm Break: If some of the tags to be printed are assigned to PLC registers, this feature allows you to
print a brief (5 character) label if communications with the PLC are temporarily lost. If such a
circumstance occurs, the printout will show the last valid data value read from the PLC register and this
label.
• Time Column: Use this option to display the time of each reading. Make sure that you allocate enough
characters to display the time in HH:MM:SS format.

257
 • Margin: use these settings to reserve margins on the printout.
• Header: this option will print a header at the top of each page printed. Up to 4 lines (80 characters each)
can be configured.
• Footer: this option will print a header at the bottom of each page printed. Up to 4 lines (80 characters
each) can be configured.
Click the Print Preview button to see how your printout will look:

258
Print Format when using all other logging modes except Logging with Run Time Frequency:
The print feature is available for all other modes of Data Logging (i.e. Power Up, Start/Stop Time, etc.) but has
fewer options when formatting the printout:

You can still select which tags you wish to print and create headings, change the width, display format, and data
type.
You also have the option of setting the number of lines printed per page (up to 60) or you can use a targeted tag
address if you wish to dynamically change the lines per page during runtime operation.

Start/End Print Time for the Data Logger

After you have configured the format of the printouts (using the Print Properties button), you need to determine
the period of time that is to be printed. This is done by clicking the Start/End Time Tags for Printing tab in the

259
Data Logger:

The Start/End date and time settings do not determine when the HMC will start printing to the serial printer.
That is determined by configuring two Function Keys (or Advanced Bit Buttons) which, when pressed, will start
and stop the Data Logger output to the serial printer. Rather these settings determine what part of the collected
data is to be sent to the printer based upon the Date and Time recorded. For example, my Data Logger may have
recorded data from three registers over a period of several days. But I only want to print a portion of this data,
beginning on the specified Start Date/Time on this tab and ending on the specified End Date/Time settings. Or I
may have a Data Group configured that gathers data over a 24 hour period every day but I only want to print the
data collected between the hours of 7am and 8am. These settings are used for this purpose.
Printing Duration: this determines the number of days that the printing occurs.
• Single Day – this option is available only when ‘Logging with Runtime Frequency’ is selected as the
logging mode. Enter the tag registers that determine the particular day (day of month, month, and year)
of data that is to be printed. During operation, the HMC will print a report of all data collected within the
24 hour period of the day selected, when the Key Specific Task – Start Printing of Group# with Port# is
pressed.
• More than 1 Day – this option is used to print all data collected for the selected data group during a
specified time period. Rather than a single day’s worth of data, this option allows you to select multiple
days based upon the values read from the tag registers assigned to the Start and End dates. During
operation, the HMC will print a report of all data collected within the period selected, when the Key
Specific Task – Start Printing of Group# with Port# is pressed.

260
Start/End Entries: these are the tag registers that the HMC reads to determine what the Start/End Date and
Time (if More than 1 Day is selected) periods are. The HMC will read these registers whenever the operator
presses the Key Specific Task – Start Print of Group# with Port# function key to initiate printing. Both 16-bit and
32-bit tags can be assigned to each register but only 16-bit is necessary. Data is interpreted by the HMC as
unsigned integers with the following ranges:
Tag Description Range
Start/End – DD Day of month 1-31 (1st day of month =1, …)
Start/End – MM Month 1-12 (Jan=1, …, Dec=12)
Start/End – YY Year 0-99 (last two digits of year)
Start/End – hh Hour 0-23 (24 hour format)
Start/End – mm Minute 0-59
Start/End – ss Seconds 0-59
 Note: once you have initially configured the Start/End Time Tags for Printing, if you wish to edit/change these
settings at a later time, you must first click the Group# in the Groups box on the Group Information tab of the
Data Logger, and then you must click the Print Properties button to review the printout settings. If you do not
perform these steps first, then all selections in the Start/End Time Tags for Printing tab will be greyed out and
cannot be edited.

Creating the Print Data Logger activation keys:

After you have configured how you wish the printout to look (see Formatting Data Logger Printouts), and what
portion of the captured data to print (see Configuring Print Time for the Data Logger), the final step in setting up
a serial printer to print Data Logger data is to configure activation keys. These activation keys are used to
start/stop printing. The keys can be function keys (either global or screen-dependent) or touchscreen buttons
(using the Multi-Task Single-State or Multi-Task Multi-State Button).
To create a Start/Stop Printing Data Logger key:
Go to the configuration menu for a global or screen-dependent function key or the Multi-Task Button
(see Chapter 6 – Task Management or the Advanced Objects section of Chapter 7 – Data & Display

261
 Objects for more information): (see next page)

• Click single key option, then highlight the Function key (F1, F2 …) that you wish to use.
• Under Tasks, click Press Tasks.
• From the Select Task menu, select Key’s Specific Task.
• Click Start or Stop Printing of Group. Enter the Group # (1-4).
• Under Port #, enter the com port that the serial printer is attached to (Com1 or Com2).
• Click the Add button. Should appear in the Press Tasks section as shown above.
• Click the OK button (for Multi-Task buttons).

View Logged Data from the Internal Memory

There are several methods that you can use to see the data collected by the Data Logger for each group
configured. The methods below apply only to the internal data log. For external data logs, configured to log data
directly to an SD card (HMC3000 series), refer to the External Data Logger and the FTP Client section below.
• Historical Trend Graph – this method records values read from the Data Logger over the specified
date/time. It then displays the data as a line graph. A maximum of four data points (channels) are
represented on each graph. The Historical Trend Graph is the only option available to see data from the
Data Logger on the HMC unit.
• Upload to a USB Flash drive – this method allows you to capture data in a CSV (Comma-Separated-
Value) format as a data table which is stored on an attached USB Flash Drive to the HMC.
• Upload with the MAPware software – this method allows you to upload the collected data directly into
the MAPware configuration software as a CSV file. This CSV file can then be viewed using the Tools >
Display Logged Data option from the standard menu.

262
 Using the Historical Trend Graph :
• Steps to create a Historical Trend Graph are covered in Historical Trends in the section on Trending
Objects so they will not be repeated here. However, keep in mind that the Historical Trend Graph does
not show real-time data – only data as recorded in the Data Logger.
• Use a global or screen-dependent function key or Multi-Task Bit/Word button configured as Key’s
Specific Task – Refresh All Trends to ‘refresh’ or update the Historical Trend Graph after it is initially
displayed on the HMC screen.
Use this object to display a historical trend graph that represents up to four tag registers. The Historical Trend
differs from the Real Time Trend object in that the Historical Trend receives data from the Data Logger- it does
not display real-time values taken from the PLC.

Uploading to a Flash Drive:

A standard USB Flash Drive can be connected to the USB Host port on the HMC.
• Make sure that the USB Flash Drive has been formatted as FAT or FAT32.
• Although most USB Flash Drives should be acceptable, we have tested 1GB to 8GB memory from the
following manufacturers:
Transcend
SanDisk
Kingston
PNY
Sony
• Make sure you make a backup of all critical data on the USB Flash Drive before attempting to use it on
the HMC
Insert the USB Flash drive into the USB Host port of the HMC. It makes no difference if the HMC is powered up
when you insert the drive.
 Note: whenever you start the download process to the USB Flash Drive, the HMC will temporarily not
respond to touchscreen key presses until it has completed the download process. Screen data updates will also
be affected. This is normal but we do recommend taking your HMC ‘offline’ while performing this operation. The
time required to download varies depending upon the total size of the Data Log file but may take several
minutes to complete.
45 ► Method 1:
1. Configure a quick button (Set Bit) to turn on internal memory bit S00037 (USB host menu trigger).
2. When the HMC displays the screen with this button, press it to see:

263
 3. Press ‘Yes’ and a number of messages will display as the HMC attempts to read the USB Flash Drive.
Eventually, the following message should appear:

4. Click ‘Upload’ to see:

5. Click ‘Application+Logged Data’ to see:

6. Click OK. The message ‘Uploading Application file’ should appear along with a System Load Bar. After
some time, another message ‘Uploading Logged Data file’ should appear. The entire Data Log file (size is
256KB, 512KB, 1024KB, or 2048KB depending upon memory allocated) is uploaded into the Flash Drive.
When done, a message appears indicating that the Upload was completed successfully – Press OK to
continue.
7. Click OK. The Upload Option screen reappears. Click ‘Exit’ to leave this menu. The HMC will now reboot
and run the project.
8. Remove the Flash Drive from the HMC and examine the files using your computer. Two files should be
present:
HMCModel.mpl – this is the project application file that you can select and configure using the
MAPware configuration software.
Logger_Data.bin – this is the Data Log file that the HMC uses internally to record all data collected
using the Data Logger feature. To view the data, you must rename this file to Logger.bin and then
copy this file into the main directory of MAPware (ex. C:\MapleSystems\MAPware7000).
9. In MAPware, click Tools > Display Logged Data.
The data is converted into a CSV file (Logg.csv) and displayed using Microsoft Excel.
46 ► Method 2: Configure the USB Data Log Upload task to download a particular data group (1-4) to the USB
Flash Drive.
1. The USB Data Log Upload task can be initiated in several ways:
Using a global or screen-dependent function key with the Press Task or Released Task.
Using a Multi-State Single/Multiple Task touchscreen button with the Press Task or Released Task.
Use the Power-On or Global Task option.
Use any of the screen-dependent tasks.

264
 Use the USB Data Log Upload instruction (see Functions when Logic Block selected)
2. When the USB Data Log Upload task is selected using a Function key, the following screen appears:

Before you Add the selected task to the Press Task field, you must select several registers that are used
by the HMC during upload. All referenced tags must be internal memory of the HMC and must be 16-bit
registers.
3. DateTime: this is the Start/End Date/Time tag registers that determine what portion of the Data Log file
is uploaded to the USB Flash Drive. The HMC will read twelve consecutive registers beginning with the
tag address referenced.
Register Description Value Range
Referenced Tag+0 Start Date: Day 1-31
+1 Start Date: Month 12
+2 Start Date: Year 0-99
+3 Start Date: Hour 0-23
+4 Start Date: Minute 0-59
+5 Start Date: Seconds 0-59
+6 End Date: Day 1-31
+7 End Date: Month 12
+8 End Date: Year 0-99
+9 End Date: Hour 0-23
+10 End Date: Minute 0-59
+11 End Date: Seconds 0-59
4. Group: this is the tag register that the HMC reads to determine which Data Group to upload. Valid
number: 1-4
5. Start Register For Filename or Filename:
Select ‘Start Register for Filename’ to reference four consecutive registers. These registers are
interpreted by the HMC as ASCII characters (two characters per 16-bit register) to create a filename
that is used by the HMC when uploading.
Select ‘Filename’ to manually enter the name for the upload file.

265
6. StatusRegister: the HMC will use this register to enter a status code number which can be used to
communicate any errors during upload or status:
Status Description
Code
Number
3 Error: Logger Group Invalid
5 Error: The File Output Device code is invalid
6 Error: The Start/End Data/Time is invalid
51 Error: The USB Flash Drive not detected
52 Error: Get Descriptor Error
53 Error: Set Address Error
54 Error: Get Configuration Error
55 Error: Set Configuration Error
56 Error: Can’t read USB Flash Drive
57 Error: Host MS Inquiry Bad
58 Error: Host Request Sense Bad
59 Error: Host Read Capacity Error
60 Error: Host Test Unit Ready Error
61 Error: Host MS Read Error #10
62 Error: Host MS Write Error #10
81 USB Data Read Complete
82 Host MS Task Complete
85 Folder Created
86 Folder Found
87 File Search Complete
File with same name found and deleted,
88
created new file and begin download
89 New file created; begin download
90 Data Log uploaded successfully
255 Task and Instruction values read
7. After you have selected appropriate tag addresses to use, click the ‘Add’ button to add the USB Data Log
Upload task to the task list. Make sure you create a project screen that can be used to enter the correct
values for each register used (see example below):

266
 8. During operation, go to the project screen that you created to enter the Start/Stop Date/Time.
Remember that this is the portion of the Data Log that you wish to capture to the USB Flash Drive.
9. Enter the Group# that you wish to capture.
10. Enter the name of the file (not required if you are using a predefined filename) for the USB Flash Drive
upload. Up to 8 characters are allowed.
11. Next, activate download to the USB Flash Drive using the function key or task you created. Use the USB
Status code register to provide status of the download.
Tip: Create a Message Data object to display a message for each status code.
12. After the download is complete, you can remove the USB Flash Drive from the HMC and connect it to
your computer. You should see a folder with the model name of the HMC you are using. Click the folder
to see the CSV files that you uploaded:

13. Click the CSV file to load the file into Microsoft Excel:

Upload with the MAPware software:

47 The last method of uploading Data Log files from the HMC is to use the MAPware software and simply upload
the Data Log file. To do this, connect the HMC to your computer, and then perform the following steps:
1. Start MAPware, and then close out any project that is automatically loaded.

267
 2. Click Project > Transfer > Upload from the standard menu. The Upload From Device dialog box is
displayed:

3. Click ‘Logged Data’ in the Project section, and then click the Upload button.
4. Click OK to begin the upload process. Once completed, click the Close button. The Data Log file is
automatically stored onto your computer in the same directory that the MAPware software is located
(default is C:\Maple Systems\MAPware7000) as “Logg.csv”. To view this file, click Tools > Display Logged
Data from the MAPware standard menus. The file will display using Microsoft Excel:

External Data Logger

External Data Logging Configuration

The HMC3000 series has the option to log data to an external micro SDHC card. 4-32GB Capacity, supported
speeds include Classes 2, 4, 6, 10, and UHS Class 1. Data can also be periodically sent to an ftp server through
the Ethernet port.
To configure an external Data Logger click the External memory folder in the Data Logger folder of the Project
Information Window.

268
This will display the external data logger configuration window.

Configuring an external data log is essentially the same as configuring an internal data log (see above). The
differences are:
• There are three required tags used for the external data logger:

Memory Used (In KB) (32-bit Unsigned Integer) displays the size of the data log files on the SD card
in kilobytes. This is the total size for all groups.
Log Data Clear Bit (Boolean) – Set on to erase the data log. Erases log files for all groups.
Safe Remove Bit (Boolean) – It is safe to remove the SD card when this bit is off. Indicates that the
logger is not actively writing to the SD card.
• Up to 50 groups can be configured in an external data log.
• File Name – this field is required to specify the name of the *.csv file for each group:

• The maximum sample rate is five seconds:

269
Configure the data log using the instructions detailed above. Once at least one Group is configured the FTP
option will be enabled.

Reading Data from the SD Card

The external data log is not uploaded using the upload option (Project > Tools > Upload) in MAPware. To view
the data, you must remove the SD Card and load it into a PC. The SD card contains two folders; FTP, and LOG.

The FTP folder contains a list of files that were sent to the ftp server for each group. The LOG folder contains the
*.csv files with data log data for each group. The file name corresponds to the File Name configured for the
group, as shown in the previous section.

Simply open the file using a text editor or spreadsheet application capable of displaying csv data. The format of
the data is a date and time stamp column followed by a column for each tag in the group. The Date stamp is in
dd/mm/yy format. The time stamp is in hh:mm:ss format. The first line of the file is a header that specify the
column as the date, time or tag name being logged.

Configuring the FTP Client

To configure the FTP client click the FTP folder in the Project Information Window:

When at least one Group is configured in the external data log, the Configure FTP Client option is enabled. The
HMC4000 does not require an external data log in order to use this feature, as long as an internal data log is

270
configured. Check this box to enable the fields below:

Configuration Settings
The fields in this window function as follows:
• FTP Enable Bit: When the bit is ON files will be sent to the ftp server. When OFF, nothing will be sent.
• File Resend Bit: When the bit is ON files are resent in the event that the server address or credentials
are changed.
• Group Number: This corresponds to the group configured in the data logger.
• Source Media: This is the device that contains the data log that will be sent to the FTP server. Currently
the only option is SC Card.
• Destination Media: This is the port on which the file is to be sent. Select Ethernet (3). Serial com ports
are not supported at this time.
• APN: Is Access Point Name and is only required when using a com port as the destination media. This
field is not applicable to Ethernet connection.
• User Name: This is the user name used to log into the ftp server
• Password: Password used to log into the ftp server
• Server Address: The IPv4 address of the ftp server
• Destination Path: Path to the folder on the ftp server where the data log is to be saved.
• Send at Every: Interval at which data will be sent to the ftp server. The HMC will create a new log file
every time it writes to the ftp server. Each file contains only the data for the current interval. The date
and time for the interval is appended to the file name that is written to the server. See using the ftp
feature section below from details.

Status Registers
The ftp feature provides the status registers detailed below to aid in trouble shooting any issues logging data to
the ftp server. All status registers are 16-bit unsigned integers.

271
• Media: This status register contains error codes for issues related to connection with the SD Card where
the data is saved.
Code Meaning
0 No Error
1 Data Log in Progress
2 Media OK
41 SD Card Not Connected
42 USB Not Connected
43 File Systems Not Mounted
44 FTP Status File Does Not Exist
45 Upload File Does Not Exist
46 Unable to Open File
47 FTP Driver Not Defined
48 FTP Destination Media Not Supported
49 Source Media Not Supported

• Net Connection: This status register contains error codes associated with network connection issues.
Code Meaning
0 No Error
1 Connecting to Network
2 Connected to Network
ls Net Connect Error
56 APN Error

• FTP: This status register contains error codes associated with connection to the ftp server.
Code Meaning
0 No Error
1 Authentication in Progress
2 Authentication Complete
59 User Name Length Error
60 Password Length Error
61 Server Length Error
62 Group Number Error
63 Connection Error
64 Timeout Error
65 Server Error
66 Operation Not Allowed
71 User Name Error
72 User or Password Error
77 Operation Error
78 Upload Error
79 Error Creating File
80 Unknown FTP Error

272
 • FTP Send: This register indicates the progress in sending the log file to the ftp server. Progress is
indicated as a percent of total file size; i.e., a number from 0 to 100.
• Communication: This status register contains errors related to connection status.
Code Meaning
0 No Error
1 FTP Busy
2 Healthy Communication
81 Communication Lost
82 Communication Error

Using the FTP Client feature

To use the ftp feature there must be an ftp server accessible at the configured IP address. The ftp server must be
configured with the user and password specified and must permit write access for that user. The SD card must
be present and contain a log file to send.
Provided the above conditions are met, the HMC will periodically upload a *.csv file to the ftp server. A new file
is created each time the HMC transmits data logger data to the ftp server. Each file will contain only the data
recorded since the last file was sent.
The name of each *.csv file consists of the file name specified for the group number, appended with the date
and time information for when the file was sent. The period contained in each log file is determined by the Send
File at Every field in the FTP Client Configuration window.

For example, consider an external data logger group (Data Logger > External memory) configured with:
• File Name set to logfile:

• Logging Mode set to Power Up

• Log at Every set to 5 seconds

• Logging a tag called ScaledInput

While the FTP Client is configured with Send File at Every set to 1 minute:

273
If the FTP client began sending files at 10:25:58 PM on October 17, 2017 the first file would be named:
logfile_17_10_17_22_24_58.csv

This file will contain 12 data samples, one taken every five seconds, between 22:24:58 and 22:25:58.

After 10 minutes there will be ten *.csv files:

Each one containing 12 data samples.

274
FTP Host

The HMC4000 Series models can be configured as an FTP Host or server. The FTP host function allows files such as data
log files stored on a USB or SD card on the HMC to be accessed from a PC on the local network or the internet.
All Ethernet-capable HMC4000 series models support the FTP Host feature.

Configuring the FTP Host

Find the “FTP Host” folder in the Project Information Window.

Click to open the FTP Host configuration window:

Check “Enable FTP Host” to enable the server.

The FTP host port can be set, and a username and password can be set to restrict access. Users can also be allowed to
access the server anonymously.

275
FTP Host Port
The port should be left default (21), unless you have changed the ports used for an FTP connection in your PC.

User Name
The user name must be alphanumeric, no special characters and 50 characters max.

Password
The password must be alphanumeric, no special characters and up to 6 characters are allowed.

Access File From

USB by default. SD card is only supported on hardware revision B00 and later, check the label for the hardware revision.

Anonymous
If this checkbox is selected then no need for any account password validation when attempting to log into the server.

Read Only
If read only is checked,
1. Users cannot add content to the directory.
2. Users can upload files from the server to their PC.
3. Users cannot download files from the PC to the FTP server.
4. Users cannot delete files.
5. Users cannot change the file names.

276
Accessing the FTP Host
The FTP server hosted on the HMC4000 can be accessed from a PC that shares a network connection with the HMC using
software such as WinSCP or even Windows File Explorer.
On a Windows PC that shares a network connection with the HMC4000, open File Explorer and enter the HMC IP “ftp://”
followed by the IP address of the HMC. For example, ftp://192.168.0.254.
If a username and password has been configured for the server, a prompt will appear asking for credentials:

Once server access has been granted, any content residing on the USB drive connected to the HMC will be visible.

View Data on the FTP Host

If an internal datalog has been configured, the records will not be automatically available on the FTP host, since they
reside in internal HMC memory and not on the external memory drive. (An external data log logs directly to external
memory.) In this case, a task button can be used to copy the data records to the USB drive.
Select a task button from Advanced Objects > Single State Multi Task Button and place on screen.

277
In the button properties, open the Tasks menu

Select the task “Export Data Log to CSV Group” to export the data log file as a csv to the USB drive.

278
279
Other Data Logger tools
The MAPware configuration software provides some additional features for Data Logging that make this feature
easier to use.

Reserved Memory in Tag Database for Data Logging

There are a number of system bits and registers in the tag database reserved specifically for Data Logger
functions. Some of these have already been described in the sections above but here is the complete list:
Register/Coil Tag Name Bytes R/W Recommended Object
S00012 Refresh Historical Trend Bit Read/Write Set Bit
Description: Use this bit to update or ‘refresh’ the historical trend graph.
 Note: the historical trend graph is only updated when you initially call up the screen with
the graph. Therefore, use this bit to refresh the graph without changing screens.
S00028 thru DataLog Group # Log Bit Read/Write Toggle Bit
S00031 Control
Description: Use these bits to Start/Stop data logging for the specified group when using Logging Mode:
Bit Task. 0= Stop Logging, 1= Start Logging
See How to configure the Data Logger section for more information.
S00037 USB Host Menu Trigger Bit Read/Write Set Bit
Description: Use this bit to display a menu that allows you to download the Data Log file to a USB Flash
Drive.
See Viewing Data from the Data Logger section for more information.
SW0002 Logger Memory % 16-bit Register Read Only Numeric Display
Usage
Description: This register shows a percentage of the allocated Data Log memory that has already been
used by the Data Logger.
SW0003_00 Logger Memory Full Bit 0 of 16-bit Read Only Bit Lamp
Status Register
Description: This bit indicates when the Data Logger memory is full and has stopped logging.
 Note: this bit can also be tagged to an alarm message using the Alarm feature.
See Chapter 9 – Alarms for more information.
SW0003_01 Logger Memory Clear Bit 1 of 16-bit Read Only Bit Lamp
Status Register
Description: This bit indicates when the HMC is clearing the Data Logger memory. When this bit is 1,
clearing memory is in process. When this bit is 0, process is completed.

Tasks related to Data Logging

There are a number of tasks that are specifically used for Data Logging. Some of these have already been
described in the sections above but here is the complete list:

280
 Task Name Where Available Parameters
USB Data Log Upload Power-On Tasks DateTime: 12 consecutive registers used for the
Global Tasks Start/Stop Date/Time values
Screen Tasks- Group: 1 register for recording the Group #.
Before Showing Screen Filename: 4 consecutive registers used to create
While Showing Screen filename used in USB Flash Drive.
After Hiding Screen Status Register: 1 register to provide status of
Key Tasks (Global or download.
Screen-Dependent)
And Multi-Task Buttons
Press task
Pressed task
Released task
Description: This task is used to download a Data Log file to an attached USB Flash Drive. See
‘Uploading to a Flash Drive’ section earlier in this chapter.
Key’s Specific Task: Key Tasks (Global or NA
Refresh All Trends Screen-Dependent)
And Multi-Task Buttons
Press task
Released task
Description: This task is used to refresh the Historical Trend. See ‘Viewing Data from the Data
Logger’ section earlier in this chapter.
Key’s Specific Task: Key Tasks (Global or NA
Start/Stop Logger for All Screen-Dependent)
Groups And Multi-Task Buttons
Press task
Released task
Description: Use this task to begin or stop logging data for all data groups configured as
Logging Mode: Key Task in the Data Logger
Key’s Specific Task: Key Tasks (Global or # = 1-4
Start/Stop Logger of Screen-Dependent)
Group # And Multi-Task Buttons
Press task
Released task
Description: Use this task to begin or stop logging data for a specific data group configured as
Logging Mode: Key Task in the Data Logger
Key’s Specific Task: Key Tasks (Global or NA
Clear Log Memory Screen-Dependent)
And Multi-Task Buttons
Press task
Released task
Description: Use this task to clear all internal memory of the HMC which is allocated for the
Data Logger.

281
 Task Name Where Available Parameters
Key’s Specific Task: Key Tasks (Global or A = 1-4 (data group)
Start/Stop Printing of Screen-Dependent) B = 1-2 (serial com port)
Group A with Port B And Multi-Task Buttons
Press task
Released task
Description: Use this task to begin or stop printing data for a specific data group to a
connected serial printer

Trending Objects
There are several screen objects that allow you to view either historical logged data or real-time information.

Real Time Trend

The Trend object represents up to four target tag registers on an X/Y plot with values recorded versus time.
Registers can be consecutive or chosen individually. Values plot according to a predefined time interval or using
a time interval as specified by a PLC register. Values can be read from 8/16/32 bit registers in signed/unsigned,
BCD, or floating-point format.

282
Place a Trend object on screen
• Use one of the following:
click Draw > Display Objects > Real Time Trend from the standard menu
click Advanced Objects > Trend from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the Trend Graph object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the Trend Graph object and release. The object appears on
screen and the Trend Properties box displays.

Trend Properties Options

• Appearance section – these attributes determine the general look of the trend.
• Background Color – determines the fill or background color of the trend graph. Click the button to
display the color palette and select a color
• Data Type – options are:
Data Type Range
Target Address (2 Target Address (4 bytes)
bytes)
Unsigned 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295
Signed -32768 to 32767 -2147483648 to
2147483647
Hexadecimal 0000 to FFFF 0000 to FFFFFFFF
BCD1 0 to 9999 0 to 99999999
Floating Point2 NA Maximum of 9 digits
• If the value in the monitored target register is not a valid BCD number, a dollar sign ‘$’ is displayed.
• Floating Point format is based upon the IEEE 754 standard for 32-bit single precision numbers. A
maximum of nine digits is supported. Values are rounded to the nearest decimal point (ex: if Format:
Digits After Decimal Point is set to 1 digit, then floating point number 1.52 would be displayed as 1.5 and
1.56 would be displayed as 1.6) shows the current state displayed on the Multiple Bar Graphs for editing
• Error Message Font Color – determines the color of any error messages that may appear during the
execution of the trend graph. Click the button to display the color palette and select a color.
• Font – used to configure the pixel size (WxH) of the error message. Options are 5x7 and 7x14 pixels.
 Note: error messages that do appear display along the bottom of the trend graph.
• Grid – option to display grid lines on the trend graph
• Grid Color – determines the color of the grid lines. Click the button to display the color palette and
select a color.
• Label – option to have a text label appear on the top of the trend.
Label Font – determines the font type, size, etc.
Name – Type font used
Size – select font size
Bold – select ‘True’ to enable
Italic – select ‘True’ to enable
Underline – select ‘True’ to enable
Label Text – enter the text to appear in the label. Maximum of 12 characters in length.
Label Text Color – determines the text color of the label. Click the button to display the color
palette and select a color.

283
• Language – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text.
• Span – options are Time (sec) or Tag Selected. Select Time (sec) to configure a pre-defined length of time
(in seconds) for the values plotted on the trend graph. Use Tag Selected to configure a PLC target
address continuously read by the HMC to determine the length of time used by the trend graph.
• Span Time – if Time (sec) is selected above, enter the pre-defined length of time (range is 0 to 65536) in
seconds.
• Span Time Tag Address (List Qa) if Tag Selected is chosen for Span above, this is the address of target
register continuously read by the HMC to determine the time span. Time period is seconds and the value
read must be in the range of 0 to 65535.
• Span Time Tag Name – this is the name given to the span time tagged register in the Tag Database.
• Design (List S) – identifies object.
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object.
• Tag Attributes section – use this section to configure the number of trend lines (target tag addresses)
and colors.
• Number of Tags – this is the total number of tags or channels represented on the trend graph. A channel
is a line on the graph that represents the value of a target register at a particular point in time. Range is
1 to 4 tags.
• Selected Tag Color – this is the color of the channel line for the selected tag (see Tag Selected below).
Click the button to display the color palette and select a color.
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of target register that is continuously read by the HMC to
determine the trend graph level.
• Tag Name (List Qb) – this is the name given to the tagged register in the Tag Database.
• Tag Selected – After Number of Tags is specified above, select each Tag from the pull-down list box to
configure the target Tag Address and color of the trend line.
• Time Scale Properties section – determines the layout of the X time axis.
• Format – select hours, minutes, seconds (HH:MM:SS) or hour, minutes (HH:MM).
• Number of Grids – indicate the total number of grids that indicate time intervals (along the x-axis) on the
trend graph. Range is 1 to 10.
• Scale – enable to display the time scale.
• Scale Color – Click the button to display the color palette and select a color to display the time scale.
• Value Scale Properties – sets the attributes for the Y-axis.
• Maximum – options are Max or Tag. Select Max to configure a pre-defined maximum value range on the
trend graph. Use Tag to configure a PLC target address continuously read by the HMC to determine the
maximum range used by the trend graph.
• Maximum Value – enter the maximum value when read from the target register indicates the highest
point on the trend graph.
• Maximum Tag Address (List Qa) this is the address of target register continuously read by the HMC to
determine the maximum range.
• Maximum Tag Name (List Qb) – this is the name given to the tagged register in the Tag Database.
• Minimum – options are Min or Tag. Select Min to configure a pre-defined minimum value range on the
trend graph. Use Tag to configure a PLC target address continuously read by the HMC to determine the
minimum range used by the trend graph.
• Minimum Value – enter the minimum value when read from the target register indicates the lowest
point on the trend graph.
• Minimum Tag Address (List Qa) this is the address of target register continuously read by the HMC to
determine the minimum range.

284
 • Minimum Tag Name (List Qb) – this is the name given to the tagged register in the Tag Database.
• Number of Grids – indicate the total number of grids that indicate the values (along the y-axis) recorded
on the trend graph. Range is 1 to 10.
• Scale – enable to display the value scale.
• Scale Color – Click the button to display the color palette and select a color to display the value scale

Resize a Trend object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

Historical Trend
The Historical Trend object represents up to four target tag registers on an X/Y plot with values recorded versus
time. Registers can be consecutive or chosen individually. Values plot according to a time interval specified in
the target Start/End Time Tag registers. Values are read from 8/16/32 bit registers in signed/unsigned, BCD, or
floating-point format. The Historical Trend graph differs from the Real-Time Trend graph listed above in that the
Historical Trend receives data from the Data Logger instead of real-time values taken from the PLC. Therefore,
you must configure a group of DataLog registers in the Data Logger before you configure a Historical Trend
graph (see Chapter 10 – Data Logger and Trending for more information).

Place a Historical Trend object on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Display Objects > Historical Trend from the standard menu
Click Advanced Objects > Historical Trend from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the Historical Trend Graph object. Click and hold mouse cursor.
• Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the Historical Trend Graph object and release. The object appears
on screen and the Historical Trend Properties box displays.
 Note: Before you can place a historical trend graph on the screen, you must first configure the Data
Logger (see Chapter 10 – Data Logger and Trending )

285
Historical Trend Properties Options
• Appearance section – these attributes determine the general look of the historical trend graph.
• Background Color – determines the fill or background color of the historical trend graph. Click the
button to display the color palette and select a color.
• Error Message Font Color – determines the color of any error messages that may appear during the
execution of the historical trend graph. Click the button to display the color palette and select a
color.
• Font – used to configure the pixel size (WxH) of the error message. Options are 5x7 and 7x14 pixels.
 Note: error messages that do appear display along the bottom of the trend graph.
• Grid – option to display gridlines on the historical trend graph
• Grid Color – determines the color of the gridlines. Click the button to display the color palette and
select a color.
• Label – option to have a text label appear on the top of the historical trend.
Label Font – determines the font type, size, etc.
Name – Type font used
Size – select font size
Bold – select ‘True’ to enable
Italic – select ‘True’ to enable
Underline – select ‘True’ to enable
Label Text – enter the text to appear in the label
Label Text Color – determines the text color of the label. Click the button to display the color
palette and select a color.
• Language – highlight the language that must be selected to display the entered text
• Design (List S) – identifies object
• Layout (List T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object
• Tag Attributes section – use this section to configure the number of trend lines (target tag addresses)
and colors.
• Data Type – options are
Data Type Range
Target Address (2 Target Address (4
bytes) bytes)
Unsigned 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295
Signed -32768 to 32767 -2147483648 to
2147483647
Hexadecimal 0000 to FFFF 0000 to FFFFFFFF
BCD1 0 to 9999 0 to 99999999
Floating Point2 NA Maximum of 9 digits
If the value in the monitored target register is not a valid BCD number, a dollar sign ‘$’ is displayed.
Floating Point format is based upon the IEEE 754 standard for 32-bit single precision numbers. A
maximum of nine digits is supported. Values are rounded to the nearest decimal point (ex: if Format:
Digits After Decimal Point is set to 1 digit, then floating point number 1.52 would be displayed as 1.5
and 1.56 would be displayed as 1.6) shows the current state displayed on the Multiple Bar Graphs
for editing.

286
• Number of Tags – this is the total number of tags or channels that are represented on the historical
trend graph. A channel is a line on the graph that represents the value of a target register at a particular
point in time. Range is 1 to 4 tags.
• Selected Tag Color – this is the color of the channel line for the selected tag (see Tag below). Click the
button to display the color palette and select a color.
• Tag – After Number of Tags is specified above, select each Tag from the pull-down list box to configure
the target Tag Address and color of the trend line.
• Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of target register that is read by the HMC to determine the
historical trend graph level.
 Note: Only tag addresses that have been configured in the Data Logger are displayed as options. Also
note that the Historical Trend Graph does not read the current value in the tag address – to do that you
need to use a Real-time Historical Trend Graph. Rather, upon displaying the screen with the Historical
Trend Graph, the HMC will read the recorded data values for the selected tag address in the Data Log
memory according to the Start/End Time Tag Settings below. If the Data Logger has no data recorded for
the specified tag address during the Start/End Times selected, than no trend line is drawn. The Historical
Trend Graph is updated only when the screen is ‘refreshed’ using a function key or Multi-State button
configured as Key’s Specific Task-Refresh All Trends or when the screen is initially displayed.
• Tag Name (List Qb) – this is the name given to the tagged register in the Tag Database.
• Time Scale Properties section – determines the layout of the X time axis.
• Number of Grids – indicate the total number of grids that indicate time intervals (along the x-axis) on the
trend graph. Range is 1 to 10.
• Scale – enable to display the time scale.
• Scale Color – Click the button to display the color palette and select a color to display the time scale.
• Start/End Time Tags settings – configure the target registers that the HMC monitors to determine the
Start and End time scales (both Date and Time) that are represented on the Historical Trend graph. Click
the button to display the Start/End Time Tag Settings dialog box. Each Start and End time requires
the following:
DD – a 16-bit register that is read to determine the day of the month (range: 1-31)
MM – a 16-bit register that is read to determine the month of the year (range: 12)
YY – a 16-bit register that is read to determine the year (range: 00-99)
hh – a 16-bit register that is read to determine the hour (range: 0-23)
mm – a 16-bit register that is read to determine the minute (range: 0-59)
ss – a 16-bit register that is read to determine the second (range: 0-59)
• Value Scale Properties – sets the attributes for the Y-axis
• Maximum – options are Max or Tag. Select Max to configure a pre-defined maximum value range on the
trend graph. Use Tag to configure a PLC target address continuously read by the HMC to determine the
maximum range used by the trend graph.
• Maximum Limit – enter the maximum value when read from the target register indicates the highest
point on the trend graph.
• Maximum Tag Address (List Qa) – this is the address of target register continuously read by the HMC to
determine the maximum range.
• Maximum Tag Name (List Qb) – this is the name given to the tagged register in the Tag Database.
• Minimum – options are Min or Tag. Select Min to configure a pre-defined minimum value range on the
trend graph. Use Tag to configure a PLC target address that will be continuously read by the HMC to
determine the minimum range used by the historical trend graph.

287
 • Minimum Limit – enter the minimum value when read from the target register indicates the lowest
point on the historical trend graph.
• Minimum Tag Address (List Qa) this is the address of target register that is continuously read by the
HMC to determine the minimum range.
• Minimum Tag Name (List Qb) – this is the name given to the tagged register in the Tag Database.
• Number of Grids – indicate the total number of grids which are used to indicate the values (along the y-
axis) recorded on the historical trend graph. Range is 1 to 10.
• Scale – enable to display the value scale.
• Scale Color – Click the button to display the color palette and select a color to display the value scale

Resize a Historical Trend object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

XY Plot (single and multi-point)

XY Plot (single point): Plot the value in one register against the value in another register. A single point is
displayed on the plot, the position of the point changes as the values in the registers change over time.
Reference lines can be added to the grid to help determine if the data points are within an acceptable range. An
error message will display along the bottom of the plot when values are read that are outside the specified grid
range.
XY Plot (multipoint – IEC programming mode only): In this mode, data points (historic) previously recorded are
not erased when new data points (current) are read. Up to 100 historic data points can be displayed. Data can
be retentive so that it is maintained even if power is removed from the HMC. When the Data Point with Line and
Line Only features are used, a line is drawn between each data point.

Place an XY Plot object on screen

• Use one of the following:
Click Draw > Display Objects > XY Plot from the standard menu
Click Advanced Objects > XY Plot from the Draw toolbar

• Move cursor to a start point for the XY Plot object. Click and hold mouse cursor.

288
 • Drag mouse cursor to an end point for the XY Plot object and release. The object appears on screen and
the XY Plot Properties box displays.

XY Plot Properties Options

• Appearance section – these attributes determine the general look of the trend.
Error Message Color – Color of error message displayed when X and Y values are invalid
Error Message Font – Font of error message displayed when X and Y values are invalid
Grid – display horizontal and or vertical lines on the plot area
Grid – Color of grid lines
Label (list H) – Select whether or not the XY Plot will have a label
Language (list J) – Select language to for each label
Number of X-Axis grid – Number of vertical grid lines to display on the plot area
Number of Y-Axis grid – Number of horizontal grid lines to display on the plot area
XY-Plot Bg Color – Color of XY Plot area background
• Layout (list T) – coordinates (i.e. size and position) for the object
• RefLineAttributes (single point only) – Configure up to 3 reference lines to display over the top of the XY
Plot area
Reference Line – Enable (Yes) or disable (No) the reference line feature
Number of Ref. Lines – Indicate the number of reference lines to be displayed on the Plot. Range
is 1 to 3.
Ref. Line Selected – Select which reference line’s properties are currently displayed for editing
Ref. Line Crossover Detection – When this property is enabled, for the selected Reference line, a
bit is set or cleared depending on which side of the reference line the point is on. The bit will be
true when the point is to the left of the reference line, and off when the bit is to the right of the
line.
Note: If 3 non-linear points are used for the reference line, unexpected behavior of crossover
detection may occur.
Ref. Line TagAddress of Crossover Detection – Address of the Boolean tag that is set when the
selected reference line is crossed. This property is only available when Show Crossover
Detection is enabled.
Ref. Line TagName of Crossover Detection – Tag name of the Boolean tag that is set when the
selected reference line is crossed. This property is only available when Show Crossover
Detection is enabled.
Ref. Line Type – Select appearance of the Reference line. Options: Continuous, Dashed
Ref. Line Color – Select the color for the reference line
Ref. Line Label – Display a label corresponding to the selected reference line
Ref. Line Number of Points – Number of points used to define the slope and offset of the
reference line. Range is 2 to 3. The slope of the reference line is determined by specifying a
number of points along the line. Points can be specified by entering the X and Y coordinates for
each point or by designating tags that contain the coordinates.
Ref. Line Selected Point – Select the point to configure. Each point will be given an X and Y
coordinates using the properties that follow.
X-Axis Maximum of Reference Line – Select whether to enter a value for the X-Axis
coordinate of this point (Max) or select a tag that will contain the value of the X coordinate
(Tag)
X-Axis value – If Max is selected above, enter the X coordinate for this point

289
 X-Axis Tag Address – If Tag is selected in the property above, specify the address of the tag
that will contain the X Axis coordinate of this point
X-Axis Tag Name – If Tag is selected in the property above specify the name of the tag that
will contain the X-Axis coordinate of this point
Y-Axis Maximum of Reference Line – Select whether to enter a value for the Y-Axis
coordinate of this point (Max) or select a tag that will contain the value of the Y coordinate
(Tag)
Y-Axis value – If Max is selected above enter the Y coordinate for this point
Y-Axis Tag Address – If Tag is selected in the property above specify the address of the tag
that will contain the Y Axis coordinate of this point
Y-Axis Tag Name – If Tag is selected in the property above specify the name of the tag that
will contain the Y-Axis coordinate of this point
• Tag Attributes – Configure the tags that will contain the values being plotted
Retain Data (multipoint only) – Retain data after a power cycle. Tags created to hold the multipoint
data will be assigned as retentive if selected.
Action after memory is full (multipoint only) – Options are FIFO (first in, first out, as data is read, the
oldest data is discarded after the number of points is exceeded) and Stop Logging (once the number
of data points specified has been read, the plot will stop logging new data points).
Line color (multipoint only) – Set the line color.
Line Width (multipoint only) – Sets line width.
Number of points (multipoint only) – Sets the number of points to be plotted. Maximum of 100
points allowed. Tags are automatically created in the HMC to hold the past data points when using
multipoint.
Plot Style (multipoint only) – Choices include Data Point Only, Data Point with Line, and Line Only.
Point Color – Select a color for the point that will appear on the Plot
X-Axis Tag Address – Specify the address of the Tag containing the X coordinate of the point.
X-Axis Tag Name – Specify the name of the tag containing the X coordinate of the point.
Y-Axis Tag Address – Specify the address of the Tag containing the Y coordinate of the point.
Y-Axis Tag Name – Specify the name of the tag containing the Y coordinate of the point.
• Value Scale Properties – Specify the data type and range for the X and Y axis of the plot
X-Axis Data Type
X-Axis Minimum Value – Specify the starting point of the X axis
X-Axis Maximum Value – Specify the ending point of the X axis
Y-Axis Data Type
Y-Axis Minimum Value – Specify the starting point of the Y axis
Y-Axis Maximum Value – Specify the ending point of the Y axis

Resize an XY Plot object

Move the mouse pointer over one of the resize handles. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow,
simply click and drag to a new location.

290
Chapter 11 – Miscellaneous Features
This chapter reviews some features available in the MAPware software and the HMC Series that are important
but do not easily fit in other chapters of this manual.
The features described include:
• Membrane Function Keys
• Data Monitor feature
• Application Memory Status
• Keep Memory Area
• Real Time Clock
• Internal Battery

Membrane Function Keys

The HMC7030 models have six function keys plus a numeric keypad for a total of 18 membrane style keys. This
chapter explains how to configure these keys.

Each function key can be configured to perform a task (or action) such as displaying screens, setting bits or
writing constant values to registers, or a myriad of other tasks. Besides simply performing a task, each key can
be programmed to do the following:
• Execute one or multiple tasks with a single key press (see Chapter 6 – Task Management)
• Tasks execute based upon pressing the key, press and holding the key, and/or releasing the key
• Option to execute tasks only when two keys are pressed simultaneously (can be used as safety feature)
• Keypad keys are predefined to specific number tasks, but can be reassigned to any combination of tasks
needed
• Keys can be global (task is executed regardless of the screen displayed) or screen-dependent (task
executed only when a specific screen is on display)
These features combine to make the function keys on the HMC7030 models very versatile and powerful.

291
Global vs Screen-Dependent Function Keys
A Global Function Key executes a task no matter what screen is on display on the HMC.
A Screen-Dependent Function Key executes a task only when the particular screen it is tagged to is currently
displayed on the HMC:

Global Screen-Dependent
The exception to this rule is when you have the same function key configured as both a global and a screen-
dependent key. For example, suppose F1 is configured as a Global key with the task of ‘GoTo Screen’. On Screen
#1, the F1 key is also configured to ‘Write a Value’. During operation, if Screen #1 is displayed and F1 is pressed,
the task ‘Write a Value’ is executed, because Screen Dependent function keys have priority over Global function
keys. The global task assigned to the F1 key is not performed when Screen #1 is active. If F1 is pressed any time
Screen #1 is not displayed, it will execute its global ‘GoTo Screen’ task.

Configuring a Function Key

• For global keys, click the Keys folder (or Define > Global Keys) in the Project Information Window. For
screen-dependent keys, click the Keys sub folder located in each Screen folder of the Project
Information Window.

292
• Click the function key that you wish to configure. This key will be highlighted like the F1 key in the
picture below.

• Under Select Key Type: choose the Single Key option or Two Simultaneous Keys.
Single Key – this option configures only one key to perform the assigned task
Two Simultaneous Keys – this option allows you to select two keys (by highlighting two of the
function or keypad keys) which during operation, must both be pressed to perform the assigned
tasks.

• Tasks: Before you select which task you want (see Select Task below), you must decide what key action
activates the task. There are three options:
Press tasks: task(s) execute each time the target key is pressed by the operator. It does not matter if
the key is pressed and released or pressed and held down, the associated task(s) will execute only
once per key press.
Pressed tasks: task(s) continuously execute while the associated key is held down. With this option,
the HMC will repeatedly send the command(s) until the key is released.
Released tasks: task(s) execute when the operator releases the pressed key.
 Note that the associated task only executes once per key release.
Click the radio button of the key action you prefer for that task. Multiple tasks can be added to each
option for a single key.
• Select Task: click the scroll-down menu to select one of the tasks available (see Chapter 6 – Task
Management for more information on what each task does). If additional parameters are required for

293
 the selected task, they will appear in the area below (as shown for Screen Number and Screen Name for
the GoTo Screen task above). Enter the required additional parameters. Then click the Add button. The
task is entered into the selected key action.

Updating/modifying the operation of a function key

To change the tasks assigned to each function key, highlight the particular function key, then highlight the task
you wish to modify:

You will then be able to modify any assigned tasks as normal.

294
Data Monitor
The Data Monitor feature is a window available in the MAPware software that displays data values in HMC
internal memory. The entire internal memory of the HMC is accessible using the Data Monitor but you select
what areas of memory you wish to monitor. In addition to reading values, you can modify data online or create a
table of preset values to download to the registers. With this feature, you can quickly view data in table format
or to initialize areas of memory in the HMC.
To access the Data Monitor window, click View > Data Monitor Window from the standard menu, or click the
Data Monitor icon in the standard toolbar or click the Data Monitor folder in the Project Information
Window:

By default, the monitor shows a block of ten registers in the Timer (T) memory. To create or edit additional
blocks of memory, right click anywhere on the Data Monitor window to display a popup dialog box:

Create a New Block

By clicking the New Block option in the dialog box above, the following is displayed:

295
 • Appendix A – Internal Memory for more information on internal memory). In the numeric entry box,
enter the starting address of the memory selected.
• Size: this number represents the block of memory (registers) monitored. For example, if D0 is entered
into the Address section and 16 is entered in Size, the Data Monitor will show a range of addresses from
D0 to D15.
• Data Type: this option varies according to the memory area selected. When available, select how the
data is interpreted and displayed in the Data Monitor window. Options are Signed, Unsigned, and
Hexadecimal.
• Data Size: each register monitored can be a bit, (i.e. B memory), 2 bytes, or 4 bytes.
• Color: you can display the block of memory using a particular color.
• Click OK to add the block.

Delete a Block
Click Delete Block to display the following:

The Delete Block dialog box displays all of the blocks currently configured, along with the size of each block. To
delete a particular block, simply highlight (click) the block you wish to delete and click the OK button.

Editing a Block
To modify a block listed in the Data Monitor window, right click any of the addresses listed within the block to
display the popup dialog box. Then click the Edit Block option:

296
See ‘Creating a Block’ for information on what each field does.

Importing/Exporting Data
The Data Monitor table can be exported as a CSV (comma-separated value) file to be used by another project or
edited outside of the MAPware software. Then import the file into an existing project.

To export:
• Click Export Data from the popup dialog box
• In the Save As box, enter the name you wish to give to the CSV file. Then click OK.

To import:
• Right click anywhere in the Data Monitor window to display the popup dialog box
• Click Import Data
• In the Open box, locate the CSV file that you wish to import, and then click to highlight it.
• Click OK. A popup dialog box appears asking if you wish to overwrite any of the values in existing
memory registers. When editing the CSV file, you can change the address, value in each address, data
format and/or byte length. By clicking ‘Yes’, changes are made to memory addresses that already exist.
Clicking ‘No’ prevents the imported data from altering any addresses that already exist in the file – only
new addresses are added.

Using Data Monitor to Download Preset Values

After you have created the data registers that you wish to monitor, you may wish to preload these registers with
values. This is easily done by configuring a value for each register, then downloading the values into the HMC
unit.
• Open the project you wish to download to the HMC.

297
• Configure the registers in the Data Monitor window (see steps in the first section of this chapter). Below
is an example:

• Double-click each register to set a value:

 Note that for bit registers (i.e. B memory), although the data is represented under the Binary Value
column with 16 bits, it is really a single bit register. Therefore, when entering a value, you have two
options: 0 or 1. Continue clicking each register until you have entered all of your preset values.

• Next, save and compile your project, then click the Download icon to display the Download screen:

298
 • Under Project, make sure that Data is checked. This will download the preset values in the Data Monitor
window to the HMC. Click Download to begin.

Monitoring Data using the Data Monitor

Once you have created your Data Monitor window and downloaded your preset values (this is an optional step),
you are ready to monitor the HMC.
• Start MAPware (it is not necessary to open a project).
• Connect your computer to the HMC, you wish to monitor.
• Click the Go Online button in the standard toolbar. When clicked, MAPware will go online with the
PLC using the currently open application.
• Presently, MAPware displays a message stating that it is loading data from the HMC (this takes a few
minutes). When finished, the MAPware software displays the main Logic block:

• Click the Data Monitor icon or press F10 on your keyboard to display the Data Monitor window:

• You can change values while online with the HMC simply by double-clicking a register:

299
 • The new value is sent to the HMC immediately after you press the Set button.
• You can also place the HMC in Halt mode. In Halt mode, the HMC discontinues running the project and
displays a screen:

Halt mode is useful if you wish to change values in the Data Monitor window but not while the HMC is
running the project you downloaded into it. However, the HMC will clear all internal memory registers
(except the retentive memory) when you place the HMC in Run mode again.
To place the unit in Halt mode, click the Halt icon in the standard toolbar. To resume, click the Run
icon.
• When you are finished using the Data Monitor mode, click the Go Online button again to go offline.
 Note: you can add or edit the blocks listed in the Data Monitor window when online with the HMC.

Application Memory Status

The Application Memory Status feature is a tool available in the MAPware software that is used to display
memory used by the current project. This tool can be used to determine how much memory is still available for
new screens, ladder logic, etc.:

It also provides details on how the screen memory is currently allocated. The memory is divided into three main
areas:
• Application Memory – this is the memory used for screens, global tasks, alarms, and tags.
• Data Logger Memory – indicates how much memory has been allocated for the data logger feature.

300
 • Ladder Logic Memory – shows how much memory has been consumed for the ladder logic diagrams.
This tool is accessible is by clicking Tools > Application Memory Status from the menu bar.

Keep Memory Area and Retentive Tags

For projects created in Native Ladder programming mode, the Keep Memory Area feature provides the ability to
retain values in designated internal memory after removing power from the HMC. Click Define > System
Parameters from the menu bar:

To enable, click the Enable/Disable checkbox next to the memory that you wish to use (BW, T, C, or D). Enter the
number of registers (starting with 0) that you want as retentive memory. For BW, T and C registers up to 256
registers (0 to 255) can be used as keep memory. Up to 1000 D registers (0 to 999) can be used as keep memory.
The total number of keep memory registers cannot exceed 1000.
 To use these registers, you must initialize them in the Tag Database.
For projects created in IEC 61131-3 programming mode, tags do not have specified addresses so the option to
specify a range of addresses as keep memory described above is disabled. Instead there is an option to
designate a tag as Retentive when the tag is created in the tag database:

A tag created with this option will behave exactly as a tag created in the Keep Memory area of a Native Ladder
project. A maximum of 2,000 bytes can be used to define Retentive tags (i.e., 500 DINTs, 1,000 INTS, 16,000
BOOLs etc., or some combination thereof). Tags created as Global can be changed to Retentive during project
development and vice versa.

301
When you download your project into the HMC unit, there are two options listed in the Download to Device
window of MAPware in the Device Settings section:

• Initialize keep memory area after download – if checked, the designated Keep Memory Areas are set to
0 after download is completed. If not checked, the values in the Keep Memory Areas are retained.
Similarly, in IEC 61131-3 mode projects Retentive tag values are set to 0 if this box is checked and
retained through the download if it is unchecked.
• Initialize all device registers except keep memory after download – if checked, the entire internal tag
registers (i.e. D, X, XW, C, T, etc.) memory of the HMC are set to 0 after download except for any
registers designated as Keep Memory.
 Note: this memory area is automatically set to 0 if power is removed from the HMC unit. If not
checked, values in these areas are retained, unless power is removed. This option is not available in IEC
61131 projects; instead non-Retentive tags are set to the value specified in the initial value field in the
Add Tag or Edit Tag windows in the tag database.

Real Time Clock

The internal battery powers the real-time clock (RTC) when the HMC is not powered by external 24VDC.
Normally, the internal battery should be able to provide power to the RTC for approximately 20 years (@25°C).

Reading the Date/Time

The Clock objects (Time and Date) are used to display the date and time on an HMC screen. Each field of the RTC
data can also be read and individually displayed on screen by using the designated system word registers (SW10
thru SW16) in the tag database.

302
Other reserved registers that pertain to the clock are:
Tag Tag Name Tag Description Access
No. Address
42 RTC day of month SW0010 Ex: 1-31, Unsigned format Read Only
43 RTC month SW0011 Ex: 12, Unsigned format Read Only
44 RTC year SW0012 Ex: 0-99, Unsigned format Read Only
45 RTC hour SW0013 Ex: 0-23, Unsigned format Read Only
46 RTC min SW0014 Ex: 0-59, Unsigned format Read Only
47 RTC sec SW0015 Ex: 0-59, Unsigned format Read Only
48 RTC day of week SW0016 Ex: 1-7, Unsigned format With 1=Sun…7=Sat Read Only
5 Minute Change Status S00003 Momentarily sets whenever the minute value in Read Only
SW14 changes
6 Hour Change Status S00004 Momentarily sets when the hour value in SW13 Read Only
changes
7 Date Change Status S00005 Momentarily sets when the date value in SW10 Read Only
changes
8 Month Change Status S00006 Momentarily sets when the month value in Read Only
SW11 changes
9 Year Change Status S00007 Momentarily sets when the year value in SW12 Read Only
changes
12 RTC battery status S00010 Sets when battery is dead Read Only
17 Invalid RTC date entry S00019 Sets while an invalid value is in one of the RTC Read Only
registers
36 RTC Status SW0003_02 Sets if the RTC is not working Read Only

Writing the Date/Time

You can set or change the internal RTC using several means:
• By using the Set RTC task for a function key or one of the multi-task buttons (see Chapter 6 – Task
Management)
• By using the Set Calendar (CLND) instruction in the ladder logic commands (see The HMC Series Ladder
Logic Instructions Manual)
• By importing the SetRTC popup screen from an HMC sample project with the same screen size (see
below)
You cannot directly write to the clock using the SW106 internal system registers. However, if you wish to write
directly, simply use the Numeric Entry object with data registers that are referenced in the Set Calendar
instruction in a ladder logic program.
To import the SetRTC popup screen into your project, select [Screen] > [Import Screen] find the HMC######
STARTUP.mpl project file for the same HMC model that you are using. These projects are downloaded along
with MAPware7000 and can be found in the directory C:\MapleSystems\MAPware7000\Projects\
Import the screen no. 65005 and select the option “Keep Internal Tags”.

303
On a screen in your project, place a “Open Popup Screen” button and set it to open Screen Number 65005.

304
MQTT
MQTT Stands for “Message Queueing Telemetry Transport”. It is an extremely simple and lightweight messaging
protocol (subscribe and publish) designed for limited devices and networks with high latency, low bandwidth or
unreliable networks. Devices configured as clients can publish and subscribe to topics. Data published to a topic
is sent to a centralized Broker, which can reside on a local device or on a cloud server. The Broker then forwards
this data to all clients that are subscribed to that topic.
Any HMC4000 Series model is configurable as an MQTT client. Click on the MQTT folder in the Project
Information Window

MQTT Broker
Click MQTT Broker to define the parameters of the broker that your HMC will be publishing to.

305
MQTT Cloud
Select External.

MQTT Protocol
If your broker is configured for a specific version of the MQTT protocol, select that one.

Broker/Server Address
Enter the URL or IP address of the broker that the HMC4000 will be publishing to.

Port
Currently, the port setting is fixed at the default MQTT port 1883.

User Name/Password
If your broker requires authentication, enter those credentials here. Otherwise leave blank for anonymous
connection.

Keep Alive Time

MQTT uses a TCP/IP connection.
This connection is normally left open by the client so that is can send and receive data at any time.
If no data flows over an open connection for a certain time period then the client will generate a PINGREQ and
expect to receive a PINGRESP from the broker.
This time period is known as the Keep Alive Time and is measured in seconds.

Registration ID
This is the value that will identify the MQTT client on the network. Often a Registration ID is not provided, so any
value will work. It should be unique and uncommon, especially if using a public open source broker.

306
Publish

Topic Name/Description
In MQTT, the word topic refers to an UTF-8 string that the broker uses to filter messages for each connected
client. The topic consists of one or more topic levels. Each topic level is separated by a forward slash (topic level
separator).
Refer to https://www.hivemq.com/blog/mqtt-essentials-part-5-mqtt-topics-best-practices/ for information and
best practices regarding topics.
Enter the topic name that the client will publish to and a short description for your reference (up to 256
characters in length). Click Add to add the topic to the Current Topics list.

QoS
The Quality of Service (QoS) level is an agreement between the sender of a message and the receiver of a
message that defines the guarantee of delivery for a specific message. There are 3 QoS levels in MQTT.
QoS 0: This service level guarantees a best-effort delivery. There is no guarantee of delivery. The recipient
does not acknowledge receipt of the message and the message is not stored and re-transmitted by the
sender.
QoS 1: This service level guarantees that a message is delivered at least one time to the receiver. The sender
stores the message until it gets a PUBACK packet from the receiver that acknowledges receipt of the
message. The message can be sent or delivered multiple times.
QoS 2: This service level guarantees that each message is received only once by the intended recipients. QoS
2 is the safest and slowest service level. The guarantee requires at least two request/response flows (a
four-part handshake) between the sender and the receiver.

307
Subscribe

Enter the topic name that the client will subscribe to and a short description for your reference. Click Add to add
the topic to the Current Topics list.

Tags
After configuring the MQTT broker, publish and subscribe topics, tags must be individually assigned to a topic,
and whether their data will be published to or subscribed from the selected topic.

This can be done by navigating to the Tag Database and adding a new tag or editing an existing tag.
Multiple tags can be assigned to the same topic.
Only local tags can be configured for MQTT. For networked node tags, transfer their data to a local tag using a
task.

308
MQTT Default Tags
The following system tags can be used to control and provide information on the connection to the broker.
Tag Name Type Address Description
MQTT_Status WORD SW0276 The value of this register is a code for the current status of the MQTT
connection. (READ ONLY)
0 – Disconnected
1 – Connected to MQTT broker
MQTT_Error WORD SW0277 Contains an error code value for the connection. (READ ONLY)
0 – No error
1 – Connection Refused
2 – Remote Host closed
3 – Host Not Found
4 – Socket Access Error
5 – Socket Resource Error
6 – Socket Timeout Error
7 – Socket Error

309
 Tag Name Type Address Description
MQTT_Run_Stop WORD SW0278 Used to manually start the connection to the broker. It can be used
like a toggle switch. (READ/WRITE)
0 – Stop (Stop the connection)
1 – Run (Attempt to connect)

Email
Email is a feature unique to the HMC4000 series. The email function works by sending a screenshot of a specific
Email Screen that is either attached or embedded in the email. This screen can contain basic shapes, text,
register display objects and bit display objects. To configure Email server settings, create contact lists and
screens, click on the Email option in the Project Information Window.

Configure
Click on Email > Configure to open the following window:

310
You will need the password of an email account, as well as the server and port number.
Below are some common Email Servers and ports:
Server Port for SSL Port for TLS
smtp.gmail.com 465 587
smtp.yahoo.com 465 587

Gmail Server (smtp.gmail.com)

Gmail uses OAuth2.0 protocol to authenticate a Google account, so there are two ways to enable the use of
your Gmail account for the HMC4000.

The first option is to enable less secure app access to your Gmail account. Log in to your Gmail account and
visit the following link:
https://support.google.com/accounts/answer/6010255?hl=en

Second option is to turn on two step authentication and create an application specific password, Use this
app password to login to the account
https://support.google.com/accounts/answer/185839?co=GENIE.Platform%3DDesktop&hl=en

Yahoo Server (smtp.yahoo.com)

Similar to Gmail account, the first option is to enable less secure app to access your Yahoo account
https://support.context.io/hc/en-us/articles/212087606-Yahoo-s-Less-Secure-App-Setting

Second option is to create application specific password. Use this app password to login to your account
https://help.yahoo.com/kb/SLN15241.html

Contact List
Click on Email > Contact List to add recipients and organize them into groups.

311
Add or remove email addresses by clicking the Add button.

In a similar fashion, groups can be added and selected. Up to 16 groups are supported.

Click the buttons to add or remove a contact from the selected category for the selected group.

312
Email Screens
Right-click on Email in the Project Information Window > Click New Email Screen.
Email screens are similar to Base Screens. Place basic shapes, text and numeric and bit displays to show data on
the Email screen. Bit Status and tag values will be recorded in the screenshot when an email is sent.
In the screen properties for the email screen, configure Attachment to be yes if the screenshot will be sent as an
attachment or no if the screenshot is to be embedded in the email body. Configure the Subject property to be
the subject for the email.

Sending Email
Email can be sent in various ways:

By Logic
The following System Tags can be used to trigger an email to be sent from logic.
Tag Name Tag System Description
Type Address
Email_control_bit BOOL S00060 Triggers an email of the screen in the email screen
number register to be sent to the group in the email
group number register.
Email_screen_number WORD SW0251 Set the number of the email screen that will be sent
Email_group_number WORD SW0252 Set the group number of the group to which the email will
be sent
Email_status_reg WORD SW0253 Contains a number code of the status of the email sent

Email Status Register Code Table:

255 Initial State
0 Server connection timeout
1 Response timeout
2 Send data timeout
3 Authentication failed
4 Server error
5 Client error
6 Invalid screen number
7 Invalid group number
8 Mail Sent Successfully

By Task
Email can be sent directly by task using a task button.

313
Single state or multistate task buttons can be found in the Advanced objects menu in the Base Screen editor.

By Alarm
Refer to Email (Alarms).

Email on Fly
The Email on Fly task can be assigned to a task button. Pressing the button at runtime will open the Email GUI.
The recipient email addresses, subject and message of the email must be entered from the screen using the on
screen keyboard.

314
System Settings Menu
The System Settings Menu can be accessed on any HMC4000 model by pressing (or clicking) and holding the top
left corner of the screen for 5 seconds.

About
A screen will appear that will display info such as Runtime Version (the firmware), the IP address and MAC
address of the unit. The System Updates feature allows a version of firmware to be uploaded to the device from
a USB flash drive.

Network Settings

Provides the option of obtaining the IP address using DHCP or setting a Static IP.

315
VNC Server

See the following section on how to configure the VNC Server.

Access

This is the screen from which the operator can log into a user account or change the password for that account.

316
Other Settings

RTC Settings
Set the date and time for the Real Time Clock. There is also the option to sync the HMC with an external NTP
server.

317
Beeper Control
Enable or disable the beep sound when an action is completed.

Brightness
The backlight brightness can be adjusted between 6 settings, ranging between full brightness and completely
off.

Screen Calibration
Selecting this button causes the HMC to reboot and enter screen calibration mode.

USB Update/Upload
Allows a project to be uploaded from a USB flash drive.

Reboot
Selecting this option will cause the HMC to reboot.

Mouse Cursor
Selecting this option allows a mouse cursor to appear on screen, so that a USB mouse can be used to navigate
the HMC screen. Forces a reboot of the HMC.

Recipe Import/Export

From this screen, recipe data can be imported or exported in .csv format from a USB drive inserted into the HMC
Host port.

318
VNC Server
The HMC4000 series support a VNC server functionality that can allow connection from a VNC client running on
a PC or mobile device such as Android or iOS.
VNC client software must be installed on the PC or mobile device in order to connect to the VNC server on the
HMC. One such option is VNC Viewer.
VNC requires that the client and server be on the same network (local or virtual) otherwise port forwarding must
be used. The VNC connection is not encrypted. Ony one client can connect to a VNC server at a time.
There are two options for authentication; either using a VNC server password or no authentication.

Authentication and Connection

To configure authentication, enter the system settings menu by pressing (or left-click-hold) the top left
corner of the screen for 5 seconds.
Navigate to the VNC Server tab. By default, Not Authentication will be selected. To set a password, select
the VNC Server Password option.
If a server password is set, the client will be prompted to enter this password when attempting a
connection. Otherwise anonymous connections will be allowed.
Return to the About tab of the System Settings and take note of the IP address.
Open the VNC client software on your PC and enter the IP address of the HMC4000 and attempt a
connection.
The HMC4000 screen will appear on the VNC client exactly as it does on the device itself. The HMC4000 can
still be operated directly from the screen as well as from the client.

Boot Up Screen
In MAPware V2.36 and newer, a custom boot up screen (HMC4000) or message (HMC2000, HMC3000) can be
configured to display after the HMC has powered on and before the project has loaded. If no custom boot up
screen is configured, the default “Maple Systems” boot up screen will display.

For HMC7000, HMC3000, and HMC2000:

To configure the boot up screen, go to Define > Bootup Screen Settings.

Click OK and download the firmware to the HMC to make the change.

319
For HMC4000:
Go to Tools > Bootup Screen Setting and select “Enable”.

The image file must be a bitmap (.bmp) and be the exact resolution of the screen. Select the model of your HMC
from the menu to determine the resolution. Click Download to download the splash screen.

Barcode Scanner
In MAPware-7000 V2.36+, the HMC4000 Series HMCs can be configured to display a string of ASCII data received
from a USB barcode scanner connected to the USB Host port.
To do so, open a base screen in your project and select the Edit Data > Barcode object and place it on the screen.
Create a String type tag in the Tag Database to assign to the Barcode object.

Barcode Properties
In the Object Properties window for the Barcode object, the Mode property can be set to “Manual” or “Auto”.

Manual

When the mode is set to Manual the Barcode object must be selected on the screen before the code can be
scanned. The scanner is ready to use when the Barcode object begins to flash. After the code is scanned, the
ASCII string will appear in the
In this mode, the value displayed in the Barcode object can be edited from the screen. This can be done when
the “Tag Show Keypad” tag is set high and the keyboard appears on the screen.

320
Auto

When the mode is set to Auto the Barcode object is ready to receive data from the scanner as long as the “Tag
Auto Mode Enable” tag is set high. The “Tag Trigger After Scan” tag will be set high after the scan is complete.

321
Appendix A – Internal Memory
Each HMC unit has internal memory which can be used for operations. The amount of memory available
depends upon which HMC model you have selected. Part of this memory is reserved for specific uses (see
Appendix B – System Tag Memory) while the rest of the memory is openly available for your application.

Native Ladder Memory Addresses

In Native Ladder mode, tags created in the tag database are given explicit addresses which are grouped together
into various address types according data format and function. The address type is selected in the Register/Coil
Type dropdown box in the Add Tag window (for directions on adding tags to a project refer to Chapter 4 – Tags)
Below is a table that defines the internal memory addresses available in Native Ladder projects. More detail on
the function of each type is given in the sections that fallow.
Type Name Range Type Access Description
Index Register (I) I00000 0 Register Only (2 Read/Write Index Register
bytes)
Index Register J00000 0 Register Only (2 Read/Write Index Register
(J) bytes)
Index Register K00000 0 Register Only (2 Read/Write Index Register
(K) bytes)
Counter Coils C.0000 0-2551 Bit Only Read/Write Counter Coils
Counter C0000 0-255 Register Only (2 Read/Write Counter Registers
Registers bytes)
Timer Coils T.0000 0-255 Bit Only Read/Write Timer Coils
Timer Registers T00000 0-255 Register Only (2 Read/Write Timer Registers
bytes)
Input Coils X000003 0- Bit Only Read Only Physical Input Coils
31015
Input Registers XW00003 0-3100 Register Only (2 Read Only Physical Input Registers
bytes)  Note: Input Coils and
Registers share same
memory
Output Coils Y000003 0- Bit Only Read/Write Physical Output Coils
31015
Output Registers YW00003 0-3100 Register Only (2 Read/Write Physical Output Registers
bytes)  Note: Output Coils and
Registers share same
memory
I/O M000003 0- Bit Only Read/Write Physical I/O Configuration
Configuration 31015 coils
Coils
I/O MW00003 or 0-3100, Bit or Register (2 Read/Write Physical I/O Configuration
Configuration MW0000_003 0-15 bytes) registers
Registers  Note: I/O Coils and I/O
Registers share same
memory

322
 Type Name Range Type Access Description
System Coils S00000 0-99 Bit Only Read/Write Status and control bits for
HMC
System Registers SW0000 or 0-255, Bit or Register (2 Read/Write Status and control registers
SW0000_00 0-15 bytes) for HMC
Internal Coils B00000 0-4095 Bit Only Read/Write General Purpose Internal
Coils
Internal BW0000 0-255 Register Only (2 Read/Write General Purpose Internal
Registers bytes) Registers
 Note: Internal Coils and
Internal Registers share
same memory
Data Registers D00000 or 0-4095, Bit or Register (1, Read/Write General Purpose Registers
D00000_00 0-15 2 or 4 bytes)
Retentive R00000 0- Register Only (1, 2 Read/Write Non-volatile memory
Registers 225272 or 4 bytes) registers

1 – The HMC7030 supports C.0000-C.0099

2 – The HMC7030 supports R0-R299, and the HMC7043 and HMC7070 support R0-R1399.
3– The first two digits of X, XW, Y, YW, M, and MW I/O addresses refer to the slot number of the I/O module.
Built in I/O will have an address of 00, while slot 1 would have a prefix of 01.
 Note: Memory areas are accessible in the Tag Database under Node Name: [HMC Model] None (-)
Generally speaking, the entire memory area of the HMC can be used for any purpose. However, the memory is
split into several classifications so that they can be used for special purposes.

Index Registers (I, J, K)

The HMC Series has three 16-bit index registers (I, J, and K) that perform a specific purpose. As the name
implies, these registers are used to ‘index’ or act as pointers to multiple registers. This method is called ‘indirect
addressing’ because the HMC does not read/write to the specified address directly. Instead, the target address is
determined indirectly by referencing the base address and the value read from the index register.
For example, if the MOV WORD instruction is used in a Ladder Logic Block, you can assign an index register to
one of the operands:

323
In this example, we use the K index register along with an internal register (D0). When this ladder rung is
executed, the HMC reads the value in the K register. It then adds this value to the D0 register (as an offset) to
determine the true register that the constant value 50 is written to. If the value in the K register is 1, then the
constant value 50 is written to internal memory register D1. If the K value is 2, then 50 is written to internal
memory register D2, and so on.
 Note: Care should be taken that the value in the index register does not cause the HMC to read/write to a
register that does not exist (the address range is not checked by the HMC).
Many of the ladder logic instructions have tag indexing capability. To find out which instructions support this
feature, see The HMC Series Ladder Logic Instructions Manual. In each section that defines a particular
instruction, you will see an Operand table with a column marked Index. This column is checked for each operand
that supports indexing.

Counter and Timer Registers/Coils (C, C., T, T.)

The HMC Series has four memory registers which are specifically used with the Counter and Timer instructions:
• Counter (C) registers
• Counter (C.) coils
• Timer (T) registers
• Timer (T.) coils
Each Timer or Counter register is ‘connected’ to a corresponding Timer or Counter coil. In a Timer or Counter
instruction, when the Timer or Counter reaches its set value, the corresponding Timer or Counter coil is set.
For example, the picture below illustrates using the ON Timer:

The timer T00001 register is used to count up to 1 sec (10msec timer). When the preset count (100) has been
reached, timer coil T.0001 is set.
See The HMC Series Ladder Logic Instructions Manual #75-79 for instructions that use counters and timers.

Input Registers/Coils (X, XW)

These registers and coils are designed for use by the physical inputs (digital or analog) from an attached or built-
in (HMC7030A-L) input expansion module. These are the only internal memory addresses of the HMC which are
read only. Therefore, the value read from these registers/coils always represents the current state of the
physical input of the expansion module assigned to it. When you start a new project and assign I/O expansion
modules to each expansion slot of the HMC, the MAPware will automatically assign the appropriate memory
addresses according to slot location. For example, the twelve built-in digital inputs of the HMC7030A-L are
assigned to coils X00000-X00011 and register XW0000. For a HMC unit that has eight digital inputs in expansion
slot #1, the MAPware software automatically assigns coil addresses X01000-X01007 and register XW0100 to the
inputs. If sixteen digital inputs are located in slot#4, the software assigns coil addresses X04000-X04015 and
register XW0400 to the inputs. If an analog module with four analog inputs is installed into slot#2, then no coil
addresses would be assigned (since these are analog inputs) and registers XW0200-XW0203 are assigned.
The X and XW registers are mapped to the same memory area in the HMC with sixteen X coils per XW register.
To determine the register and bit location of an X coil memory area use the following equation: Xnnn =
XW(nnn/16 quotient), bit (nnn/16 remainder).

324
For example, X00161 corresponds to the second least significant bit (bit 1) of XW0010 (161/16 = 10r1).

Output Registers/Coils (Y, YW)

These registers and coils are designed for use by the physical outputs (digital or analog) from an attached or
built-in (HMC7030A-L) output expansion module. The value read from these internal registers/coils is used to
determine and set the current state of the physical output of the expansion module assigned to it. When you
start a new project and assign I/O expansion modules to each expansion slot of the HMC, the MAPware will
automatically assign the appropriate memory addresses according to slot location. For example, the eight built-
in digital outputs of the HMC7030A-L are assigned to coils Y00000-Y00007 and register YW0000. For an HMC
unit that has eight digital outputs in expansion slot #1, the MAPware software automatically assigns coil
addresses Y01000-Y01007 and register YW0100 to the outputs. If twelve digital outputs are located in slot#3,
the software assigns coil addresses Y03000-Y03011 and register YW0300 to the outputs. If an analog module
with two analog outputs is installed into slot#5, then no coil addresses would be assigned (since these are
analog outputs) and registers YW0500-YW0501 are assigned.
The Y and YW registers are mapped to the same memory area in the HMC with sixteen Y coils per YW register.
To determine the register and bit location of an Y coil memory area use the following equation: Ynnn =
YW(nnn/16 quotient), bit (nnn/16 remainder).
For example, Y00161 corresponds to the second least significant bit (bit 1) of YW0010, (161/16 = 10r1).

Configuration Registers/Coils (M, MW)

These registers and coils are reserved to perform special functions when the HMC has built-in or attached
expansion modules. For example, the HMC7030A-L has the following I/O Register/Coil memory allocated for the
twelve digital inputs and eight digital outputs built into the unit:
• M00240 HSC Enable Bit (ch1)
• M00241 HSC Reset Bit (ch1)
• M00400 HSC Enable Bit (ch2)
• M00401 HSC Reset Bit (ch2)
• MW0000 PLC mode control
• MW0003 Run/Stop Switch
• MW0010 HSC Configuration Register (ch1)
• MW0011 HSC Current Register (ch1)
• MW0013 HSC Preset Register (ch1)
• MW0020 HSC Configuration Register (ch2)
• MW0021 HSC Current Register (ch2)
• MW0023 HSC Preset Register (ch2)
These registers are used when the built-in I/O of the HMC7030A-L is configured as high speed counters.
The MAPware automatically allocates the necessary I/O registers to each expansion module according to slot
location and type of module. For example, a HMC unit that has eight digital inputs and eight digital outputs in
expansion slot #1 has coil addresses M01080, M01081, M01176, and M01177 and registers MW0100-MW0109
assigned for two high-speed counters. If slot#2 contains an analog 2 input/2 output module, the software
assigns no coil addresses and registers MW0200-MS0203 to read/write to the analog registers. When slot#4
contains a 12 point relay output module, MAPware assigns the MW0400 register for relay outputs.

325
The M and MW registers are mapped to the same memory area in the HMC with sixteen M coils per MW
register. To determine the register and bit location of a M coil memory area use the following equation: Mnnn =
MW(nnn/16 quotient), bit (nnn/16 remainder).
For example, M00161 corresponds to the second least significant bit (bit 1) of MW0010, (161/16 = 10r1).
Individual bits of the MW registers can be accessed with using the MW0000_00 notation, so the previous
example would be written as MW0010_01.

System Registers/Coils (S, SW)

These registers and coils are reserved by the HMC for specific purposes. A total of 100 system coils and 256
system registers are reserved. Although undefined system registers and coils could be used by the HMC
programmer, this area of memory may be used in the future for predefined uses. Therefore, use of this area of
memory should be limited to the predefined coils and registers. For a list of these memory areas, see Appendix
B – System Tag Memory.

Internal Registers/Coils (B, BW)

These are general purpose registers and coils which can be used at the discretion of the HMC programmer. This
area of memory is non-retentive so any data stored in these registers is lost once power has been removed from
the HMC.
The B coil memory and the BW register memory are mapped to the same memory area in the HMC with sixteen
B coils per BW register. Therefore, the least significant bit in register BW0 corresponds to the B0 coil. Likewise,
the B18 coil shares the same memory area as bit 2 of BW1. To determine the register and bit location of a B coil
memory area use the following equation: Bnnn = BW(nnn/16 quotient), bit (nnn/16 remainder).
Therefore B00050 coil corresponds to BW0003, bit 2 (50/16 = 3r2).

Data Registers (D)

These are general purpose registers which can be used at the discretion of the HMC programmer. This area of
memory is non-retentive so any data stored in these registers is lost once power has been removed from the
HMC.
Note that these registers can be configured as bits with the D00000_00 notation.

Retentive Registers (R)

These are general registers which can be used at the discretion of the HMC programmer. This area of memory is
retentive so any data stored in these registers remains once power has been removed from the HMC.
 Note that reading/writing to these registers requires more processing time than does using any of the other
registers in memory due to their retentive nature. Therefore, be aware that using these registers in ladder logic
blocks require more processing time.

IEC 61131-3 Tags

In projects created using the IEC 61131-3 programming mode, tags are not, necessarily, assigned an explicit
memory address. Instead they are created with a data type that determines the tags format and function. The
data type is selected in the Register/Coil Type dropdown list in the Add Tag window of the tag database. For
detailed instructions on creating tags refer to Chapter 4 – Tags.

326
Below is a table displaying the tag data types available in IEC 61131-3 projects.
Data Type Description Bits Value Range
BOOL Boolean value can have one of two values: 1 1 0 or 1
(ON / True) or 0 (OFF / False)
BYTE Unsigned Short (same as USINT) 8 0 to 255
DINT Signed Double Integer 32 -2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647
DWORD Unsigned Double Integer (same as UDINT) 32 0 to 4,294,967,295
INT Signed Integer 16 -32,768 to 32,767
LREAL IEEE 754 format, double precision floating 64
point
REAL IEEE 754 format, single precision floating 32 ±3.403 x 1038
point
SINT Signed Short Integer 8 -128 to 127
STRING Variable length string of ASCII characters 1 to 255 N/A
bytes
TIME Time of day 32 N/A
UDINT Unsigned Double Integer (same as DWORD) 32 0 to 4,294,967,295
UINT Unsigned Integer 16 0 to 65,535
USINT Unsigned Short Integer (Same as BYTE) 8 0 to 255
WORD Unsigned Integer (Same as UINT) 16 0 to 65,535

In addition to these data types, IEC 61131-3 projects share some of the data types available in Native Ladder
projects. In these cases the tags are given an explicit address which is visible in the tag database. These registers
are; Retentive Registers (R), System Coils / Registers (S, SW), Input Registers (X, XW), Output Registers (Y, YW),
and I/O Configuration Coils / Registers (M, MW). Refer to the previous section of this Appendix for information
on available addresses and using these registers.

327
Appendix B – System Tag Memory
The following tables list all of the internal memory of the HMC which is reserved for specific purposes.

S memory (System bits)

Tag Tag Name Type Access Models Description

Address Supported
S00000 Carry bit Coil Read/Write All HMC Overflow indication in
(1 models math operations of ladder
bit) and also used in rotate
with carry instruction.
S00001 High speed timer control bit Coil Read/Write All HMC Enable bit to start high
(1 models speed timer
bit)
S00003 Minute Change status Coil Read Only All HMC 1 for every change in
(1 models minute for one scan cycle
bit)
S00004 Hour Change status Coil Read Only All HMC 1 for every change in hour
(1 models for one scan cycle
bit)
S00005 Date Change status Coil Read Only All HMC 1 for every change in date
(1 models for one scan cycle
bit)
S00006 Month Change status Coil Read Only All HMC 1 for every change in
(1 models month for one scan cycle
bit)
S00007 Year Change status Coil Read Only All HMC 1 for every change in year
(1 models for one scan cycle
bit)
S00008 Screen saver Control Coil Read/Write Touchscreen 0: Disable screen saver;
(1 models 1: Enable screen saver.
bit) Can be changed during
runtime.
S00009 Beeper Control Coil Read/Write Touchscreen 1: Enable Beeper;
(1 models 0: Disable Beeper.
bit) Can be changed during
runtime.
S00010 RTC Battery status Coil Read Only All HMC 0: Battery voltage is OK
(1 models (i.e. above 2.2 V);
bit) 1: Low battery (i.e. below
2.2 V)
S00011 Default Coil Coil Read Write All HMC New objects added to the
(1 models project will default to this
bit) address. Does not perform
any function.

328
 Tag Tag Name Type Access Models Description
Address Supported
S00012 Refresh historical trend Coil Read/Write Touchscreen Refresh historical trend
(1 models window when set to 1
bit)
S00014 Acknowledge all alarms Coil Read Only All HMC 0: All alarms are
(1 models acknowledged;
bit) 1: All alarms are not
acknowledged in the Real
and Historical alarm
windows
S00016 Valid key beeper Control Coil Read/Write Touchscreen 1: Enable valid beeper;
(1 models 0: Disable valid beeper.
bit) Can be changed during
runtime
S00017 Invalid key beeper Control Coil Read/Write Touchscreen 1: Enable Invalid beeper;
(1 models 0: Disable Invalid beeper.
bit) Run time you can change
this bit
S00019 Invalid RTC date entry Coil Read Only All HMC 0=valid date;
(1 models 1= Invalid date
bit)
S00020 Popup Screen trigger Coil Read/Write Touchscreen This bit triggers the popup
(1 models screen number stored in
bit) SW23
S00021 COM1 failed node reconnect Coil Read/Write All HMC If this bit is set
control (1 models communication with the
bit) failed nodes is detected
after scan time SW0018
for port1. By default : ON
S00022 COM2 failed node reconnect Coil Read/Write Touchscreen If this bit is set
control (1 models communication with the
bit) failed nodes is detected
after scan time SW0019
for port2. By default : ON
S00023 COM3 failed node reconnect Coil Read/Write Ethernet If this bit is set
control (1 models communication with the
bit) failed nodes is detected
after scan time SW0022
for port3. By default : ON
S00027 Static Data Entry Focus Control Coil Read/Write HMC7030A- User can enable focus for
(1 M only static data entry using this
bit) bit.
S00028 Datlog Group1 log Control Coil Read/Write Touchscreen User can Start/Stop
(1 models logging in Bit Task mode
bit) for Group1 by using this
bit

329
 Tag Tag Name Type Access Models Description
Address Supported
S00029 Datlog Group2 log Control Coil Read/Write Touchscreen User can Start/Stop
(1 models logging in Bit Task mode
bit) for Group2 by using this
bit
S00030 Datlog Group3 log Control Coil Read/Write Touchscreen User can Start/Stop
(1 models logging in Bit Task mode
bit) for Group3 by using this
bit
S00031 Datlog Group4 log Control Coil Read/Write Touchscreen User can Start/Stop
(1 models logging in Bit Task mode
bit) for Group4 by using this
bit
S00032 Data Entry Lock Control Coil Read/Write All HMC User can Lock / Unlock the
(1 models data entry.
bit) 1= Data_Entry Lock,
0= Data_Entry unlock.
S00033 Data Entry Key Selection Coil Read/Write All HMC Mode of data entry
(1 models 1= Start data entry only
bit) through 'Enter' key.
0= Start data entry
through 'Enter' key or
Numeric key.
S00034 Ladder Instruction Error Status Coil Read Only All HMC Set if Division by zero
(1 models operation is performed in
bit) the ladder instruction and
for invalid conditions or
operands in case of
conversion instructions.
S00035 Real and Historical Alarm Control Coil Read/Write All HMC 1: Alarm bits are not
(1 models monitored.
bit) 0: Alarms bits are
monitored
S00036 RUN LED Control Coil Read/Write All HMC 0: LED functionality works
(1 models for upload/ RUN/
bit) Communication status
1: LED OFF
S00037 USB Host Menu Trigger Coil Read/Write Touchscreen System tag to allow USB
(1 models host operation to user
bit)
S00039 Backlight Color Control-Red Coil Read/Write HMC7030 Controls the RED Color
(Retentive) (1 models backlight operation
bit)
S00040 Backlight Color Control-Green Coil Read/Write HMC7030 Controls the GREEN Color
(Retentive) (1 models backlight operation
bit)

330
 Tag Tag Name Type Access Models Description
Address Supported
S00041 Backlight Color Control-Blue Coil Read/Write HMC7030 Controls the BLUE Color
(Retentive) (1 models backlight operation
bit)
S00042 Unit DHCP Enable/Disable Coil Read Only Ethernet 1: DHCP Enabled.
(1 models 0: DHCP Disabled
bit)
S00043 Logged Data Clear Bit Coil Read/Write Touchscreen Set this bit to 1 to erase
(1 models the Logged Data on the
bit) HMC
S00047 I/O Expansion 1 Communication Coil Read Only HMC 1: Communication
Status (1 models w/ established with correct
bit) Expansion I/O card,
I/O Modules 0: Error or no I/O card
present
S00048 I/O Expansion 2 Communication Coil Read Only HMC 1: Communication
Status (1 models w/ established with correct
bit) Expansion I/O card,
I/O Modules 0: Error or no I/O card
present
S00049 I/O Expansion 3 Communication Coil Read Only HMC 1: Communication
Status (1 models w/ established with correct
bit) Expansion I/O card,
I/O Modules 0: Error or no I/O card
present
S00050 I/O Expansion 4 Communication Coil Read Only HMC 1: Communication
Status (1 models w/ established with correct
bit) Expansion I/O card,
I/O Modules 0: Error or no I/O card
present
S00051 I/O Expansion 5 Communication Coil Read Only HMC 1: Communication
Status (1 models w/ established with correct
bit) Expansion I/O card,
I/O Modules 0: Error or no I/O card
present
S00057 Forced Buzzer Control Coil Read/Write Touchscreen HMC Beep sounds
(1 models continuously if bit is true
bit)
S00058 DHCP Enable/Disable Coil Read/Write Ethernet Turn DHCP on or off
reconfigurable (1 models during runtime.
bit)
S00059 SD_Card_Menu_Trigger Coil Read/Write HMC3000
(1 models
bit)

331
 Tag Tag Name Type Access Models Description
Address Supported
S00088 Screen_Login_Logout_Status_Coil Coil Read Only Touchscreen
(1 models
bit)
S00089 DHCP_Status Coil Read Only Ethernet DHCP active or not.
(1 models
bit)
S00090 Change_Password_Status_Coil Coil Read Only Touchscreen
(1 models
bit)
S00091 Bar graph Min-Max limit error bit Coil Read Only All HMC
(1 models
bit)
S00092 Initialize__Port_Com1 Coil Read/Write Touchscreen Update Com1 Port
(1 models settings (SW239-243)
bit) during runtime.
S00093 Initialize__Port_Com2 Coil Read/Write Touchscreen Update Com2 Port
(1 models settings (SW244-248)
bit) during runtime.
S00094 Initialize_EthernetSettings Coil Read/Write Ethernet Update Ethernet settings
(1 models (SW141-146, S58) during
bit) runtime.

SW memory (System registers)

Tag Address Tag Name Type Access Models Description

Supported
SW0000 DefaultReg Register Read/Write All HMC Newly added objects will default
(2 models to using this register, does not
bytes) perform any function
SW0001 Language Register Read/Write All HMC Value in this register controls
(2 models what language is displayed in
bytes) objects
SW0002 Logger Memory % Register Read Only Touchscreen Shows percentage use of logger
Usage (2 models memory.( 0 to 100)
bytes)
SW0003_00 Logger Memory Bit Read Only Touchscreen 1 = Memory full
full Status models
SW0003_01 Logger Memory Bit Read Only Touchscreen 1 = Memory clear being executed
clear Status models
SW0003_02 RTC Status Bit Read Only All HMC 1 = RTC fail
models
SW0003_13 COM3 Status Bit Read Only Touchscreen 0 = Communication Error;
models 1= Communicating with PLC

332
Tag Address Tag Name Type Access Models Description
Supported
SW0003_14 COM1 Status Bit Read Only All HMC 0 = Communication Error;
models 1= Communicating with PLC
SW0003_15 COM2 Status Bit Read Only Touchscreen 0 = Communication Error;
models 1= Communicating with PLC
SW0004 Historical Alarm Register Read Only All HMC Shows no. of alarms stored in
count (2 models history
bytes)
SW0005 Screen Trigger Register Read/Write All HMC Shows active screen no. You can
Register (2 models change screen by writing any
bytes) valid screen no. in this register
SW0006 Screen saver time Register Read/Write Touchscreen Time of inactivity, in minutes,
(2 models before screen saver is triggered.
bytes) Can be changed in runtime.
SW0008 IP conflict Status Register Read Only Ethernet 1: IP conflict exists.
Register (2 models 0: No IP conflict
bytes)
SW0009 Driver Scan time Register Read Only Touchscreen Shows time required to
register for port 3 (2 models communicate with port 3 in
bytes) milliseconds. Use ####.# format
for display
SW0010 RTC Day of Month Register Read Only All HMC RTC day in integer format
(2 models (00-31)
bytes)
SW0011 RTC Month Register Read Only All HMC RTC month in integer format
(2 models (012)
bytes)
SW0012 RTC Year Register Read Only All HMC RTC year in integer format
(2 models (00-99)
bytes)
SW0013 RTC Hour Register Read Only All HMC RTC hour in integer format
(2 models (00-23)
bytes)
SW0014 RTC Min Register Read Only All HMC RTC minute in integer format (00-
(2 models 59)
bytes)
SW0015 RTC Sec Register Read Only All HMC RTC sec in integer format
(2 models (00-59)
bytes)
SW0016 RTC Day of Week Register Read Only All HMC RTC day of week in integer format
(2 models (00-06) with 0=Sunday, …,
bytes) Saturday=6
SW0017 Scan time register Register Read Only All HMC Shows time required to execute
(2 models Screen, Screen task and global
bytes) task in millisecond. Use ####.#
format for display

333
Tag Address Tag Name Type Access Models Description
Supported
SW0018 COM1 failed node Register Read/Write All HMC Shows time in sec to recover the
reconnect time (2 models communication with failed nodes
(Sec) bytes) for port1. The default value is
60Sec
SW0019 COM2 failed node Register Read/Write Touchscreen Shows time in sec to recover the
reconnect time (2 models communication with failed nodes
(Sec) bytes) for port2. The default value is
60Sec
SW0020 Driver Scan time Register Read Only All HMC Shows time required to
register for port1 (2 models communicate with port1 in
bytes) milliseconds. Use ####.# format
for display
SW0021 Driver Scan time Register Read Only All HMC Shows time required to
register for port2 (2 models communicate with port2 in
bytes) milliseconds. Use ####.# format
for display
SW0022 COM3 failed node Register Read/Write Ethernet Shows time in sec to recover the
reconnect time (2 models communication with failed nodes
(Sec) bytes) for port3. The default value is 60
Sec
SW0023 Popup Screen Register Read/Write Touchscreen Value stored in this register
number (2 models controls the popup screen shown
bytes) when S00020 is set ON
SW0028 HMC IP Address Low Read Only Ethernet Least Significant byte of HMC’s IP
[LS Byte] byte of models Address i.e. 254 in 192.168.0.254
register
SW0028 HMC IP Address High Read Only Ethernet Second byte of HMC’s IP Address
[2nd Byte] byte of models i.e. 0 in 192.168.0.254
register
SW0029 HMC IP Address Low Read Only Ethernet Third byte of HMC’s IP Address
[3rd Byte] byte of models i.e. 168 in 192.168.0.254
register
SW0029 HMC IP Address High Read Only Ethernet Most significant byte of HMC’s IP
[MS Byte] byte of models Address i.e. 192 in 192.168.0.254
register
SW0030 HMC Subnet Mask Low Read Only Ethernet Least Significant byte of HMC’s
[LS Byte] byte of models Subnet Mask i.e. 0 in
register 255.255.255.0
SW0030 HMC Subnet Mask High Read Only Ethernet 2nd byte of HMC’s Subnet Mask
[2nd Byte] byte of models i.e. 255 in 255.255.255.0
register
SW0031 HMC Subnet Mask Low Read Only Ethernet 3rd byte of HMC’s Subnet Mask
[3rd Byte] byte of models i.e. 255 in 255.255.255.0
register

334
Tag Address Tag Name Type Access Models Description
Supported
SW0031 HMC Subnet Mask High Read Only Ethernet Most significant byte of HMC’s
[MS Byte] byte of models Subnet Mask i.e. 255 in
register 255.255.255.0
SW0032 HMC Default Low Read Only Ethernet Least significant byte of HMC’s IP
Gateway [LS Byte] byte of models Address i.e. 255 in 192.168.0.255
register
SW0032 HMC Default High Read Only Ethernet 2nd byte of HMC’s IP Address i.e.
Gateway [2nd byte of models 0 in 192.168.0.255
Byte] register
SW0033 HMC Default Low Read Only Ethernet 3rd byte of HMC’s IP Address i.e.
Gateway [3rd byte of models 168 in 192.168.0.255
Byte] register
SW0033 HMC Default High Read Only Ethernet Most significant byte of HMC’s IP
Gateway [MS byte of models Address i.e. 192 in 192.168.0.255
Byte] register
SW0034 Unit Download Register Read Only Ethernet TCP port used to upload
Port (2 models /download projects etc. to / from
bytes) the HMC
SW0038 Copy Screen Data Register Read Only Touchscreen
to USB Status (2 models
Register bytes)
SW0046 Ladder Scan Time Register Read Only All HMC Value is multiple of 0.1 mSec
(2 models
bytes)
SW0047 Timer Interrupt Register Read Only
Ladder Execution (2
Time bytes)
SW0064_00- Node Status 1 bit Read Only All HMC 1: Node Present
SW0079_15 Registers for per models 0: Not Present.
COM1 node Total of 16 words are mapped for
256 nodes (0 – 255).
Automatically added to database
when the node is configured.
SW0080_00- Node Status 1 bit Read Only Touchscreen 1: Node Present
SW0095_15 Registers for per models 0: Not Present.
COM2 node Total of 16 words are mapped for
256 nodes (0 – 255).
Automatically added to database
when the node is configured.
SW0096_00 Node Status 1 bit Read Only Ethernet 1: Node Present
– Registers for per models 0: Not Present.
SW0111_15 COM3 node Total of 16 words are mapped for
256 nodes (0 – 255).
Automatically added to database
when the node is configured.

335
Tag Address Tag Name Type Access Models Description
Supported
SW113 Datalog Upload Register Read/Write
Media Select (2
Register bytes)
SW0116 Factory Register Read/Write All HMC Reserved for factory application
Application 1 (2 models
bytes)
SW0117 Factory Register Read/Write All HMC Reserved for factory application
Application 2 (2 models
bytes)
SW0118 Factory Register Read/Write All HMC Reserved for factory application
Application 3 (2 models
bytes)
SW0119 Factory Register Read/Write All HMC Reserved for factory application
Application 4 (2 models
bytes)
SW0120 Factory Register Read/Write All HMC Reserved for factory application
Application 5 (2 models
bytes)
SW0122 Brightness set Register Read/ All HMC Set the screen brightness. Range:
register (2 Write models 0 to 100. 0 = backlight off, 100 =
(retentive) bytes) full brightness
SW0123 Factory Register Read/Write All HMC Reserved for factory application
Application 6 (2 models
bytes)
SW0124 Factory Register Read/Write All HMC Reserved for factory application
Application 7 (2 models
bytes)
SW0125 Factory Register Read/Write All HMC Reserved for factory application
Application 8 (2 models
bytes)
SW0126 Factory Register Read/Write All HMC Reserved for factory application
Application 9 (2 models
bytes)
SW0127 Failed Expansion Register Read/Write HMC Set the time to re-establish coms
reconnect time (2 Except: with an expansion port. The
(sec) bytes) HMC7030A- default value is 60Sec
L
SW0128 Screen Saver tag1 Register Read/Write
(2
bytes)
SW0129 Screen Saver tag 2 Register Read/Write
(2
bytes)

336
Tag Address Tag Name Type Access Models Description
Supported
SW0137 Screen Saver tag Register Read/Write
10 (2
bytes)
SW0139 Number of users Register Read Only Touchscreen Number of users logged in to the
logged in (2 models Web Server. Maximum is 10.
bytes)
SW0140 RTC milliseconds Register Read Only All HMC Milliseconds from real time clock.
(2 models (0 to 999)
bytes)
SW0141 HMC IP Address Low Read Write Ethernet Least Significant byte of HMC’s IP
Reconfigurable [LS byte of models Address i.e. 254 in 192.168.0.254
Byte] register
SW0141 HMC IP Address High Read Write Ethernet Second byte of HMC’s IP Address
Reconfigurable byte of models i.e. 0 in 192.168.0.254
[2nd Byte] register
SW0142 HMC IP Address Low Read Write Ethernet Third byte of HMC’s IP Address
Reconfigurable byte of models i.e. 168 in 192.168.0.254
[3rd Byte] register
SW0142 HMC IP Address High Read Write Ethernet Most significant byte of HMC’s IP
Reconfigurable byte of models Address i.e. 192 in 192.168.0.254
[MS Byte] register
SW0143 HMC Subnet Mask Low Read Write Ethernet Least Significant byte of HMC’s
Reconfigurable [LS byte of models Subnet Mask i.e. 0 in
Byte] register 255.255.255.0
SW0143 HMC Subnet Mask High Read Write Ethernet 2nd byte of HMC’s Subnet Mask
Reconfigurable byte of models i.e. 255 in 255.255.255.0
[2nd Byte] register
SW0144 HMC Subnet Mask Low Read Write Ethernet 3rd byte of HMC’s Subnet Mask
Reconfigurable byte of models i.e. 255 in 255.255.255.0
[3rd Byte] register
SW0144 HMC Subnet Mask High Read Write Ethernet Most significant byte of HMC’s
Reconfigurable byte of models Subnet Mask i.e. 255 in
[MS Byte] register 255.255.255.0
SW0145 HMC Default Low Read Write Ethernet Least Significant byte of HMC’s IP
Gateway byte of models Address i.e. 255 in 192.168.0.255
Reconfigurable [LS register
Byte]
SW0145 HMC Default High Read Write Ethernet 2nd byte of HMC’s IP Address i.e.
Gateway byte of models 0 in 192.168.0.255
Reconfigurable register
[2nd Byte]
SW0146 HMC Default Low Read Write Ethernet 3rd byte of HMC’s IP Address i.e.
Gateway byte of models 168 in 192.168.0.255
Reconfigurable register
[3rd Byte]

337
Tag Address Tag Name Type Access Models Description
Supported
SW0146 HMC Default High Read Write Ethernet Most Significant byte of HMC’s IP
Gateway byte of models Address i.e. 192 in 192.168.0.255
Reconfigurable register
[MS Byte]
SW0147 Monitor Port Register Read Write Ethernet TCP port used connect to the
Reconfigurable (2 models HMC for online monitoring
bytes)
SW0148 Download Port Register Read Write Ethernet TCP port used to upload
Reconfigurable (2 models /download projects etc. to / from
bytes) the HMC
SW0149 Display Ethernet Register Read/Write Ethernet
Messages (2 models
bytes)
SW0201- Screen Login User 6 Read/Write Touchscreen
SW0206 Name Words models
SW0207- Screen Login User 6 Read/Write Touchscreen
SW0212 Password Words models
SW0214 Screen Login Start Register Read Only Touchscreen
Hour (2 models
bytes)
SW0215 Screen Login Start Register Read Only Touchscreen
Minute (2 models
bytes)
SW0216 Screen Login Start Register Read Only Touchscreen
Second (2 models
bytes)
SW0217 Screen Login Start Register Read Only Touchscreen
Date (2 models
bytes)
SW0218 Screen Login Start Register Read Only Touchscreen
Month (2 models
bytes)
SW0219 Screen Login Start Register Read Only Touchscreen
Year (2 models
bytes)
SW0220 Logging Error Register Read Only Touchscreen
Message (2 models
bytes)
SW0221- Old Password 6 Read/Write Touchscreen
SW0226 Words models
SW0227- New Password 6 Read/Write Touchscreen
SW0232 Words models
SW0233- Confirm Password 6 Read/Write Touchscreen
SW0238 Words models

338
Tag Address Tag Name Type Access Models Description
Supported
SW0239 Baud Rate Com1 Register Read/Write Touchscreen 0: 4800 Baud
(2 models 1: 9600 Baud
bytes) 2: 19200 Baud
3: 38400 Baud
4: 57600 Baud
5: 115200 Baud
6: 187500 Baud
Set bit S92 to update runtime
setting.
SW0240 Parity Com1 Register Read/Write Touchscreen 0: No Parity
(2 models 1: Even Parity
bytes) 2: Odd Parity
Set bit S92 to update runtime
setting.
SW0241 Data Bits Com1 Register Read/Write Touchscreen 0: 7 Data Bits
(2 models 1: 8 Data Bits
bytes) Set bit S92 to update runtime
setting.
SW0242 Stop Bits Com1 Register Read/Write Touchscreen 0: 1 Stop Bit
(2 models 1: 2 Stop Bits
bytes) Set bit S92 to update runtime
setting.
SW0243 Node Address Register Read/Write Touchscreen 1 to 32. Set bit S92 to update
Com1 (2 models runtime setting.
bytes)
SW0244 Baud Rate Com2 Register Read/Write Touchscreen 0: 4800 Baud
(2 models 1: 9600 Baud
bytes) 2: 19200 Baud
3: 38400 Baud
4: 57600 Baud
5: 115200 Baud
6: 187500 Baud
Set bit S93 to update runtime
setting.
SW0245 Parity Com2 Register Read/Write Touchscreen 0: No Parity
(2 models 1: Even Parity
bytes) 2: Odd Parity
Set bit S93 to update runtime
setting.
SW0246 Data Bits Com2 Register Read/Write Touchscreen 0: 7 Data Bits
(2 models 1: 8 Data Bits
bytes) Set bit S93 to update runtime
setting.

339
Tag Address Tag Name Type Access Models Description
Supported
SW0247 Stop Bits Com2 Register Read/Write Touchscreen 0: 1 Stop Bit
(2 models 1: 2 Stop Bits
bytes) Set bit S93 to update runtime
setting.
SW0248 Node Address Register Read/Write Touchscreen 1 to 32. Set bit S93 to update
Com2 (2 models runtime setting.
bytes)

340
M memory (I/O configuration Coils)
In addition to the tags listed here, M addressed tags are assigned when an I/O module is added to the project
and are used to control the I/O module. For a list of MW tags available for each module and detailed
information on how to use them, refer to the appropriate product line I/O Module Guide
Tag Tag Name Type Access Models Description
Address Supported
M00480 System timer coil for 0.1 Coil Read Touchscreen
sec interval (1 bit) Only Models
M00481 System timer coil for 0.2 Coil Read Touchscreen
sec interval (1 bit) Only Models
M00482 System timer coil for 0.4 Coil Read Touchscreen
sec interval (1 bit) Only Models
M00483 System timer coil for 0.8 Coil Read Touchscreen
sec interval (1 bit) Only Models
M00484 System timer coil for 1 Coil Read Touchscreen
sec interval (1 bit) Only Models
M00485 System timer coil for 2 Coil Read Touchscreen
sec interval (1 bit) Only Models
M00486 System timer coil for 4 Coil Read Touchscreen
sec interval (1 bit) Only Models
M00487 System timer coil for 8 Coil Read Touchscreen
sec interval (1 bit) Only Models
M00512 Always On Coil Read Touchscreen Always on bit
(1 bit) Only Models
M00513 Always Off Coil Read Touchscreen Always off bit
(1 bit) Only Models

341
MW memory (I/O configuration registers)
In addition to the tags listed here, MW addressed tags are assigned when an I/O module is added to the project
and are used to control the I/O module. For a list of MW tags available for each module and detailed
information on how to use them, refer to the refer to the appropriate product line I/O Module Guide.
Tag Tag Name Type Access Models Description
Address Supported
MW0000 PLC Operation Mode Register Read/Write All HMC 0 = Initialization
(2bytes) models 1 = Halt mode
2 = Run mode
3 = Run in Forced mode
4 = Hold mode
6 = Fault mode
 Note: If an invalid number is
entered into this register, then
previous value will be retained.
MW0003 Run/Stop Switch Control Register Read/Write All HMC 0= Run
(2 models 1 = Halt
bytes)  Note: this value is stored in
retentive memory
MW0031 User Interrupt program Register Read/ HMC7000 Status of I/O interrupt routines
Status Flags (2 Write models 0 = Running
bytes) 1 = Not Running
MW0032 Always ON, OFF Bits Register Read/ Touchscreen
(2 Write models
bytes)

342
Appendix C – Maintenance Modes
The HMC Series has a built in set of maintenance screens that can be used to interact with the HMC hardware
outside of a MAPware project and perform maintenance tasks such as setting the HMC back to a factory default
condition or recalibrating the touchscreen. Although these modes are described in detail in this chapter, we
recommend that they be conducted only by qualified personnel as some of these tests require that internal
memory of the HMC be erased.

Entering Maintenance Modes

The following screens can be displayed during the initialization of the HMC. To display these screens, you must
touch a specific section of the touchscreen within two seconds of applying power to the HMC.

Firmware Erase Mode (Does not apply for HMC4000 and 2000 series)
Normally, there is no reason to erase the firmware. Firmware upgrades are easily done using the MAPware
software without erasing the existing firmware. However, if something unusual happens, causing the firmware
to become corrupted, this step allows you to erase the firmware. To continue to operate the HMC, you must
then download the latest firmware to the unit.
Enter Firmware Erase Mode by pressing the upper left corner of the touchscreen during power up:

Options:
• SKIP – press this button to skip this step and proceed with the normal boot sequence.
• CONFIRM – press this button to erase the firmware. Once the operation is completed a screen will be
displayed indicating that the firmware is not preset. The firmware can now be re-downloaded using
MAPware.

Application Erase Mode

Enter by pressing the upper right corner of the touchscreen during power up:

343
Options:
• SKIP – press this button to skip this step and proceed with the normal boot sequence.
• CONFIRM – press this button to erase the application (project). Once the operation is complete a
message indicating that there is no project loaded is displayed and a new project can be down loaded.

Firmware Information Mode

This is entered by pressing the lower right corner of the touchscreen during power up:

Options:
• EXIT – after reviewing the information, press this button to proceed with the normal boot sequence.

Touchscreen Calibration Screen

This is entered by pressing any area of the touchscreen (other than the points mentioned above) during power
up:

344
 Touch the crosshair symbol. The symbol will then move to the upper right corner; touch it again. Unit will
calibrate and continue with the normal boot sequence.

HMC HALT mode screen

This screen is displayed when the HMC is in HALT mode. In HALT mode the HMC does not run the application.
When the application is running the HMC is in RUN mode. In order to download a project the HMC must be in
HALT mode.

48 There are several ways the HMC can enter halt mode:
1. When the HMC powers on it initializes, runs a power on diagnostic test. If the power on test should fail
for any reason the HMC will enter HALT mode.
2. In the Download window, there is a checkbox labeled Automatically put unit in run mode after
download. If this box is unchecked the HMC will remain in halt mode after the download is complete.
3. In the Download window, there is a checkbox labeled Automatically put unit in halt mode before
download. If this box is checked MAPware will put the unit in HALT mode and immediately begin
downloading a project. If this box is not checked, and the unit is not placed in halt mode some other
way, the download will not start and an error message is displayed in the download window.
4. The HMC can be forced into HALT mode by writing a 1 to the PLC Execution Mode tag (MW0000), or
setting the Run/Stop Switch Control tag (MW0003) to 1.

345
When the HALT mode screen is displayed, the F1 function key, or a soft key labeled F1 on models without
function keys, toggles between the Run mode and Halt mode. The current operation mode is specified in the
first line below the screen divider:
• RUN/HALT Switch position: RUN (HALT)
When this is set to RUN, the operator can press the F2 function key, or a soft key labeled F2 on models without
function keys, to cause the HMC to begin executing the installed application. Pressing the F1 function key
changes the operation mode to HALT.
When this is set to HALT, the F2 function key is disabled. Pressing the F1 key causes the HMC to change to RUN
mode and begin executing the installed application. If you do not press the F1 key when the HMC is in HALT
mode, then it will continue to display this screen after power-up.

HMC HOLD mode screen

The HMC can be placed into HOLD mode by setting the PLC mode control tag (MW0000) to 4. This mode
suspends HMC operation and displays the HOLD mode screen:
From the HOLD mode screen the operator can toggle the Run/Stop switch control (F1), change the execution
mode to HALT (F2), exit HOLD mode and resume executing the project (F3).

346
 Your Industrial Control Solutions Source
_____________________
www.maplesystems.com

AW-10101040 Rev. 14

Maple Systems, Inc. | 808 134th St. SW, Suite 120, Everett, WA 98204 | 425.745.3229